JP2023107890A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a first part P7400 having a ball flow path P7612, a second part P7360 having a ball flow path P7361b, and a third part P7900 having ball detection means P7911a. The first part includes a first distribution part P7700 for a first flow path P7424a or a second flow path P7424b, first rolling obstruction parts P7733, P7721, and a second distribution part P7600 for a third flow path P7612 or a fourth flow path P7423b. The first rolling obstruction part includes a plurality of protrusion parts P7733b formed to protrude upward from a rolling surface for a ball. The plurality of protrusion parts are arranged to allow the ball to pass through between the plurality of protrusion parts and move beyond an outer periphery of the rolling surface to a downstream side.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 266

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are well known. For example, it is as described in Patent Document 1.

Patent Literature 1 discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

JP 2016-59498 A

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

The problems to be solved by the present invention are as described above, and the means for solving these problems will now be described.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A structural part comprising a first part (e.g., tower P7400 etc.), a second part (e.g., distribution part P7360, etc.), and a third part (e.g., specific area unit P7900, etc.) A gaming machine having
The first part has a flow path (for example, passage part P7612 etc.) for game balls supplied to the first part,
The second part has a flow path (for example, passage part P7361b etc.) that guides the game ball to the first part,
The third part includes detection means (for example, sensor part P7911a etc.) capable of detecting winning of a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the first part,
The first portion comprises:
a first flow path (e.g., specific area side guide portion P7424a, etc.);
a second flow path different from the first flow path (for example, a non-specific area side guide portion P7424b, etc.);
A first distributing part ( For example, the third stage part P7700, etc.),
A first rolling obstruction portion (for example, rolling obstruction portion P7733, projection portion P7721, etc.) capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first distribution portion;
A third flow path (e.g., passage portion P7612, etc.) connected to the first distribution portion, or a fourth flow path (e.g., discharge passage side guide portion P7423b, etc.) different from the third flow path A second distribution unit (for example, a second stage unit P7600 etc.) different from the first distribution unit that can be distributed to
The first rolling obstacle portion includes a plurality of projecting portions (for example, projecting portion P7733b, etc.) formed to protrude above the rolling surface of the game ball rolling on the first distribution portion. ,
The plurality of protrusions are arranged so that the game ball can move downstream beyond the outer circumference of the rolling surface through between the plurality of protrusions (for example, the plurality of protrusions 7733b, The game ball is arranged so as to be movable to the downstream specific area side guide portion P7424a or non-specific area side guide portion P7424b beyond the outer circumference of the rolling surface through between the plurality of projecting portions 7733b etc.) characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the front right diagonally above. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, (B) An example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the first pachinko game machine. The first pachinko game machine is an example of a normal symbol determination table. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving setting processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the normal game state of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of losing) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the big hit-type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving per-system look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process of changing a pending image from a dedicated common winning-type look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning-type look-ahead performance form. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal that is output to the outside according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the open mode is the first open mode, and (B) a case where the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a game board of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention; (a) It is a perspective view showing a general prize winning unit of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. (b) It is a front view showing a general winning slot unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a plan view showing a general winning slot unit of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention; 110(b) is a cross-sectional view along XP1-XP1 in FIG. 110(a); FIG. It is a front cross-sectional view showing an upper attacker section of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a lower attacker section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front cross-sectional view showing a lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a base plate of a lower attacker section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; It is a front view showing the base plate of the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a base plate to which the opening/closing unit and the like of the lower attacker section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention are fixed; FIG. 10 is a rear view showing a base plate to which the opening/closing unit and the like of the lower attacker section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention are fixed; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a cover of a lower attacker section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; It is a rear view showing the cover of the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a rear guide portion of the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (a) It is a front view showing a rear side guide section of a lower attacker section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. (b) A plan view showing a rear side guide portion of the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (c) is a cross-sectional view along XP2-XP2 in FIG. 121(a); It is a front schematic diagram showing the mounting state of the rear side guide portion of the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front enlarged schematic diagram showing the lower side of the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9 is a front view showing the flow of game balls on the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; It is a front cross-sectional view showing the flow of game balls in the upper attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front cross-sectional view showing the flow of game balls in the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view showing the flow of game balls in the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the flow of game balls on the lower side of the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is a front view of an upper movable effect accessory and an upper accessory lifting mechanism of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention; It is a perspective view of the upper movable production accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is an exploded view of a first effect section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; It is a bottom view of the upper movable production accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is an exploded view of a second effect section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is an exploded view of a movable pupil unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is an exploded view of the upper movable effect accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; It is a front enlarged view of the left end portion of the lifted portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the right end portion of the upper movable effect accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the right end portion of the lifted portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the upper movable production accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the left end (partial) of the upper movable production accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a left view of the eyebrow rotation drive part of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the eyebrows rotation drive part of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the pupil rotation drive part of the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a left guide member and a left drive mechanism of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 12 is an enlarged perspective view of the upper portion of the left guide member and the left drive mechanism of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is an enlarged perspective view of the lower portion of the left guide member and the left drive mechanism of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a right guide member and a right drive mechanism of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 12 is an enlarged perspective view of the lower portion of the right guide member and the right drive mechanism of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which an effect is being performed according to the first mode; FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which an effect is being performed according to the second mode; FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a state in which an effect is being performed according to the second mode; FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which an effect is being performed according to the second mode; FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which an effect is being performed according to the third mode; It is a front view of a rotating accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front perspective view of a rotating accessory of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view of a rotating accessory of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a rotating accessory with the illustration of a rotating body omitted; FIG. 10 is a rear view showing a rotating accessory with the illustration of a rotating body omitted; FIG. 159 is a cross-sectional view along XP5-XP5 in FIG. 158; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; The front view which showed the inside of the rotating body of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the side view which showed the drive means of the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing shielding means of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; (a) It is the front view which showed the light-emitting means side shielding member of the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 164(b) is a cross-sectional view along XP6-XP6 in FIG. 164(a); (a) It is the front view which showed the rotating body side shielding member of the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 165(b) is a cross-sectional view along XP7-XP7 in FIG. 165(a); FIG. 11 is a front perspective view showing the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the first rendering surface is controlled to the rendering position; FIG. 11 is a front view showing the state of light emission of the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the first rendering surface is controlled to the rendering position; FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view showing the rotating accessory in a state in which the movement of the second rendering surface is controlled to the rendering position; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view showing the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the second rendering surface is controlled to the rendering position; FIG. 10 is a front view showing the state of light emission of the rotating accessory in a state in which the movement of the second rendering surface is controlled to the rendering position; It is a front view which shows the production|presentation apparatus of the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a back view which shows the production|presentation apparatus of a standby state. It is a perspective view which shows a left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. It is a rear view which shows a left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body; FIG. 4 is an enlarged rear view showing the left side portion of the lateral movement control mechanism; FIG. 4 is an enlarged rear view showing the central portion of the lateral movement control mechanism; FIG. It is an enlarged rear view showing the right portion of the left-right movement control mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view showing a movable body. It is a perspective view which shows an engaging part. It is a perspective view which shows a belt and an engaging part. (a) is a cross-sectional view along XP3-XP3 in FIG. 177; 177B is a sectional view along XP4-XP4 in FIG. 177; FIG. It is a perspective view which shows a reinforcement cover. It is a rear view which shows a reinforcement cover. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the movable body is positioned at the center in the left-right direction of the effect position; It is a front view showing a gaming machine in which the movable body is positioned to the right of the effect position. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in which the movable body is positioned to the left of the effect position. It is a front view showing a gaming machine that moves the movable body from the performance position to the standby position. (a) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and the control means located in the standby position. (b) It is a schematic diagram showing a movable body and a restricting means positioned at the center in the left-right direction in the production position. (a) It is a schematic diagram showing a movable body and a restricting means located on the right side of the production position. (b) A schematic diagram showing a movable body and a restricting means located on the left side of the effect position. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and a control means which are moved from an effect position to a standby position. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention; It is a front view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a front perspective view of a lower accessory device of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a front perspective view of a lower accessory device of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the lower accessory device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower accessory device of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention; It is a rear perspective view of a lower accessory and a link arm. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower accessory. FIG. 198 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 197; A rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is in the standby position. A rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is in the middle between the standby position and the production position. The rear view showing the state in which the lower accessory is in the production position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA according to the first alternative example; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA according to a second alternative example; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA according to a third example; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a production device in which an opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in a closed position; FIG. 12 is a front view showing the effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is in the closed position; FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view showing the effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is in the closed position; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention, with a part of the effect device omitted, in which the opening and closing accessory is in the closed position; It is a rear view showing the effect device in the closed state of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a production device in which an opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in an open position; FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view showing the effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is in the open position; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a production device in which an opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in an open position; FIG. 11 is a front view showing the effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is in the open position; FIG. 12 is a rear view showing the effect device in the open/locked state of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is a rear view showing the effect device in the open/unlocked state of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a rendering device in which a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention are positioned at a rendering position; FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view showing the effect device in which the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention are positioned at the effect position; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory in a standby position; FIG. 4 is a partially omitted perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory in a standby position; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory in a performance position; FIG. 10 is a partially omitted perspective view showing the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory in the production position; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory; 214(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line X1-X1 in FIG. 214; 214B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 214; (a) It is a front view which shows a guide gear. (b) It is a front view which shows a bullet accessory. (c) It is a front view which shows a 1st decoration base part. (d) It is a front view which shows a 2nd decoration base part. It is an exploded perspective view showing a bullet accessory. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing an outer spiral member and an inner spiral member; FIG. (a) A schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at a standby position. (b) A schematic diagram showing the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory that move from the standby position to the production position. (a) A schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory that move from a standby position to an effect position. (b) A schematic diagram showing the bullet accessory and the decorative accessory at the production position. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the moving distances of the bullet accessory, the first decorative accessory, and the second decorative accessory in the front-rear direction; (a) A schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory that move from a production position to a standby position. (b) A schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at a standby position. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows a production|presentation apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view showing a production device. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a tower object and a specific area unit; It is a perspective view which shows a tower article. It is an exploded perspective view showing a tower article. It is an exploded perspective view showing a tower article seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view showing a drive unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the upper portion of the drive unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the lower portion of the drive unit; FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a discharge guide section, a drive section, and a distribution section; It is a top view which shows a drive gear and a disk part. It is a side section perspective view showing a production device. It is a sectional side view which shows a production|presentation apparatus. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a tower object and a specific area unit viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a partly omitted tower object and a specific area unit as seen from the rear; It is a side section perspective view showing a drive unit. It is a sectional side view showing a drive unit. It is a side cross-sectional perspective view which shows a 1st stage part and a 2nd stage part. It is a side cross-sectional view showing a first stage portion and a second stage portion. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st stage part. It is a top view which shows a 1st stage part. It is a perspective view which shows the rear side part of a 1st stage part. (a) It is a front view which shows a rocking|fluctuation transmission part. (b) It is a rear view which shows a rocking|fluctuation transmission part. It is a perspective view which shows a 2nd stage part. It is a top view which shows a 2nd stage part. It is an enlarged perspective view showing a partly omitted tower. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing the rear part of the tower with a part omitted; (a) It is a front view showing a rolling inhibition portion positioned in front of a second stage rotating portion. (b) is a side cross-sectional view showing a rolling inhibition portion of the second stage rotating portion; FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional perspective view showing a third stage section and a specific area unit; FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view showing a third stage section and a specific area unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded side cross-sectional view showing a third stage section and a specific area unit; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a third stage section and a specific area unit; FIG. 11 is a plan view showing a third stage section and a specific area unit; It is a front view which shows typically operation|movement of a tower article. FIG. 4 is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the tower is tilted to the left; FIG. 4 is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the tower is tilted backward; FIG. 4 is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the tower is tilted to the right; (a) It is a rear view which shows typically the state rocked so that the 1st stage main body and support part might be inclined to the right. (b) is a rear view schematically showing a state in which the first stage main body and the supporting portion are rocked so as to incline to the left; It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front perspective view showing a game board. It is a front perspective view which shows a production|presentation apparatus. 1 is a front perspective view showing a production device (excluding a logo accessory); FIG. It is a rear perspective view showing a production device. It is an exploded perspective view showing a production device. It is an exploded perspective view showing a movable production accessory. It is a rear view which shows a production|presentation apparatus. It is a front view which shows a left raising/lowering mechanism. It is an enlarged front view which shows the upper part of a left raising/lowering mechanism. It is an enlarged front view which shows the lower part of a left raising/lowering mechanism. It is front sectional drawing which shows the lower part of a left raising/lowering mechanism. It is a left side view which shows a lower left holding part, a left impact-absorbing means, and an inclined guide part. It is a front view which shows a left lower holding|maintenance part and a left side impact-absorbing means. (a) It is a left view which shows a lower left holding|maintenance part. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. It is front sectional drawing which shows a shock-absorbing means. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the game board with the movable effect accessory at the standby position; FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the holding mechanism with a solenoid excited; FIG. 10 is a front view showing the game board with the movable effect accessory at the intermediate position; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view showing the effect device in a state where the movable effect accessory is in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view showing the effect device in a state where the movable effect accessory is in an intermediate position; FIG. 10 is a left side view showing the movable performance accessory and the inclined guide part in a state where the movable performance accessory is at the projecting position; FIG. 10 is a front view showing the game board in which the movable performance accessory is at the projecting position; FIG. 10 is a front perspective view showing the effect device in a state where the movable effect accessory is in the projecting position; FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view showing the effect device in a state where the movable effect accessory is in the projecting position; FIG. 10 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the ornamental accessory board and the second decorative lens when the harpoon accessory is in a vertical posture. FIG. 10 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the accessory illumination board and the second decorative lens when the harpoon accessory is in an inclined posture; FIG. 10 is a left side view showing a modification of the positional relationship between the ornamental accessory board with the harpoon accessory in a vertical position and the first decorative lens and the second decorative lens. FIG. 10 is a left side view showing a modification of the positional relationship between the ornamental accessory substrate, the first decorative lens, and the second decorative lens, with the harpoon accessory in an inclined posture; It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing an upper accessory. It is a front view showing an upper accessory. It is a rear view showing an upper accessory. FIG. 4 is a partially exploded perspective view showing a first accessory and a second accessory; 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a first accessory and a second accessory; FIG. Fig. 2 is a partially exploded perspective view showing the first accessory and the second accessory seen from the rear; FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a first accessory; Fig. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the upper part of the upper accessory with the second decorative member omitted; It is an enlarged front cross-sectional view showing the upper part of the upper accessory. Fig. 2 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view schematically showing a first accessory; It is a back view which shows a 1st accessory, a 2nd accessory, and a drive mechanism. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a receiving member and an arm; FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the game board in the first slide state; FIG. 10 is a front view showing the upper accessory in the first sliding state; FIG. 11 is a rear view showing the first accessory, the second accessory, and the drive mechanism in the first slide state; It is a front view showing the game board in the second slide state. FIG. 11 is a front view showing the upper accessory in the second sliding state; FIG. 10 is a rear view showing the first accessory, the second accessory, and the drive mechanism in the second slide state;

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is directed forward.
The back side of the pachinko machine is facing backwards, the left side when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is facing left,
The right side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is to the right, the top of the pachinko machine is to the top, the bottom of the pachinko machine is to the bottom, and the clockwise direction of the pachinko machine is to the right when viewed from the front. The clockwise direction and vice versa the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination processing (hereinafter referred to as
The result of the "normal design lottery") is confirmed. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, the first pachinko machine, the second pachinko machine and the third
In explaining the pachinko gaming machine, the case where the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be described as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the start condition of the second special symbol is established preferentially over the start condition of the first special symbol when the display is suspended, and the first Pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as
(referred to as a "sequential variator").

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol are being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied. In addition, in the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as that the display is withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. Further, in the sequential variation machine, the condition for starting the second special symbol is that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed.
It is not in a jackpot game state, etc., the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and
It is established when at least all of the conditions that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (Fig. 2
, see FIG. 3), the board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and the game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2
See), etc. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

It should be noted that the outer frame 2 is connected via the base door 3 to a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9,
A high strength is required in order to support a large number of members such as the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, and the like. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 can be
It is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size. Especially if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum,
It is also possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 formed in the game board unit 10 (
4 to be described later) and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . In addition, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effect etc. are arranged in the peripheral part of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and in front of these LED groups 46, L
An ED cover is provided. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46 . The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . This dish unit 5
is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a game arcade clerk or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "C
It is called "HANCE button" or "push button". The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process for special symbols. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . Lower plate 5
2 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and the game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.例文帳に追加

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the lower tray 5
2 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52.例文帳に追加In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the panel body 61
placed on the front side of the The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 is sent to a shooting rail (
(not shown), and rolls in an arc shape along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to be launched into a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 .
The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed.
In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The dispensing device 82 moves the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 when the dispensing condition is satisfied.
A predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied to are put out to, for example, an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. substrate 9
2. A payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 below) for supplying power. ) are mounted on the board unit 9 .

In addition, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, and the payout/launch control board 9
3 and power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, all of which are housed in a board case.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. center accessory 115, first starting port 120, general prize winning port 122, passage gate unit 125, special electric accessory unit 130, second starting port 140, and normal electric accessory unit 145, LED unit 160, and out port 178
and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10 . note that,
As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the game panel 10
0 may be entirely made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized in a front view may be made of a transparent member. Also, game panel 1
00 may be composed of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 .
The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and has an arcuate center rail 116 above it. game area 10
The game balls shot toward 5 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, of the game area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is called a left area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called a right area 107. The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a hitting method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left area 106 is called "left hitting", and the right area 107
A hitting method in which a game ball is shot so as to flow down is called "right hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 .
The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which game balls can enter is located behind the stage 118 in the center in the left-right direction.
is formed, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is configured to be released directly above the first start opening 120 . Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is
Compared to the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119, the game ball enters (passes through) the first start entrance 120 with a higher probability. there is

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 120, the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later)
reference). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random number for judging big hit, random number for first special symbol pattern, random number for reach judgment for first special symbol,
And various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting the effect of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 at maximum). The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "fluctuation starting condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol,
Various random numbers such as the symbol random number of the first special symbol, the reach determination random number of the first special symbol, and the effect selection random number of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as start information of the first special symbol. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize.
In place of or in addition to 2, a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize may be provided.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right region 107, and includes a passing gate 126 constructed so that a game ball hit to the right can pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of a game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127,
Various data related to normal symbols (for example, random numbers for winning determination of normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a large winning slot 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning slot 131, and a special electric accessory 133.
It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning hole 131, a big winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

Also, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) a prize when controlled in a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the prize-winning entrance. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the big prize mouth 1
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 31 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and in which a game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize winning port 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. is.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is difficult or impossible to win a game ball hit to the left due to, for example, a game nail. is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, the second starting port 14
It is not essential to configure 0 in such a manner, and it may be provided in the right area 107, for example.
Also, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol Random number for big hit determination, random number for second special symbol, random number for reach determination for second special symbol,
And various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting the effect of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 at maximum). The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left area 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a prize winning hole, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the above prize winning opening is the second
A starting port 140 is used, and the above switch is a second starting port switch 141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chew and made of, for example, a blade member, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the general electric movable member 147. . The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the ordinary electric movable member 147 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 140, and in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second start port 140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. In addition, the general electric movable member 147 includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(out port)
The out port 178 is launched toward the game area 105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 178 is
It is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
A back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided behind the transparent game panel 100 . This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 . The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165, a second special symbol reservation display part 166, a probability variation notification display part 167, and a time reduction notification display part 168 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol start conditions") are established, the normal symbol display LED 161
A, 161b are alternately turned on and off, and variable display of normal symbols is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal design hit determination process is a normal design hit, the normal design display LED 161
A combination of lighting and extinguishing of a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 Winning (passing) of game balls to is facilitated.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable displays of normal symbols that are being held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending normal symbols") when the starting information of the normal symbols, that is, the variable display is being held. It is provided with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, if the number of reserved symbols is normally 2,
Both of the normal symbol hold display LEDs 162a and 162b light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . First special symbol display portion 163
has, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also has a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 163a to 1 constituting the first special symbol display unit 163
All or part of 63h alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing variable display of the first special pattern is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is established, the eight LEDs 164a to 1 constituting the second special symbol display unit 164
A variable display of the second special pattern is started in which all or part of 64h alternately or alternately repeats lighting and extinguishing. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit displays the number of variable display of special symbols that are suspended (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, that is, the variable display is suspended. It comprises a first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 .

When the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, the first special symbol suspension display unit 165
It displays the number of reserved first special symbols, and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a
, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first start port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 20 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted,
It refers to the state until the starting condition of the first special symbol is established.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 165 includes first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165.
The number of pending variable display of the first special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is three, the first special symbol reserved display L
The ED 165a blinks and the first special symbol pending display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a
, 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166, when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended,
It displays the number of reservations of the second special symbol, and the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol
, 166b. ``Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended'' means that the second start port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 40 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted,
It refers to the state until the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 includes second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166.
The number of pending variable display of the second special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display L
The ED 166a blinks and the second special symbol pending display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a
, 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

(Probability notification display unit)
The variable probability notification display unit 167 can be lit during execution of the variable probability control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on during execution of the probability variation control, but for example, by not lighting so as not to be able to grasp that the probability variation control is being performed from the appearance, the probability variation control is being executed may be concealed.

However, when the power supply is cut off during execution of variable probability control, the backup capacitor 2 described later
With the function of 07, the data indicating that the variable probability control is being executed does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is turned off during execution of variable probability control and then turned on, the variable probability notification display unit 167 lights up in such a manner that the variable probability control is being performed.

In addition, even if whether or not the probability variation control is being executed is kept secret before the power is turned off, the probability variation notification display unit 167 is lit when the power is turned on. By
It is configured so that it can be grasped that the variable probability control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the display unit 168 for time reduction information is, for example, the first display unit 168 for time reduction information
a and second time-reduction notification display portion 168b, but the number of time-reduction notification display portions 168 is not limited thereto.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state and a C time saving game state. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time-saving gaming state by a combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time-saving information display unit 168a and the second time-saving information display unit 168b.

The display unit 168 for time reduction information displays the first display unit 168a for time reduction information according to the time reduction control being executed.
Or / and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b may be lit, but for example, whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed cannot be grasped by the appearance (for example, By turning on or off in all lights off, all lights, a mode that is not related to the time saving control in progress), it is not possible to grasp from the appearance that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed You can keep it secret. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not time-saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. Interest can be heightened by making secret the kind of time saving control of inside.

However, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the time saving control, the backup capacitor 2 described later
With the function of 07, not only the data indicating that the time saving control is being executed but also the data indicating the type of time saving control being executed are not lost. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the execution of the time saving control and then the power is turned on, the time saving notification display unit 168 lights up or goes out.

Before the power is turned off, even if the fact that time saving control is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In this case, the display unit 168 for time saving notification is lit and / and extinguished in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be grasped from the appearance.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 6 shows
It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a WDT (watchdog
timer) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU
Although the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of 201, it is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , Second special symbol holding display portion 166, probability variation notification display portion 167, time reduction notification display portion 168, general electric solenoid 148, and special electric solenoid 135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . Also, the error notification monitor 1
In 72, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, a setting change code indicating that setting change processing is in progress, and a setting confirmation processing indicating that setting confirmation processing is in progress. It is also possible to display the code, etc. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starting switch 121 and a second starting switch 141.
, passage gate switch 127, count switch 132, and general winning opening switch 1
23 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detect signal is sent to I/O port 2.
05 to the main control circuit 200.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, and a setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming setting values in a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later.
, a backup clear switch 176 or the like that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. "Within a given case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only the corresponding parts of the case corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not the only option.
0 or the power supply circuit 450 may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 3
03, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU 30
1 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . Note that the display device 7
The image data to be displayed includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC is a sub CPU
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command from 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role item control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

[1-2-3. Dispensing/launching control circuit]
The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of
etc. are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . Although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side,
It may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

[1-2-4. power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize-winning ports (for example, the first start port 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126,
This is a game for determining whether or not to open the winning opening (the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) by actuating the normal electric accessory 146 . In addition, in this specification, "special symbol game"
is sometimes referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept. etc. are also included in "gaming".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, when the game is controlled to the big win game state after the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived, the special symbol game lasts until the end of the big win game state. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko game machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is performed. After the result of the processing is derived, if the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, one special symbol game is performed until the small winning game state ends.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, the operation of the special electric accessory 133 causes the jackpot 131 to open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30
000 msec), the round game is executed in an open state, and the possibility of winning the big winning opening 131 is relatively increased.

Also, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol display section 16 is the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit.
1, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 opens the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment), and for example, the possibility of winning the second starting opening 140 is relatively low. Increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes the first starting port 120 or the second
A special symbol start winning process performed when there is a winning (passing) to the starting port 140, and
Special symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, are included.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is satisfied. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, in the present embodiment high probability short-time gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, the display device 7
For example, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of , and effect control processing such as sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 are performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of game balls to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140 (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and random numbers for selecting effects) Various data such as various random numbers such as numerical values) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted at the time of winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 after the special symbol starts winning and before the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Pre-reading determination (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) to determine the winning/losing (whether or not "big hit" winning) and variation patterns prior to the special symbol hit determination process based on the starting information, and this pre-reading determination A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result may be provided. The above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the starting information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is established. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the results of the win determination process for the normal symbols and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols.
And, the effect control processing for performing a predetermined effect is executed. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU
201 determines whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating "normal winning" has been drawn to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)
) to increase the frequency of opening the electric sapo control, at least one of which is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

The electric sapo control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal pattern", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) of the normal electric accessory 146. It is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment),
Winning probability of "per normal design", variable display time of normal design, or / and normal electric accessory 1
46 opening patterns (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.). Improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball into a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). That is, when the electric sapo control is executed, compared with the case where the electric sapo control is not executed, the winning probability of "per normal symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, or / and normal electric accessories Winning facilitation (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) is performed by 146.

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is established.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, second
The pattern random number value of the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the second special symbol, and the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol) are extracted in a predetermined range (width) by executing the program by the main CPU 201 A soft random number system may be used in which random numbers are generated in the random number generator, or a hard random number system may be used in which random numbers are extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol win determination processing, the non-jackpot game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. In addition, the explanation about the small winning game state shall be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state is divided into a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol win determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning the big win in the win determination process of the special symbol is relatively high. can be broadly classified.

The high certainty gaming state includes a high certainty short working hours gaming state (high certainty high base) in which time saving control is executed. It should be noted that, although not included in the high certainty gaming state in the first pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. state may be included.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving game state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state, and a C time saving game state.

The A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a special symbol game of a specified number of times is executed or transitioned to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is changed. finish. When the A time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high certainty gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) has started, and the later-described RAM has been cleared. When the number of variable display times of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times) starting from such as, it is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted, and whether the special symbol game is executed for the specified number of times , When it shifts to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived,
When the specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving win" are executed or the game is shifted to the big win game state, the C time-saving game state is terminated. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, for example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed repeatedly, the conditions for shifting to the time-saving gaming state are established in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for shifting to multiple time-saving gaming states are established at the same time To do, the time saving game state is referred to as “overlapping”. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally activates the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Running in parallel is called "overlapping". However, the main CPU
Even if 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner, the player perceives that the game is controlled to one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the game state transition will be described.

Normal game state, time saving game state (A time saving game state, B time saving game state, C time saving game state),
And even if it is controlled to a high-probability game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, it shifts to a big win game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-certainty game state (for example, a high-certainty time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the high-precision game state, it does not shift from the high-precision game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly,
From the time-saving game state or the normal game state, the state does not shift to the high-certainty game state unless the jackpot game state is passed.

When it is controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the B time reduction game state or C time reduction game state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time reduction game state unless the jackpot game state is passed.
However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if it is controlled to either the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, when the special symbol game of the specified number of times is executed, it will shift to the normal game state. It is also possible to shift from the game state to the normal game state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times that can be executed in the A time saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transition to the B time saving game state, so from the A time saving game state to B It does not shift to the time saving game state. In addition, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the B time saving game state to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap. . However, since the A time-saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state as described above, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled in the B time-saving gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"
When it is, the transition condition to the C time saving game state is established, and the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can overlap.

When it is controlled to the C time saving game state, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit"
When it is, the transition condition to the C time saving game state is established, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state may overlap.

In addition, the detail about duplication of a time-saving game state is mentioned later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can progress the game in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, the right-handed hit is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 301
A control is executed to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of hitting that is regarded as a regular game mode. The "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (for example, shooting mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, the above setting key 17
4, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), etc., for example, setting 1
Any one of a plurality of setting values such as setting 6 can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (in this embodiment, for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state) the jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/319.
is about 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, and setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state). Setting 3
1/75 at setting 4, 1/74 at setting 5, 1/73 at setting 6, 1/72 at setting 6
It has become.

It should be noted that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all set values, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is 1/160, and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, the time saving probability is 1/240. there is The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, even if the time saving per probability is a common probability with all set values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the time saving number of times to be set) may be varied according to the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times are set as the number of time saving can be

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the small win is not included in the lottery target, but the small win may be included in the lottery target. When small hits are included in the lottery targets, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all set values. In addition, when the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination processing of one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (for example, the second special pattern) is performed. You can make it soothing. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the aspect of not performing the determination itself of whether or not the small hit was won, whether or not the small hit probability was set to 0 may be determined.

The above-mentioned short-time hit probability and the small hit probability when including the small hit in the lottery target are common probabilities for all set values as described above, but not limited to this, as different probabilities depending on the set value good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random number extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 120 and 140. , a table to be referred to when determining a "big hit" or "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery target is "time saving hit", "big hit" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 120 or / and When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is 0 to 65535 (65536 types)
extracted from the However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol win determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, if the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off,
When the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines, in the same way as in the first special symbol win determination process, based on the extracted big win determination random number value, a “time-saving win”, a “big win”, or a “loss”. ” is decided. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
When the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201
is determined as "time saving hit", and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time saving hit determination value data".
Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit".
, and the hit/lose determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201
"Loss" is determined, and the judgment value data is determined as "losing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". Also, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit",
The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Also, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the second
When the probability variable flag is off during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines a "jackpot",
The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 478 to 65535
If either of
"Loss Judgment Value Data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit",
The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 1124 to 6553.
5, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging the big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the hit judging process of the first special symbol), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding big hit judgment value data and loss judgment value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag is turned from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or decreases) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared with the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and when the "time saving win" is won just before the time saving game state ends, the time saving game state is activated. It will be extended substantially, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, even if the variable probability flag is ON or OFF, it is possible to win the "time saving hit". However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal game state, time reduction game state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time reduction game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time reduction hit", but the probability variation flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining a stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting ports 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". "
The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning judgment processing is a big hit. This is a command for designating the pattern to be displayed when the variable display is stopped.
The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.
”.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 2
01 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
to select. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
Regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of, for example, 97 to 99, the main C
PU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "z
A7".

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201
"z9" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
9”.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
The main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A shows the main ROM 20 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine.
2 is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in . The special symbol stop mode determination table includes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 163 when the variable display of special symbols is stopped.
It is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) according to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) forming the first special symbol display portion 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the first special symbol area 0 corresponds to 163a, the first special symbol area 1 corresponds to 163b, the first special symbol area 2 corresponds to 163c, and the first special symbol area 3 corresponds to 163d. , the first special symbol area 4 corresponds to 163e, the first special symbol area 5 corresponds to 163f, the first special symbol area 6 corresponds to 163g, and the first special symbol area 7 corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each area of 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display section 164 one to one. For example, the second special symbol area 0 corresponds to 164a, the second special symbol area 1 corresponds to 164b, the second special symbol area 2 corresponds to 164c, and the second special symbol area 3 corresponds to 164d. , the second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (time saving win display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol The LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed.
When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 displays the first special symbol display section 163
Of the eight LEDs constituting the, LED163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, LED163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, LE corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol
D163h is lit, and other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163 and the first special symbol area. 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off,
It is determined to stop display the first special symbol display portion 163 . Also, if the selection pattern command is "z
7”, the main CPU 201 displays eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164.
Among them, LED164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special design, LED164b corresponding to the area 1 of the second special design, and LED164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special design are turned on,
In the mode that other LEDs are turned off, the second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 displays the second special symbol display section 1
Of the eight LEDs constituting the 64, LED164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, LED164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, LED164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7 The second special symbol display section 16 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.
4 is determined to be statically displayed.

Also, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the special symbol display unit 163
, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163.
3d, the LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is stopped. Decide to display. If the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CP
U201, among eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display portion 163, LED163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol, LED163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol The LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 displays eight L
Of the ED, LED163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the first special symbol area 4
LED163e corresponding to, LED163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, the first
The first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163g corresponding to the special symbol area 6 is lit and the other LEDs are extinguished. The selected pattern command is "z9
, the main CPU 201 selects an LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and an LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display unit 164. , LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 displays the second special symbol display section 1
Of the eight LEDs constituting 64, LED164d corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol, and LED164f corresponding to the area 5 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. 2 It is determined that the special symbol display portion 164 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", the special symbol display unit 163
, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163.
It is determined to stop and display the first special symbol display part 163 in a mode in which only 3h is lit and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201
Of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display portion 164, only the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol region 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off. Decide to stop displaying.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol stop mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED to constitute, and controls the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 .

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display portion 163 and the display mode of the LED led to the second special symbol display portion 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable to transmit the control signals separately for the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 .

FIG. 12(B) shows the program RO of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a decorative design stop mode determination table stored in M. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the decorative pattern stop mode (symbol combination) derived when the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 is stopped, according to the pattern designation command. be done. It should be noted that the "remarks" column shown in FIG.

Since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled so that the display effect for the special symbol being displayed is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 are composed of 9 patterns, for example, 1 to 9, for the left pattern, and 10 patterns, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern, for the middle pattern. , and the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving design is a design stopped and displayed when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special design lottery is a time-saving winning. By stop-displaying the medium pattern as the time-saving pattern, the player can grasp that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, the symbols constituting the medium symbols may include a small win symbol. (symbols stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can know that a small win has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols. As such, for example, the left and right symbols are stopped at even-numbered symbols, and the middle symbols are stopped at time-saving symbols.

If the design designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (the result of the special design lottery is "
If it is a time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left and right symbols as odd-numbered symbols, and by stopping the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of set time reductions is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

If the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
If it is a jackpot", the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol with odd-numbered symbols (zoroshi).

If the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
In the case of a big hit", the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol with even-numbered symbols (zoroshi). It should be noted that the symbol designation command "zA4" is, as can be seen from FIG. There is a case where the probability variation flag is not set to ON (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop when the even-numbered symbols are aligned (zorome). In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a probability variable flag is set to ON).

Also, as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the design designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the design designation command is "zA3" or "zA8 ”, the expected value that the probability variation flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot gaming state is small. At this point, the pattern designation command is "zA3".
Alternatively, when the command is "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "Loss"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols at random. A loose stitch corresponds to, for example, a stop mode in which at least one of the left, right, and middle symbols is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the decorative pattern stop mode according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the design designation command is "zA1", the left design "2", the middle design "time saving", the right design "4") Although illustrated, the stop mode shown in the column of the decorative pattern stop mode in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state in accordance with the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, so the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. The selection pattern command is "
In the case of z1” and in the case of “z7”, the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of times of time saving to 50 times. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z8", the main CP
U201 decides to set ON only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the time saving number of times to 100 times. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", since it is not controlled to the big win game state, the mode of the big win game state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the time saving number of times to be set is the same and However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, the main CPU 201 turns on the variable probability flag (high probability gaming state)
Even if it is, as shown in FIG. 10, the lottery for "time saving hit" is performed, and if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" has been won Although the display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, without controlling to the C time saving game state,
You may make it continue a high certainty game state.

In addition, the main CPU 201 draws a lottery for "shorter working hours" when the variable probability flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly displayed on the special symbol display unit. 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the big hit judgment random value, that is, the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result (special symbol hit judgment processing result) hit A determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the big hit determination random number value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number assigned to the time saving per judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is instead of the time saving per judgment value data, the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value It is assigned to both the data and the big hit judgment value data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time-saving game state such that the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit" You may make it transfer to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 20
1 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the variable probability number and the time saving number are both set to 10000 times.
In these cases, the main CPU 201 displays the above-described jackpot display mode on the special symbol display section 16.
After deriving to 3,164, it is controlled to a big hit game state, and after the end of this big hit game state, it becomes controllable to a high probability short working time game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. Further, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the variable probability number and the time saving number are both set to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU2
01, after deriving the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to a high-accuracy time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON.
Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 200 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the big win gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 300 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is also the A time saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time saving performance in the high probability time saving game state is the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 changes the mode of the big win game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. i.e.
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 13.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Determine the hit-lose judgment value data based on the random number (perform hit-lose judgment),
Win or lose ("time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing") is determined. After that, the main CPU
201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 11, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140 and the hit/loss determination value data. Based on this, the selected symbol command is determined, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or big hit) derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164 is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5")
, or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2", "z
8"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, despite winning the "jackpot", it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of not winning the "jackpot" (the case of winning the "shorter working hours") becomes.

In addition, instead of the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state being higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. may be set higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. This figure 1
4, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (the selected symbol command is "z5",
for "z10"). On the other hand, the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z
7") or 200 times (if the selected symbol command is "z2", "z8").
Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state).

In addition, "10000" of the probability variable number of times and the time saving number shown in FIG. .

[1-4-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. The column of "remarks" in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand. "Remarks" in Fig. 15
The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the column is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit). Similarly, big hit system reach A, B, C is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A, B, C, D
, E are ready-to-win performances indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a big hit. In addition, FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140. - 特許庁Determining fluctuation patterns. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 of FIG. 28 described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win or lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value, or / And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when a look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is sent to the main CPU 20 via the command output port 206.
1 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether the time saving flag is on regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared. These time-saving game states will be described below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". is. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the condition that prevents the transition to the A time-saving gaming state is established instead of always moving to the A time-saving gaming state (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.) does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see column "Number of times of shortening of hours" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the starting point is when the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-certainty gaming state (for example, the normal game state and the low-certainty time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) is started. , the ceiling counter is updated (1 is added), and the time saving game state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "final ceiling fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is finished. Alternatively, it may be the time when the variable display of the special symbol following the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the ceiling final variation is started and when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Also, the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern in the final ceiling change is "
In the case of "losing", although the display mode of losing is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, it will shift to the B time saving game state. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state have been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). to stop it, or
Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or a effect in which both of these are performed. It should be noted that even if the condition to transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established, it does not necessarily shift to the B time-saving gaming state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (for example, a special When the result of the pattern hit determination process is a big hit, etc.), the game state is not shifted to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and when the probability variation flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, unless the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is "big hit", the game is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In a pachinko game machine including a small win in the result of special symbol win determination processing, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is "small win" when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the display mode of the small win. is led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, the B time-saving game state may be started, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the end of the small winning game state. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 only display the display mode of the small win. , the above-described display effect for showing the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may differ according to the setting value. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit".
In the case of , it is controlled to the big hit game state without controlling to the B time saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, R
When the work area (volatile area) in the AM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, and in the case of a game machine capable of changing the normal symbol winning probability, when the high probability of the normal symbol winning probability ends, etc., it is reset when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, when the update of the ceiling counter is allowed, each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed,
Ceiling counters are updated. For example, if the variable probability flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Each time the ceiling counter is cleared, the ceiling value will be
It may be set by the main CPU 201, or may be predetermined as a pachinko game machine-specific setting instead of being set each time.

If the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot game state is ended, the main CPU 201 controls the first variable display of the special symbol at the start or end. Update (+1) the ceiling counter. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but if it is a specification that performs a ST machine or a variable drop lottery, for example, the probability variable flag The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the is turned off. In addition, in the case of specifications that perform a variable drop lottery, the variable flag will be changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special design, so if you update the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special design, the special design If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications in which a variable probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect that suggests that the variable probability drop lottery has been won, and a high probability game It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, the timing to start counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state, can be displayed on the display device 7.
It becomes difficult for the player to understand the display effect displayed on the screen, and it is possible to provide an interesting game. When it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state or a fake countdown effect is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further enhance interest.

In addition, when the clearing process (backup clearing process) of the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 starts variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the clearing process of the work area in the RAM 203. Update (+1) the ceiling counter at time or end.

Furthermore, a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
4 or dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates the ceiling counter (
+1) to do.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and a predetermined prescribed number of times (hereinafter It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied, out of the case where the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "When the variable display of the special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times is executed", is the B time-saving specified number of times of the special design variable display (hereinafter "B time-saving final variation ”)
It may be when is started, or when the B time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the B time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this B time-saving final variation is completed.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for transitioning to the C time saving gaming state is to win the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8" time saving hit), and the time saving per display mode is a special symbol. It is derived (determined display) on the display units 163 and 164 .
It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established, instead of always shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, if the conditions that prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established (for example, B time-saving gaming state and (details will be described later), and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C
Do not shift to the time-saving game state. It should be noted that, when the condition to prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is established despite the fact that the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, the main CPU 201 does not cause the shift to the C time-saving gaming state. The display mode of the special symbol display section 163
, 164 is performed.

In addition, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is determined in response to the selection symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see "Number of times of shortening" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied. The C time-saving specified number of times, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time-saving final variation"). It may be when it is done, or it may be when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state is
It is sufficient that it is from the start of the C time saving final variation to the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

In addition, the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In addition, the time saving performance of two time saving game states out of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state is the same, and the time saving performance of these two time saving game states and the other one time saving game state You may make it differ from time saving performance. Furthermore, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

In addition, in addition to the above, for the end condition of the A time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the end condition of the C time saving game state, for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times Alternatively, the fact that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, the fact that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 146, and the like may be included. In addition, in a pachinko game machine including a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times may be included in the termination condition. Furthermore, a time-saving falling lottery may be performed, and winning of the time-saving falling lottery may be included in the above termination conditions.

[1-4-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table that is referred to when determining "per normal symbol" or "losing" by lottery based on the random number value and (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43 described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value.
In the normal symbol hit determination table, for each type of time saving, the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the normal symbol per determination value data corresponding to this The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol determined to be “losing” and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state (for example, normal game state), the main CPU
When the random number for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 79, it is determined as "normal winning", and hit/lose determination value data is determined as "normal winning determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal winning symbol", and sets the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

Thus, in this embodiment, among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (shown in FIG. 16 selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is also the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table includes the type of time saving, the hit-loss determination value data described above, and the passing gate 12
6 (see FIG. 4) When selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol" for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 6 (see FIG. 4) is a table referenced by "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The pattern random number of the normal pattern is, for example, 0 to
It is extracted from among 99 (100 kinds).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal design hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal design hit determination process, even if the normal design random number value is any of 0 to 99,
The main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as a selection symbol command for a normal winning symbol.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selected symbol command at the time of per symbol, and if the symbol random number of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, "fz1" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal per symbol
2" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of per symbol, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, "fz4" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal per symbol
5" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command at the time of per symbol, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, "fz" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal per symbol
8" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal design determination table (see FIG. 17), the selection design command at the time of normal design is determined based on the design random number value of the normal design.
It is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to a normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 which is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 of FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "f
z0”, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz2", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 2500 msec are determined.

In addition, when the selected symbol command for the normal winning symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time of 3
000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second open time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7" at the time of normal symbol,
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2500 msec, no waiting time, and no second opening.

Also, when the selected symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8" at the time of normal symbol,
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command is "fz6" and "fz9" at the time of normal design,
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to have a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) open pattern is non- Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the most advantageous degree becomes a disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is a non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the C time saving game state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol win" is the normal symbol hit determination in the C time saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as that of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "normal pattern hit", the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). It is referred to when The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4), normal Determine the variation pattern of the design. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the random number for normal design effect selection is 0 to 99.
In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 300000 msec. The variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. , the variable display time of the normal pattern is, for example, 800 mse
c.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. In the case of either of
When it is determined to be ec and the random number for normal design effect selection is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal design is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. In the case of either of
When it is determined to be ec and the random number for normal design effect selection is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal design is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal pattern per variable display is the non-time-saving gaming state, A
Among the variable display times of the normal symbols in the time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the A time saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the shortest time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released among the non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Also, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time saving game state, but it is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Time saving number of times set at time saving hit]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol win determination process is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time saving times set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display unit, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving game state, and continues to control to the high-accuracy game state. By the way, for example, like a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, there is known a game machine that turns off a probability variation flag from ON when variable display of special symbols is executed over a specified number of times. In such a ST machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the final game as a high probability game state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability variation flag. When the processing for deriving the mode is performed later, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode for the time-saving win.

[1-5-2. Overlap of time-saving game state]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time saving game state overlaps in this way, the time saving game state may be overlapped and executed, or the time saving game state may not be overlapped (that is, the "time saving win" may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the condition for ending the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game state overlaps, a mode in which the time-saving game state is overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game state is not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. Aspect of executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
As a mode of overlapping and executing the time saving game state when the time saving game state overlaps, the time saving win is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C. Sometimes, there is a mode in which the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and a mode in which the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display unit 163,
164, the display mode per time saving is derived. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state, and adopts as the number of times of time-savings the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed before the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, if "time saving hit" is won in A time saving game state, and the remaining number of time saving times in A time saving game state is larger than the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving win", the main CPU 2
01 maintains the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, and controls to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 200 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of the time, although the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, the time saving number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win the "time saving hit" in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state, the appearance of the time saving number and time saving performance is "time saving It is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, in the A time-saving game state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the number of time-savings that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state, the main CP
U201, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, unless the "jackpot" is derived,
The game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of times of time-saving set based on the 'time-saving win' is consumed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 20 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50
In the case of times, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. That is, 2 which is the remaining number of time saving in the A time saving game state
Even if the special symbols are variably displayed 0 times, the special symbols are further variably displayed 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but the following description includes the case where the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win. .

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. , Unless a "jackpot" is derived, control to the time-saving game state is performed until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To give specific numbers, for example,
When the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and B
When the specified number of times of time saving is 200 times, while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, the number of times of time saving from here is 300 times unless a "big hit" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the B time-saving specified number of times is greater than the time-saving remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. At the same time, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is completed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed in the B time saving game state is 300 times. In the case, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 300 times unless a “jackpot” is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special design is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state, after that, while maintaining the time reduction performance of the C time reduction game state, the special design over 280 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

When the variable display of the special symbols ends in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 . That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the losing display mode is derived. . When the small-hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to the small-hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag turned on even during the small-hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final fluctuation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final fluctuation, the conditions for transition to the B time saving game state and the transition conditions to the C time saving game state are A case where it is established will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the special symbol win determination process is Special symbol display portion 163, 1
Different control can be executed in the case where the control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being derived to 64.

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is the special symbol display unit 163,
164 is already controlled to the B time-saving gaming state. Therefore, main C
While maintaining the time-saving performance in the B time-saving game state, unless the “jackpot” is derived, the time-saving game until the larger one of the B time-saving prescribed number of times and the time-saving number of times in the C time-saving game state is digested. to control the state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is the special symbol display unit 163,
164, it has not yet been controlled to the B time-saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, and the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, derivation of the display mode of the big win, derivation of the display mode of the small win or a specific small win, etc.) are established. Unless otherwise, control is made to the time saving game state until the larger number of times of time saving of the prescribed number of times of B time saving and the number of times of time saving of C time saving game state is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time saving game state in which the time saving performance is maintained or executed are established, the time saving game state may be ended.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied in the ceiling final fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 performs B time reduction performed only when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time saving transition display effect performed when only the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied may be performed. Alternatively, for example, when the time saving performance of the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance of the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. etc.
Either of the B time reduction transition display effect and the C time reduction transition display effect may be preferentially performed.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the ceiling final change is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state, B time saving game To control to a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states repeatedly]
In the above, the aspect which overlaps and performs C time saving game state on one time saving game state, and the aspect which overlaps and performs B time saving game state on C time saving game state were demonstrated.

In the case of the specification that allows execution of a plurality of time-saving game states in this manner, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state previously executed is maintained. In a pachinko machine with such specifications, the time-saving performances of the multiple time-saving game states that can be overlapped may be different, but the time-saving performances of the multiple time-saving game states that can be overlapped may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification that allows the C time-saving game state to be superimposed on one time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state the same. Further, when the specification is such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state the same.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first is, for example, the time-saving gaming state that is executed first. One time saving performance same as the time saving gaming state and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance may be provided. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in addition to the time-saving game state that is being executed first, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If it is not executed repeatedly, other time-saving performances may be activated.

For example, if it is a pachinko game machine with specifications that can be executed by overlapping the B time-saving game state with the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not in any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Aspect in which the time-saving game state is not repeatedly executed]
As a mode that does not run the time saving game state repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time saving game state, and a "time saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time saving game state. A mode (hereinafter referred to as "the latter mode") in which the time-saving game state is not performed repeatedly even if the time-saving game state overlaps is conceivable. As the latter mode, even if winning is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, this is ignored and the time saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable, ie, a non-execution mode and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not repeated. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode that does not overlap the C time-saving game state with one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , derives the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 20
1, unless it is a variable display of the last special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving final variation”), one time-saving game state without controlling to C time-saving game state based on “time-saving hit” Control to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving is digested. In this case, being controlled to one time saving game state (excluding the time saving final variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, if you win the "time saving hit" in the time saving final variation in one time saving game state,
The main CPU 201 determines whether one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is drawn to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, and when the display mode of the time-saving win is the special symbol display portion 163.
, 164 when one time-saving gaming state ends, different control can be executed.

First, when one time-saving gaming state ends before the display mode for the time-saving win is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode for the time-saving win, and then C
Start control of the time saving game state.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the time-saving per display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving per display mode and the end of one time-saving gaming state When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode for time saving is performed prior to the end process of one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode for the time saving game prior to the ending process of the time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode of the time saving per is performed after the end process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance of the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU
201 ends one time saving game state without controlling to C time saving game state if end processing of one time saving game state is not processed at the time when the display mode for time saving per is derived, and one time saving game state If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the final ceiling change is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "losing", the main CPU 201 completes the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state. Control to the C time saving game state until it is done.

However, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main C
PU201, depending on the processing of the program, there is a case where the control of the B time-saving gaming state is started and a case where it is not started. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed prior to the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and controls to the B time saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state without controlling to the B time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the C time-saving gaming state is not processed at the time when the B time-saving gaming state is to be started, and the C time-saving gaming state is terminated. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving game state after the start processing of the B time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving game state.

In the final ceiling change, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C short game state and starts control of the big win game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, referring to FIGS. 20 to 23, the main processing executed by main CPU 201 (
main control main processing) will be described. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at High level (S
11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power failure signal is at the High level (S11 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are turned on/off.
The OFF state is stored in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16)
. After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (S
17 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, when both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, N
If the determination is O and both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18).
determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 determines YES),
The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This processing is performed by the I/O port 2 where the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170.
05 output port, set the data for error display. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. The main CPU 201 performs S2
After executing 0 operations, an endless loop is entered.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 22.

In S<b>22 , the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203,
Determine the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Main C
After executing the process of S23, the PU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the clearing process (volatile area) of the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags, etc.
For example, work area construction, address setting, etc.) are performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared.
After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. This process
An initial setting process is performed according to the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). Note that the details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 .
After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 27, the process moves to S28. Details of the power-off process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2
Move to 9.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S31, 01 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. In addition, this processing is performed by the main RAM 2
03 using an area (outside area) other than the work area in 03. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S32, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 ms, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).
ec.

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35
determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. Main C
After executing the process of S36, the PU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, the process of S37 ~ S44) related to the game control described later, for example, 6 msec interruption prohibited section (S
26 to S35) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 .
After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 38, the process moves to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. For details of this special symbol control process, see FIG.
6 below. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. For this process,
Processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 performs the process of
Move to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second
Setting processing of the display data to be output to the special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is performed. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S41, 01 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.
, and the processing after S26 is performed.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating power failure recovery (S5
2 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the restoration from power failure (when S52 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S53, the startup initial setting process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (
20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (if NO in S54), the main CP
U201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation (if YES in S54), the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S55.
to

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S56, the startup initial setting process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control main process (
20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S
61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and shifts the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 2).
0 to FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (S61 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. Main C
After executing the process of S62, the PU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU 201
After executing the process of S71, the process moves to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process by:
Prior to the process of S71, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S72), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S72 (S72 is YES
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is to start variable display.
That is, it is determined whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (if the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 201
moves the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to start variable display.
That is, it is determined whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (if the determination in S74 is NO), the main CPU 201
, ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the start of variable display, i.e., the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when S74 determines YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S75.

Returning to S73, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S73 determines YES), the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing, and the processing is changed to the main control main processing (FIGS. 20 to 2
3).

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the special symbol control process (S
71 to S75) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved, the special symbol management process (
S75) may be executed as a priority variable machine, or the first start port 120 or the second start port 1
It may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to 40.

[1-6-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 27, at S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26), the main CPU
The special symbol management process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0" (when S72 determines YES), in the special symbol management process, when S73 determines YES, the second special symbol is to be processed, and when S74 determines YES, The first special symbol is the object to be processed. Also, if the control state number is not "0" (S72
is determined as NO), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S8
1).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 in S81 (S81 is YES
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. In addition, main C
PU201 performs the process after S83 based on the control state number read by the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S8
The process of 3 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S8
The process of 4 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

At S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

At S86, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

At S87, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. This process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, at S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol variable display start processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "
0” is determined (S91).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S91 (S91 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and the processing is
Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S91 (S9
1 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a time saving hit, and sets the big win flag to ON when the special symbol win determination processing result is a big win. do. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but if the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, the special symbol win When the result of the judgment processing is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S93, the process moves to S94. The time saving flag is turned off when shifting to the C time saving game state, and the big win flag is turned off when the big win game state is started.
If the pachinko game machine includes a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process for determining whether or not the hit is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the process is not a big hit, a process for determining whether or not the time saving hit is performed, If it is determined in this process that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

At S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of winning types, a plurality of losing types may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol win determination process may include a small win, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value or/
And the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.
to

At S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 27 S84) is performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S98, and then moves the process to S99.

At S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. This process
Mainly, update processing of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to management of game state is performed. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 29, at S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol variable display ending process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S111 (S111
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S111 (S
111 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. The main CPU 201 performs S11
After executing the process of 2, the process moves to S113.

At S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. In addition, the special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.
to

At S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201
The special symbol variable display ending process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 30, at S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol game determination processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S121 (S121
is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process,
Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S121 (S
121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. For example, the hall computer 186 can be connected via the external terminal board 184
The signals output to the island computer will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the big winning hole 131 is opened (S125), a process of setting a big win signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126
), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), the game state designation parameter setting process (S128), and the transmission reservation process of the big hit start display command (S12
9) etc. are processed. In addition, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S12
7) is performed to switch the control state number, and after this special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).
reference).

Returning to S122, if it is determined in S122 that there is no big win, that is, the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

At S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 shows the first
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed.
After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

At S133, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol game end command (
S134) is performed. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CP
U201 terminates the special symbol game ending process, and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management processing]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S131 during the special symbol game ending processing (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201, S141
After executing the process of , the process moves to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201 performs S142
After executing the process, the time saving management process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 shows time saving management processing (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko game machine.
10 is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 of the process.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S151, the process moves to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S152, the counter update process is terminated, and the process is changed to the time saving management process (Fig. 3
2).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 shows counter update processing (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151.

In addition, the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are superimposed and executed when a plurality of time saving game states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. In addition, when shifting to the high certainty gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter is in the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state,
Shows how many times each is executed.

When the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or/and C time saving game state is satisfied, a time saving counter for the time saving game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time saving game state is terminated when the time saving counter reaches 0, but this is not the only method. Instead, an addition system may be adopted in which the time saving counter is added when the variable display of special symbols is completed, and the time saving game state is ended when the time saving counter reaches the set time saving number. In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special design ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special design, and when the time-saving counter becomes 0 ( In the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving counter reaches the set number of times of the time saving (in the case of the addition method), the time saving game state may be completed.

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S161), the main CPU 201
The time saving counter update process is ended, and the process is returned to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S163.

In S<b>163 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S164.

In addition, the C time saving counter is a counter which is set when the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied during the time saving game state. Although not shown in the flow chart, the C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

Time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are superimposed and executed. In the present embodiment, the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the previously executed time saving game state, "time saving mode=3" is set.
Further, when the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the time-saving game state that is being executed first, the "time-saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, in S163, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (when S163 is NO), the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C short working hours counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S164, the process moves to S165.

In S<b>165 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 20
1 moves the process to S166.

In addition, the B time saving counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the B time saving game state is established during the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time saving game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, the B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, when it is determined that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (when S165 is NO), the main CPU 20
1 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S166, the time saving counter update process is terminated, and the process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In addition, although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S164, or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are overlapped and executed, not only two time-saving game states are overlapped, but three or more time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed. In this case, since the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time saving game states overlap is the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows counter update processing (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. i.e.
If the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value,
The ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203 .

In addition, the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko game machine as a transition condition to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. You may make it process.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if the determination in S171 is NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and shifts the process to the counter update process ( 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF (determined as YES in S171), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter.
After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process,
The process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 shows time saving management processing (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko game machine.
10 is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 of FIG.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). The details of this time saving shift determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 . The main CPU 201 performs S181
After executing the process of , the process moves to S182.

In S<b>182 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. The details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 . After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S<b>183 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

In S183, when it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (S183 is N
O judgment), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 performs the process,
Move to S185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S184, 01 moves the process to S185.

In addition, when it is determined that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 in S183 (S183 is Y
In the case of ES determination), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be less than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more despite the determination being YES in S183 , an abnormality warning may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormal time process, when S183 is determined as YES, not only turn off the time saving flag (see S184), but also reset the B time saving counter and C time saving counter. You may make it match|compatibility with a counter, a B time saving counter, and a C time saving counter.

At S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 executes transmission reservation processing of the time saving shift command (S186
)I do. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time reduction transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S191).
.

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction shift determination process, and the process is changed to a counter determination process ( 36). That is, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in S191, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (S191 is YES
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

When it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (when S192 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

At S196, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. Main CPU
After executing the process of S196, 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 shows counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process performed by main CPU201 by S182 of inside.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S202).
.

In S202, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S202), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition processing, and the processing is changed to the counter determination processing (Fig. 36). By doing so, when the probability variation flag is ON, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, in S202, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (S202 is YES
S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO determination in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S20.
Move to 6.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is ON (YES in S203)
S determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, setting the time reduction mode to 2, time reduction performance and the like are determined. Main CPU
After executing the process of S205, 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. again,
Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of "normal design per" is based on the normal design hit determination table (Fig. 16
reference). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S206, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is not ON (when S206 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is changed to the counter determination process. (See FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S206 that the time saving hit flag is ON (S206 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the C time saving counter, setting the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance and the like are determined. Main CPU
After executing the process of S207, 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is a hit type determination table (for example, FIG. 1
3), and is determined according to the selected symbol command. Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 . FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S211).
.

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is ON (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

If S211 is YES determination, the probability variation flag is off, for example, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving gaming state is being executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value case), or when the C time-saving game state is executed in a state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first (when winning the “time-saving hit”) is equivalent. do.

In addition, although not shown, when the B time-saving gaming state is executed while the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2",
The B time saving counter determined in S205 is set. In addition, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, and the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode=3". Along with this, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON in S211 (NO determination in S211)
That is, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-savings (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and compares the current time-saving counter. It is determined whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of times of time saving.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of times of time-saving (if the determination in S212 is NO), that is, if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time-savings, the main CPU 201 will The setting process is ended, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time saving (when S212 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where it is, the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings) and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 2
01 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process, and shifts the process to the time saving transition process (Fig. 38
).

In addition, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or the state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first , the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state. That is, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier is changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, or the time-saving game corresponding to the larger one of the current time-saving counter and the new time-saving number of times It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

The time-saving performance, as described above, is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 146, and the like.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter, it is possible to manage that the two time-saving game states are being overlapped internally. Then, in the time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter and the new number of times of time-savings is reset as a new time-savings counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears superficially (that the player can grasp) is the two time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapped. Among them, it is only the time saving performance for any one time saving game state. Therefore, without managing that the two time-saving game states are being executed internally (
That is, without providing B time-saving counter and C time-saving counter), when executing multiple time-saving gaming states repeatedly, the larger one of the current time-saving counter value and the new time-saving number of times You may make it reset as a time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is
When 211 is NO determination, that is, when executing by shifting from the non-time-saving game state to the B time-saving game state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or when the non-time-saving game state is changed to the C time-saving game state It is a process that is performed when it is executed (when it is elected to "per time reduction"). In this process, B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) or C time reduction control mode determination process (S2
07) The number of times of time saving and the time saving performance determined in 07) are set. The main CPU 201 performs S21
After executing the process of 4, the process moves to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. Main C
After performing the process of S215, PU201 complete|finishes a time saving setting process, and returns a process to a time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

Thus, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation The result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201, based on the end of the small hit game state, B
It is preferable to perform a process of shifting to a time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU20
1, the transition processing to the B time saving game state is performed when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, but it is not limited to this, and the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is started. You may make it perform the transition process to B time saving game state based on having done. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, B time saving game It is preferable to perform state transition processing. This is because, when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made, during the variable display of one of the special patterns as the final ceiling change, the other special pattern is variable. This is because, when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbols cannot receive the benefit of the B time-saving game state, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, variable display of special symbols is not performed with a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine capable of variable display of special symbols with such a long variation, transition processing to the B time-saving game state is performed based on the start of variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling variation. As a result, delay in starting the B time-saving game state can be avoided even when variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. (See S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but it is not limited to this. For example, C time saving control mode determination processing (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state
B time-saving control mode determination processing (S205
).

Further, in the ceiling counter updating process described above with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35), the ceiling counter is not updated. can't For example, in a ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability drop lottery, even if the variable probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is not performed, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state may be made. . In this case, the main CPU 201
When the difference between the ceiling counter and the variable probability counter becomes the ceiling value, the process of shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (if the set value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time saving gaming state, is up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off.
Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by a specified number (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 3. up to 8 times). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), both the prescribed number of B time reduction and the prescribed number of C time reduction are approximately 1212 (319 × 3.8) is preferably set as the upper limit.
In addition, it is not essential to set the upper limit of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving prescribed number of times to the same value.

By the way, as in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above , Time saving per probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the jackpot probability (
When the denominator of the probability variation flag is off) is multiplied by a specified number (eg, 3.0),
The ceiling value will differ according to the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be seen through by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the ceiling value is determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modified example related to time saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-described time-saving management process (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of the present embodiment") explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is (see FIG. 31). Further, the processing related to the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, it is shifted to the B time-saving game state, When the time saving hit flag is ON, it is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state Regarding whether to make the transition flag separate or common, it is not limited to the above,
Time saving management processing can be performed in various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of stopping the fluctuation, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not elected when reaching the ceiling, it is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0; should not be subtracted.

[1-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 40, at S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The preparation process for opening the big winning opening executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S251 (S251
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the preparation process for opening the big winning opening, and the process is
Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S251 (S
251 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

At S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main RA
It is stored in a predetermined area in M203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S253 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

At S254, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S254) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 27 S88) is performed. The main CPU 201 performs S2
After executing the process of 54, the process moves to S255.

At S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S25
6). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

At S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls when winning the large winning opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

At S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the process of generating the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 131 is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 259, the process moves to S260.

At S260, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

At S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

At S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large winning opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, at S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The big winning opening opening control process executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S271 (S271
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and the process is
Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S271 (S
271 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

At S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (when S272 determines NO), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S273.
to

On the other hand, when it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning prizes (when S272 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process of
Move to S274.

At S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40)
It is determined whether the maximum open time set in .

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has not passed (
If the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening control process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S<b>274 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2
75) is performed to switch the control state number, and after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed again. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

At S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 42, at S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The jackpot end processing executed by 201 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S281 (S281
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot ending process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S281 (S281
is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

At S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc.) set and various counters (
For example, a process of setting or resetting the value of a variable probability counter, a short working hours counter, a fixed number of symbols counter, a round counter, a big winning opening winning counter, etc.) is performed. Main CPU20
1 executes the process of S282, and then moves the process to S283.

At S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 43 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the wait time for normal symbols is 0 (S2
91).

When it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process, and shifts the process to S41 (FIG. 2).
3).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

At S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. Note that the main CPU 201, based on the control state number read in the process of S292,
The following processing is performed.

At S293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0".
In this normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process, and the normal symbol hit determination process. 146 opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing is performed. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CP
U201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1".
In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201
The process moves to S295.

At S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S29
The process of 5 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU
201 moves the process to S296.

At S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This S29
Process 6 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 performs the processing as follows.
Move to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This S29
The process of 7 is a process performed when the control state number of normal symbols is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process,
The processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20-23).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16),
A random number for normal symbol hit determination is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, and 0 to 79 is used as normal symbol hit determination value data (in the case of non-time-saving game state). The probability per normal pattern is
Since it is determined by the number of normal symbol hit determination value data with respect to the total random numbers of the normal symbol hit determination random numbers, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability per normal symbol is different between when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed, but it may be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600000 msec in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, for example, 1000
It runs only for a short time, relative to msec. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 44, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). Main C
After executing the process of S301, the PU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S<b>302 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power interruption detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3
Move to 03.

In S<b>303 , the main CPU 201 determines whether power failure is detected.

If it is determined in S303 that the power failure has not been detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that power interruption has been detected (if S303 is YES), the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S30.
Move to 4.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . Main CP
After executing the process of S304, U201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 45, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (
S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU
201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

At S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, power failure recovery, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined that the game is not permitted in S315 (when S315 determines NO)
, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. In addition, S
Details of the setting control process of 316 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (when S315 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).
03 is stored in the interrupt counter area in the work area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls.
After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S320, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S321, the process moves to S322.

At S322, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S323, 01 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed at S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S
331 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S332).
The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. Setting change process (S33
After executing 2), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting (S
333 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334).
The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. Setting confirmation process (S33
After executing 4), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. This process
Currently set values are displayed. The main CPU 201 performs S335
After executing the process of , the process moves to S336.

At S336, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 . The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S336, the process moves to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WD
Clear processing of T and restart processing of WDT are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 terminates the setting control process, and changes the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).
reference).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341)
If the determination is S), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S<b>342 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. Main C
After executing the process of S342, the PU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if determined as YES in S343), the main CPU 201 causes the process to proceed to S344.
to

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed at S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S3
51). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing (S352).
The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201
The setting confirmation process is ended, and the process is returned to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also carried out as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area (hereinafter referred to as "
"backup area") is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.) is performed. Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 .
That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main C
PU201 moves a process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown,
In this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process (S371) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S372), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined that the probability variation flag is on in S372 (S372 is YES
determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability variation notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S
Move to 374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command.
The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes starting opening winning detection processing (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S382. The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S382). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won in the special winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, based on the fact that the passage gate switch 127 has detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted. . It should be noted that the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (normal symbol hit determination random numbers, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126, and reserves the normal symbol until the conditions for starting the normal symbol are satisfied. It has a starting memory area (1) to a normal symbol starting memory area (4). Then, in the ball passing detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting entrance winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special symbol symbol random number, the first special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning to the first start port 120 is less than four, for example. Main RAM
203 is a first special symbol start storage area (1) to hold various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 120 until the start condition is satisfied. (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Note that the main RAM 203 is
In addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to first special symbol start storage area (4), there is also a first special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, that is, the upper limit is four (S393
is determined NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (when S393 is YES determination)
, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

At S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

At S395, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 120 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied.
03 is stored. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch determination processing. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of special symbols, performing a hit determination process, etc., using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). again,
It is also determined whether or not the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random number value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. Considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect before and after the process of S395, for example, it is preferable to perform the process before and after. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

At S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, the variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, the variation pattern command of the special symbol), etc. In this process, The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

At S<b>398 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 has detected a game ball.

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 141 (S398 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (S398 is Y
ES determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the second special symbol jackpot determination random number, the second special symbol symbol random number, the second special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning to the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). . note that,
The main RAM 203 has a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (
In addition to 4), it also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, that is, when the upper limit is four (S400
is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (when S400 is YES determination)
, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

At S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied.
03 is stored. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

At S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, variation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc., and the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 terminates the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

Note that the initialization process (S501) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) The manner of sound production and the like are determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, generates various requests (for example, a drawing request) for operating various effect devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, and character requests). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).
The display control circuit 304 receives a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301
Drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 is performed based on . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).
The role product control circuit 307 receives a message (a role product request) sent from the sub CPU 301
Based on , drive control is performed to operate a performance drive motor (not shown) for all or a part of the performance accessory group 58 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 3
01 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of effect mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs effect mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. FIG.

Sub CPU301, as one of the various processes performed in the production mode determination process, for example, the production pattern of the sub-variation production corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant fluctuation") (hereinafter "sub-variation A sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern"), a prefetch effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern of the prefetch effect (hereinafter referred to as a "prefetch effect pattern"), etc. are performed. In addition, in the effect mode determination process, the effect mode is determined, for example, a countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, or a B time-saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. Processing, etc., is also performed for determination processing of various effects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation production pattern is a production pattern that is performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols (for example, a variation pattern of decorative symbols or a character production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation production, depending on the sub-variation production pattern to be executed, with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol It is possible to indicate that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-fluctuation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 to be described later. is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C is a special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 2
8 S93 reference) is a ready-to-win effect indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit). The jackpot type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the ready-to-win effect overlap, the sub CPU 301
It is preferable that one of the effects is preferentially executed.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process. is provided for the hit determination processing of the special symbols (until the variable display of the special symbols is started), it is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301.

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, when in the pending state, with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the previously held start information), the look-ahead judgment It is possible to indicate that the degree of expectation for the outcome of the processing is maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed on the display device 7, for example. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead determination process, that is, a result type of the special symbol hit determination process (whether it is a time-saving hit or a big hit). A look-ahead expected value production pattern capable of suggesting an expected value for the result of the win determination process being a win (big win or short-time win) is included. That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. is. Also, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later),
A look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 to be described later) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-fluctuation effect pattern decision processing]
First, the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the game state in which the time saving flag is on (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), but the description is omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation production pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, displays as a variation production pattern corresponding to the variation. A sub-variation effect pattern (illustrated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-fluctuation production pattern includes time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, jackpot system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E. there is

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving winning as described above, and are ready-to-reach performances in which the possibility of time-saving winning can be grasped from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). reference). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a prefetch target sub-variation production pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a pre-read sub-variation production pattern. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C are the same or substantially the same in appearance appearance. However, the time saving system reach B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching, while the time saving per system reach C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching ("prefetching flag" column in FIG. 15,
54, and FIG. 55 below).

The big hit system reach A, B, and C are the reach effects indicating the possibility of the big win as described above, and are the reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of the big win from the appearance. The jackpot system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "time saving hit". 15). This jackpot reach A is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead,
It is not limited to this, and may be a sub-fluctuation effect pattern in a look-ahead mode. The big-hit reach B and the big-hit reach C have the same or substantially the same performance mode in appearance. However, the big-hit ready-to-win B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead, while the big-hit ready-to-win C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead (refer to the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a short time hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode that it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility. The common reach A is a win (big hit, short time hit) fixed reach performance which is not displayed when the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is a loss, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "short time hit". (Fig. 15
reference). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance mode. Further, the common reach D is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C.
Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big hit system reach C. In addition, while common reach A and common reach B are not prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns, common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns ("prefetch in FIG. 15 flags column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 uses the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54).
, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the sub variation effect pattern is determined. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub fluctuation effect pattern.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, in the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6), the first special symbol start storage area (0) provided in the main RAM 203, the first special symbol start storage area (1), the first special symbol start storage area (2) , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4) as areas corresponding to the first sub reservation area (0), the first sub reservation area (1), the first There is provided one sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3) and a first sub-reservation area (4). In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), various items related to the extracted random value Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the variation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. As areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second sub-reserving area (0), the second sub-reserving area (1), the second sub-reserving area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3) and a second sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) It may be performed, or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . In the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-reservation area (0) is displayed as an area for displaying a reservation image.
The 0th area corresponding to the , the first reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (1), the second reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (2), the first sub-reservation area (3) corresponding to A third reservation area and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in look-ahead per type effect pattern determination processing]
First, the table referred to in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, in the form of the pending image in which the prefetch effect is executed in the determined prefetch hit type effect pattern, there is a time saving prefetch effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. A big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and a common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility for both a time saving hit and a big hit are included.

The read-ahead winning type production pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win-type read-ahead production form to a time-saving winning-type read-ahead production form, or changes from a common winning-type look-ahead production form to a big win-type look-ahead production form. Thus, it is an effect pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table.
In FIG. 55, only the fluctuation patterns to be read ahead among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54 are shown. Also, FIG. 56 is an example of a per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table.
These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG.
PU 301 determines the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number, for example, based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations. The pending number here includes start information to be prefetched. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is withheld, the number of reservations after the reservation corresponds to the number of reservations shown in FIG.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the variation pattern is "0E
H" and the number of reservations is "2", the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is "
22”.

When the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301
With reference to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "prefetching per type effect pattern determination table number" is replaced with "S
"ASPT number", and "look-ahead winning type effect pattern" is represented as "SAS effect pattern". The sub effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received.

For example, when the read-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "55", the read-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, if the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "77", the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is "16".
H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (corresponding to reservation) in FIG. 56 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ,
It shows that the pending image is displayed in the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is the possibility of the time-saving winning. When the pending image is displayed in the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of the time-saving hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ,
It shows that the pending image is displayed in a big hit type look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is likely to be a big hit. When the pending image is displayed in the big-hit look-ahead presentation mode, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a big-hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ,
It shows that the pending image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination processing has the possibility of both the time-saving winning and the big winning. When the reserved image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead presentation mode, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a big win.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed in the third reservation area, and the common hit system is displayed in the second reservation area after shifting from the third reservation area. A look-ahead effect form is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the common winning system prefetching performance form changes to the time saving prefetching performance form, and in the first reservation area, the time saving prefetching performance form of "A" is displayed. be done.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect pattern of "C" is displayed in the third reservation area. Then, from the third reservation area to the second
When shifting to the reservation area, the common winning system look-ahead performance form is changed to the big hit system look-ahead performance form, and in the second reservation area and the first reservation area after being shifted from the second reservation area, the big hit system of 'B'. A look-ahead effect form is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the following a) to
E) pattern is included. In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type look-ahead production form to the time saving type look-ahead production form and the pattern of changing from the time saving type look-ahead production form to the big and short winning type look-ahead production form are the look-ahead type production patterns. Although not included in the pattern, these patterns may be included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern.
B) At the time of suspension, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed, and after that, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed without changing the production form. "09H").
b) A pre-reading big hit effect pattern (for example, a pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H") in which the big hit type prefetch effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big win type prefetch effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
c) A common winning type look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and then a look-ahead common winning performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead winning type look-ahead performance pattern "24H") that changes to a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form.
d) A read-ahead common win effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead win type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in a common win-type look-ahead effect form at the time of suspension and then changes to a big win-type look-ahead effect form.
E) A read-ahead common winning performance pattern C (
For example, per look-ahead type effect pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number ). and sub C.
The PU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and determines the look-ahead hit type based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub effect selection random number value 1. A production pattern (SAS production pattern) is determined.

Note that FIG. 56 does not show the look-ahead winning type performance pattern in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form of "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and then changes to the big hit-type look-ahead performance form of "B". However, in this way, the sub CPU 301 may determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form of "A" to the big win-type look-ahead effect form of "B". By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Also, in FIG. 56, as described above, the big hit look-ahead effect form "B" indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit (that is, there is a possibility of losing). In addition to the production form, a big hit confirmation look-ahead production form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the following f) ~
h), any or all of the look-ahead type production patterns may be included.
f) A look-ahead big-win determination performance pattern A in which the big-win determination look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big-hit determination look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other prefetch production forms (for example, "A" short-time hit prefetch production form, "B" big hit prefetch production form, "C" common hit prefetch production form, etc.) are displayed. After that, a look-ahead big win confirmation performance pattern B that changes to a big win determination look-ahead performance form.
h) At the time of suspension, other prefetch effect forms (for example, "A" time-saving hit prefetch effect form, "C" common hit prefetch effect form, etc.) are displayed, and then "B" big hit system. A look-ahead big win fixed performance pattern C in which a look-ahead performance form is displayed and then changed to a big win fixed look-ahead performance form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit system look-ahead production form of "A", the big hit system look-ahead production form of "B", and the common hit system look-ahead production form of "C", at the time of suspension, "C" Although the display frequency of the common hit type look-ahead effect form is the highest, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A" may be the highest, and at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the big hit-type look-ahead effect form of "B" may be the highest. You can make it higher. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common win-type look-ahead effect form of "C" may be the lowest at the time of suspension.

In addition, in FIG. 56, all "prefetching per type effect pattern determination table number (SASP
T number)” is assigned a sub effect selection random number value 1 of a predetermined width, but this is not a limitation, and a sub effect selection random value value is not assigned only to a specific SASPT number (that is, a specific SASPT number). It is also possible to set the distribution rate of the SASPT number to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in look-ahead expected value production pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of winning) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is "shorter working hours" or "big hit". again,
FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs in the effect form according to the expected value for the hit (time-saving hit, big hit).

When a pending image is displayed as a look-ahead effect form for saving time, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the retained image is a rectangle and highest when it is a star.

Also, when a pending image is displayed as a big-hit look-ahead effect form, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, is changed in color such as "blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest if the pending image is blue and highest if the pending image is a rainbow.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the case where the pending image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit, the pending image is set to, for example, the expected value for the big hit It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time-saving hit, or may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The reserved image in which the anticipation effect is performed can change from the effect form with the relatively low expected value to the effect form with the relatively high expected value, but the expected value is relatively high from the effect form with the relatively high expected value It is preferable not to change to a low production mode. Also, when changing the presentation form of the hold image, it is not necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star" or "blue < yellow < green < red <rainbow". , for example, "pentagon→circle" or "yellow→rainbow". Also, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the lowest expected value, such as a square or blue, but may be, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (on hold) in FIG. 57 are the same as in FIG.
The first to fourth reservation areas are shown respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ~
"5" indicates the height of the expected value for a hit (time saving hit, big hit). For example, the above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". "Hexagon" and "green" above correspond to "3", "circle" and "red" above correspond to "4", and "star" and "rainbow" above correspond to "5". Equivalent to

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ~
"5" is called expected value level "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" is shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in FIG. 57, for example, It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number 2 for sub effect selection. Similarly, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is
As shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. Random number 2 for sub effect selection
is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger such as when a variation pattern command of a special symbol is received, for example. In addition, in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the case where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" is illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is shown for convenience.
omitted.

For example, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". . When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area. to "3", and when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the expected value level changes from "3" to "5".

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, when the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reservation area, and the second reservation area to the first reservation The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

In this way, the sub CPU 301, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58) See), the number of reservations and the random number for sub effect selection 2
Based on and, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value production pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate is.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value production pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) with a relatively low expected value level is increased. However, it is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as even distribution.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the sub effect selection random number value 2 of a predetermined width is assigned to all the "prefetch expected value effect patterns", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific "prefetch expected value effect pattern" is assigned. ” (that is, the allocation rate of the specific “prefetching expected value effect pattern” may be set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 shows sub CPU3
01 is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process.
As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not it has received a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 30
1 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (if determined as YES in S3001),
The sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target is currently on hold.
That is, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed for the current suspension. If there are multiple suspensions, the look-ahead effect may be performed in a plurality of suspension images, but in this embodiment,
The look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image.

If the prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold (if S3002 is NO determination)
, the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not being executed for the current hold (YES determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern information received by the winning command is for prefetching (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not for prefetching (S3003 is N
In the case of O determination), the sub CPU 301 ends the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is to be prefetched (S300
3 is YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling price and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 4 or 8) that can be held. This processing is for avoiding the transition to the B time-saving game state before execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the suspension of the read-ahead performance despite the execution of the read-ahead performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be reserved, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern information received by the winning command is When it is a prefetch target (when S3003 is YES determination),
You may make it determine whether it is larger than the pending|holding number including the prefetch object. The ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as commands, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201 .

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, with reference to the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56),
A look-ahead hit type production pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time saving win" or a "big win". In this process, the result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined based on the variation pattern information received in the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. be done. However, it is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU
By transmitting to 301, you may make it determine a "time saving hit" or a "big hit."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (S300
7 determines YES), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value production pattern (at the time of winning) determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table of FIG. 57 (at the time of winning)
to determine the look-ahead effect pattern (hit time). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing when losing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table of FIG. 58 (at the time of loss)
to determine the look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of loss). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effect by performing look-ahead effect, example of expansion of look-ahead effect]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, depending on the form change of the pending image, not only is it interesting to see whether it will change to a big hit type look-ahead effect form or a time saving type look-ahead effect form, but also a hit (
It is possible to change the level of the expected value of a big hit, a time-saving hit, etc., and it is possible to heighten interest by performing a new production that has never been seen before. In addition, the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, the form of the pending image performed as a look-ahead effect (for example, the first sub-holding area (4) to
For the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (1))
20 may be determined at the time of winning, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbols of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

By the way, the variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead short-time hit effect pattern (Fig. 5
4, for example, "03H" and "0EH"), and a variation pattern in which a look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54). The former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15)
. That is, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is higher in the read-ahead short hit effect pattern than the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern. Therefore, compared with the conventional pachinko game machine in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a big win, the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance can be increased while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of winning.
It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern may be higher than the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead short hit effect pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the game state (in this embodiment, normal game state, low probability time-saving game state) in which the probability variation flag is off, it is possible to win "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability short-time game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state is "time saving hit", when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the A time saving game state, and for the A time saving game state In any case where the C time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the possibility of increasing the time saving number of times is low. Therefore, by minimizing the player's knowledge of the possibility of winning the "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving win" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-probability short-time game state, and the pre-reading effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability short-time game state and high-probability low-time short game state. may Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may be performed for the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, or common reach can be executed. 15 and 54 in this embodiment.
As can be seen from FIG. 56, the sub CPU 301, when executing the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern, executes the time-saving winning system reach as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the big win system ready-to-win. In addition, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big-hit performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the big-hit type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-type ready-to-win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, it can perform the time saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern. However, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern when the pre-read effect is executed in the pre-read big hit effect pattern.

In addition, the prefetch big hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56) and the prefetch short time hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56) ”), and a look-ahead common hit effect pattern (for example, a look-ahead effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “27H” shown in FIG. 56)
and , the sub CPU 301 sets the common reach as the sub-variation effect pattern (for example, the sub-variation effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55).
”) may be executed.

Moreover, after executing the time-saving winning system reach and clearly showing the loss in the time-saving winning system reach, a performance pattern may be provided in which the big winning system is executed. In this case, since the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end whether or not the jackpot-type ready-to-win with a high profit rate will be executed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach E and the common reach C After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type ready-to-win C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed,
Do not shift to jackpot system reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the performance common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the short-time winning system reach C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, it does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "big hit look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit, has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 Do not execute look-ahead effects. Even in a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect when a big hit look-ahead effect has already been performed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which variable display of special symbols is started after this first hold ), and when the prefetching jackpot production pattern (for example, the prefetching hit type production pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is executed in the first reservation, the prefetching production is performed in the second reservation Even if executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may not make sense. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is terminated, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state, for example, the "time-saving win" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the big win look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to carry out the look-ahead performance for the suspension that is executed after the suspension in which the big win look-ahead performance is executed.

It should be noted that even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which the jackpot is derived), the first
If the look-ahead effect is not executed for the second hold, the look-ahead effect may or may not be executed in the second hold.

In addition, even when a fake big hit look-ahead effect (for example, a look-ahead winning type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first suspension, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second suspension. may This is because, even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, in the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, a small win is included in the first reservation. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is being executed, the big win look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit.
) is executed in the first reservation, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Also, as a sub-fluctuation production pattern, during the execution of the jackpot type reach, for example, the first start port 120
When a prize is won and the starting information is suspended, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this suspension.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as “specific suspension” in the paragraph), and whether the look-ahead effect is executed or not performed for this specific suspension, the sub CPU 301 will be executed after the jackpot game state ends. , If it is not in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state, a low-probability short-time game state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. Sub CPU if pending
301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific reservation after the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the jackpot display mode is derived, the main CP
If the starting information determined to be "time saving hit" by the look-ahead determination performed by U201 is suspended (this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in this paragraph), even if this specific suspension is "time saving hit" , the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving game state based on the "time-saving win" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, when the time-saving gaming state overlaps, it is a specification that does not execute multiple time-saving gaming states, and if it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead effect]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute a look-ahead effect using a pending image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

[1-10-1. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes the look-ahead hit type effect pattern and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead big hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of the read-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and the big-hit-type read-ahead effect patterns showing the possibility of a big win change. It is a figure which shows a process. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H" or "78H" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), the display area 7a of the display device 7 includes the first
A reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas indicating whether reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. In addition, the 0th area 410 is
This is an area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub CPU 301
holds the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reservation area in which the reservation information is stored,
A suspended image indicated by a triangle (hereinafter simply referred to as a "held image") is displayed. Further, when the reservation information is not stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301
The reserved image is not displayed, and only the frame of the reserved area is displayed.

In FIG. 60(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3) and no pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that the reservation information is newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved images shown in the first to fourth reserved areas 411 to 414 differently according to the expected value for the big hit. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white. The color of the pending image displayed is blue (expected level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , a change from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reservation area 413 .

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. , is an image showing a change from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the pending image indicating the expected value for the big hit does not necessarily have to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the variation. .

Also, in FIG. 60, the change in the expected value from which the big win is derived is shown by changing the big hit look-ahead effect form. The sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect that changes to the effect mode. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when prefetching production is performed with prefetching time saving production pattern]
Next, a specific example in which a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time saving performance pattern as the look-ahead hit type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61 .

Figure 61 (a) ~ Figure 61 (f) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit system It is a figure which shows the process which changes. In addition, the look-ahead time reduction per type effect pattern shown in FIGS.
corresponds to "H". Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). Sub CPU301, as described above, the first reservation area 411 ~
The form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is displayed differently according to the expected value for the time saving hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big win is represented by the color of the pending image, and the expected value for the time saving win is represented by the shape of the pending image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape shown in the fourth reserved area 414 The shape of the retained image that is displayed is a rectangle (expectation value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , third
It is an image showing a change from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the reservation area 413 .

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , second
It is an image showing a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the reservation area 412 .

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , first
It is an image showing a change from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level “4”) when shifted to the reserved area 411 .

FIG. 61(f) is an image obtained by shifting one hold from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , 0th
4 is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when shifted to region 410;

It should be noted that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star", for example, change to "pentagon → circle" You may let

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for time saving is not necessarily
It is not necessary to change when the hold shifts, for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 61, by changing the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived is shown. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301 . In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed with prefetching common hit effect pattern]
Next, a specific example in which the prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching common winning effect pattern as the above prefetching winning effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62 .

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from a system look-ahead production form to a big-hit system look-ahead production form. Changes in the common winning system look-ahead production form include changes in the expected value level of the win (shorter time win, big win) and changes in which it is clear whether the type of win is a big win or a short time win. is included. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to "43H" in FIG.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are used as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit. is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). Sub CPU301, the first reservation area 411 ~ fourth reservation area 41
4, the form (for example, color and shape) of the pending image shown in
are displayed differently depending on the expected value for In this embodiment, if the look-ahead effect is not executed or if the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed with a white triangle,
The expected value for short hits increases in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star”.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2"). .

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , second
Yellow pentagon to green hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to reserved area 412
It is an image showing that it changed to

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , first
When shifting to the reservation area 411, it changed from a green hexagon (a common hit-type look-ahead effect form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big hit-type look-ahead effect form with an expected value level of "5"). It is an image showing that.

That is, the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(b) and FIG. 62(c) is a form showing an expected value for the big hit or a form showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, FIG.
), the form of the pending image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level "5"). It is.

Thus, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the look-ahead effect,
One of the look-ahead short-time hit production pattern indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit, the look-ahead big hit production pattern indicating the expected value for the big hit, and the look-ahead common hit production pattern indicating the expected value for the hit (jackpot or time-saving hit) It is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect with a pattern. Then, when the read-ahead performance is executed in the read-ahead common winning performance pattern, the player is given interest in whether the reserved image changes to the big win system look-ahead performance form or the time-saving winning system look-ahead performance form. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the form of the pending image showing the expected value for time saving does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star” Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead production form)", or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → It may be changed to "triangular star (time-saving hit system look-ahead production form)". In addition, it is not necessary to start the form of the pending image showing the expected value for the hit from the blue square with the lowest expected value,
For example, it may start from the red circle.

Also, the form of the hold image indicating the expected value for the win does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 62, by changing the common winning system look-ahead production mode, the expected value for deriving any winning (big win or short-time winning) is changed, or the expected win is changed from an unknown state to a big win. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect shown below. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
・Change from common hit-type look-ahead production form to big hit-type look-ahead production form, and then,
A look-ahead effect that changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common hit system look-ahead production form indicating that there is a possibility for both the jackpot and the time saving hit is not necessarily the color that indicates the expected value for the jackpot,
It is not limited to the form represented by both the shape showing the expected value for the time saving hit. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit-based look-ahead effect form may be provided. When an exclusive common hit system look-ahead performance form is provided, it becomes possible to have expectations for both the big win and the time-saving hit, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to change the performance mode in the future. The game can be played with anticipation, and interest can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) show an example of a read-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a hold image is changed from a dedicated common win-type read-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Also, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are an example of the prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and from the dedicated common winning system prefetch effect form to the time saving system prefetch effect form FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a process in which a held image changes to . It should be noted that the look-ahead hit type production patterns shown in FIGS.
, or "63H", and the look-ahead expected value rendering patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG.

63(a) and 64(a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
, a normal pending image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed is displayed, and the third pending area 41
No reserved image is displayed in the third and fourth reserved areas 414, and only frames are displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIG. 63(b) and FIG. 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a glittering form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and in FIG. It is an image showing that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , first
When shifting to the reservation area 411, the red triangle (
This is an image showing that the expected level of the jackpot has changed to "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and in FIG. When the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the dedicated common winning system look-ahead production form to a white circle (expected value level "4" for time saving).

In this way, even when the look-ahead performance form is represented by the dedicated common win-type look-ahead performance form, the special common win-type look-ahead performance form is changed to the big win-type look-ahead performance form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form. It is possible to make the player have interest in which way it will change, and to increase interest.

[1-11. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. Signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "
door/frame open”, “external information 1” to “external information 8”, “prize ball information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1", and CH2
, the signal of "door/frame open" is output, and each of CH3 to CH10 outputs "external information 1
to "external information 8" are output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine is
A signal of "prize ball information 1" will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" out of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, a payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening 131 (Fig. 4
) when a game ball wins, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball wins a start port (first start port 120 or second start port 140 (both see FIG. 4)) For example, three prize balls are paid out, and when game balls enter the general prize winning opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 waits, for example, 120 ms at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1".
During ec, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out.
The output for msec is also merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of the errors in the first pachinko game machine. , the signal of "security" (illustrated as "security signal" in FIG. 67)
is a table showing the output time and remarks of .

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a big winning hole for a small win, FIG.
It also describes the small winning big winning opening abnormal winning error. In addition, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors not shown in FIG. 67 that are judged to be errors include:
For example, solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for more than a predetermined time, not discharged inside the big winning opening (large winning opening for big winning or big winning opening for small winning) This corresponds to a large winning hole entry/ejection abnormality error when there is a game ball or a prize is won in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, and the like. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big winning game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big winning game control is finished. , it will be judged as an error even if there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening for the big win, but the game ball passes through the specific area. preferably configured.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the sub CPU 30
1 (see FIG. 6). Sub CPU that received fraud detection related information
301 executes notification control according to the content of the error.

Below, the main CPU
The control by 201 and sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning prize is detected before the first big winning big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for big winning, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control,
When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a special winning opening abnormal winning error" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, FIG. 6 shows the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state.
8 for explanation. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of signals output to the outside according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 68, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, different signals are output depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) output. In addition, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, signals of “external information 3” and “external information 6” are output during a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a big hit, other than during a small hit) be done.

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 1
86 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state apart from)
is the same as the signal output to Similarly, during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state)
The signal that is output to is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time gaming state (other than during the big hit, other than during the small hit), and is output during the small-hit game control process (during the high-probability short-time gaming state) The signal that
It is the same as the signal that is output during the high-accuracy short-time gaming state (other than during the big hit, other than during the small hit), and the signal that is output during the small-hit game control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) is highly accurate. It is the same as the signal output during the non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big hit, during the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine that is the source of the external information can win a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed out of the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

Further, in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine mentioned above, under the control of the main CPU,
It is possible to control the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (the function of the A time-saving game state, the function of the B time-saving game state, and the function of the C time-saving game state are installed). Although described as a premise, it is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) is installed, and the other function ( For example, it may be a pachinko game machine that does not include the function of the B time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state). Also, among the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function, two functions (for example, the A time-saving game state function, and the B time-saving game state function or C time-saving It may be a pachinko game machine that has only the function of the game state) and does not have other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the C time-saving game state).

Also, for example, like a pachinko game machine called ST machine, after the jackpot game state is over, 1
In a pachinko game machine in which the variable probability flag is set to ON with a probability of 00%, even if it is configured so as not to install any of the functions of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state function, and the C time saving game state function. good.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, regarding the game board unit and the electrical configuration,
There is a difference from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

Also, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings is the same as the first pachinko game machine in terms of functions, etc., the first pachinko game Description will be made using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example Including a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variation machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first and second starting openings. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a game area 1105.
is formed.

Various members arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko game machine (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) are arranged in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) of the first pachinko game machine. There are some things in common, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 formed with a game area 1105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down;
10, a center accessory 1115 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1105, a first starting port 1120, a general prize winning port 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, and a second starting. Mouths 1140A, 1140B and normal electric accessories unit 1145
, a small win unit 1150 , an LED unit 1160 , an outlet 1178 , and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010 . In addition, LE
The D unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof is omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rails 1110 are arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both unreferenced).
Consists of The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

The game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 is the left area 1
106 or right region 1107. A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007 . Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

Behind the center of the stage 1118 in the horizontal direction is a chance entrance 11 into which game balls can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 1119 is
is configured to be emitted directly above the Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. Mouth 1
It is designed to win (pass) 120.

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, the first starting port switch 1121
(see FIG. 70 described later). In addition, the game ball hit to the right is the first start port 112
It may be possible to win 0. Also, instead of or in addition to the first start port 1120,
A game ball hit to the right may win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007.
It is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). When the game ball wins the general winning opening 1122, the general winning opening switch 1
123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of game balls to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the general winning opening 11
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 22 is not limited to four.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal design is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The reserved starting information of the normal symbol is usually subjected to the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

Also, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device are activated, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), the accessory continuous operation device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a big winning prize opening 1131 and a big winning prize opening 1 for big winning.
Big winning opening count switch 1132 for big hits for detecting winning (passing) of game balls to 131
(See FIG. 70 to be described later) and the special electric accessory 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 has a passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107.
is placed below.

The big winning opening 1131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 1131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball, or a center accessory 1115 A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. Big winning opening count switch 1132 for big winning (see FIG. 70 to be described later)
) detects that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 1131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134
An open state in which winning (passing) of game balls to 31 is possible or easy, and a big winning opening 113 for big winning
A closed state in which winning (passing) of a game ball to 1 is impossible or difficult, and a state transition is possible. It should be noted that the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot gaming state is the jackpot jackpot 113
1 is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which a closed state is shifted to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second starting ports, the second starting port 1140A and the second starting port 1140B
are arranged in the game area 1105, and these second start ports 1140A and 1140B are
In both cases, right-handed game balls can win prizes (left-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win)
It has become. However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Second starting port 114
Even if the game ball wins in any of 0A and 1140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

Second starting port 1
When the winning (passing) of the game ball to 140A and 1140B is detected, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the second starting ports 1140A, 114
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 0B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 1131, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and does not enter the jackpot jackpot 1131 and flows further downstream is, for example, a branch nail 11 shown in FIG.
08, it is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, most of the game balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a are the second starting port 11
It is not essential to be configured to win 40A. It may be possible to win a prize at an expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5). In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but have not won the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 1178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is disposed on the lower flow path 1107b side, and includes a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 1140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the normal electric shutter 1147 is in an open state in which the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second start port 1140B is possible or easy, and the second start port 114
A closed state in which winning of a game ball to 0B is impossible or difficult, and a closed state can be changed to.
It should be noted that instead of the shutter 1147 for general electric power that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member such as a blade member called a so-called electric tulip may be employed. Also, the movable member is
It is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small hit unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening 1151.
A small winning big winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to, a small winning shutter 1153 that can move back and forth, and this small winning shutter 1153. It is a unit body integrated with a small hit solenoid 1154 that can be operated.

The small-hit shutter 1153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction so that the small-hit big winning opening 115
An open state in which the winning (passing) of the game ball to 1 is possible or easy, and a big winning opening 1151 for a small winning
A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize, and a state transition to the closed state are possible.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 1152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 1145 in the downward flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning big winning port 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 1151 for winning, in order to win the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side,
It becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning big winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is a variety of winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, the big winning prize port 1131
, general winning port 1122, etc.) to discharge out of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, between the normal electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. A game ball flowing down the region 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit is a sub-control circuit 1300
(See FIG. 70 described later).
The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 70
is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 for controlling the effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 1204
and a backup capacitor 1207, etc., which are housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a WDT that monitors the operation.
(watchdog timer) and functions to prevent fraud are built in.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU 12
01 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with storage areas for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is an I/O circuit connected to be communicable with various devices.
A port 1205 and a command output port 1206 connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands are also provided.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165,
Second special symbol holding display unit 1166, probability variation notification display unit 1167, time reduction notification display unit 11
68, a general electric solenoid 1148, a special electric solenoid 1135, and a small winning solenoid 1154 are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 12
00 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starting switch 1121, a second starting switch 1
141A, 1141B, passage gate switch 1127, big winning opening count switch 1132 for big winning, general winning opening switch 1123 and big winning opening counting switch 11 for small winning
52 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detect signal is sent to I/O port 1.
205 to the main control circuit 1200 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game center to expose the back surface, the manager of the game center operates the setting key 1174 and/or the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. In this case also, a third party other than the manager of the game hall may operate the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1.
Preferably, 176 is not easily accessible.

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work R
AM 1303, display control circuit 1304, audio control circuit 1305, LED control circuit 1306
, a role item control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. Sub control circuit 1
300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 .
Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
1301 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . note that,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier for amplifying audio signals (hereinafter referred to as AM
P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . Sound source IC is sub C
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the PU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role item control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls and causing game balls to be shot. A launching device 1006 capable of controlling ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is connected to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 130).
0, payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but in the following,
Descriptions related to setting functions are omitted.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time reduction control is executed, the high probability time-saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time reduction control are executed, and the time reduction control although the variable probability control is executed A high-probability non-time-saving game state that is not executed, and a low-probability short-time game state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 120
1 allows the game to progress in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state progresses. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state.
The sub CPU 1301 determines the regular game mode (for example, whether to play right or left).
For example, control to display in the display area of the display device 1007 is executed.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 71 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit determination table of special symbols stored in .

The special symbol hit determination table is a special symbol hit determination process (S1034 in FIG. 78 to be described later).
reference), that is, the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1
A table referred to when a ``time saving hit'', a ``small hit'', a ``jackpot'' or a ``loss'' is determined by lottery based on a big hit determination random number extracted when a game ball wins a prize in 140A, 1140B. is. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "time-saving hit", "minor hit", "big hit", and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is 0 to 65535 (65536 types)
extracted from the However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving win", "big win", or "lose" in the first special symbol win determination process based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1), "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding judgment value data for a short-time hit, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "jackpot" and this and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines whether a "time-saving win", "minor win", "big win" or "losing" is determined based on the extracted big win determination random number value.
to decide. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) relationship with the data, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the relationship with the corresponding judgment value data for judging a big hit, the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "losing" and the corresponding loss determination value data are stipulated. be.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
When the extracted random number for judging a big hit is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 120
1 determines that it is a "time saving hit", and determines the hit-loss determination value data as "time saving hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". In addition, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 120
1 is determined to be "losing", and the determination value data is determined as "losing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the first
When the probability variation flag is ON during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and sets the determination value data to " Big hit judgment value data” is determined. Also, if the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201
It is determined to be a "time saving hit", and the determination value data is determined as "time saving hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number for jackpot determination is 22118 ~
22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 22323 to 65535
In either case, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing", and determines the determination value data to be "losing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201
It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Also, the second
When the probability variation flag is ON during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit" and stores the determination value data. Determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number is 22118 to 2
2968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines the determination value data as "big hit determination value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing", and determines Change the value data to
"Loss Judgment Value Data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging a big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the hit judging process for the second special symbol)
), other judgment value data (for example,
It is assigned to time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data). Also, from a predetermined value to the end (for example, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, 22
323 to 65535) are assigned to the loss judgment value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing so, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or reduces) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the big hit probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared to the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving game state when winning the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state, when the "time-saving win" is won just before the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state is substantially It will be extended, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving win" regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. . However, when the variable probability flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 1201 controls the time saving game state, but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 72 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in.

The special symbol determination table is the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140
When selecting the "selection symbol command" and the "designation command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in B and the above-mentioned win-lose judgment value data. (That is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 of FIG. 78 described later), it is a table referred to. The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201
"z1" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 1201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main C
PU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "z3" as the symbol designation command.
zA3”. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9,
The main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. In addition, the design random number of the first special design is 60 ~
99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command.
is selected, and "zA4" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
For example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 120
1 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201
"z8" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, the small-hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated, and the small-hit big winning opening 1151 (
(See FIG. 69) can be entered (passed) by a game ball, or can be controlled to be easily opened, and a prize ball can be paid out.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main C
PU1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command, and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201
"z14" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA11" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

Although the explanation is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 1200
M1202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a design command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of the time saving win, the big win display mode, the small win display mode or the losing display mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (Fig. 1
2 (B)), the sub-control circuit 13
00 is stored in the program ROM 1302 .

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit type determination table stored in . The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the winning game state and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (that is, when determining the mode of the game state after that) S10 in FIG.
36 when executing the hit type determination process). The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big winning game state or the mode of the small winning game state. Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164,
A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, since the winning game state is not controlled when the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is "time saving hit", the aspect of the winning game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of this special symbol is performed, the number of times of time saving to be set is the same. . However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving win" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. The information may be led out to display units 1163 and 1164 . Furthermore,
When the variable probability flag is ON, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the big hit determination random number value, that is, the winning determination process not including the "time saving hit" in the lottery result may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, if the selected pattern command is "z10
, the main CPU 1201 selects the small winning big winning port 1 as the mode of the small winning gaming state.
151 (see FIG. 69) is determined to be opened once. The result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "
If it is a small win, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described display mode of the small win to the second special symbol display unit 1164, then sets the number of openings of the determined small win big winning opening 1151, It is possible to control the winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 1
201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as a mode of the jackpot game state, and determines to set ON only the variable probability flag out of the variable probability flag and the short time flag as the mode of the subsequent game state, and sets the variable probability number. is set to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and after the jackpot game state ends, can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 as a mode of the jackpot gaming state.
Decide on rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds. In addition, as a form of the game state after that, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are both set to 10000 times. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

Also, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1
201 has four rounds and one
Decide on 0. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag. Also, the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be set to 200 times, for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", and determined to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable in a time-saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (
Hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201
Neither the mode of the winning game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is set. i.e.
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 73.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Determine the hit/lose judgment value data based on the random number value for judging a big hit (make a hit/lose judgment)
to decide. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selected symbol command is determined based on the hit/loss determination value data, and the type of display mode derived to the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 (for example,
He is trying to determine the kind of time saving hit, the kind of big hit). Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6")
Or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, if you did not win the "jackpot" even though you won the "jackpot" (
It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of winning the "time saving hit".

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state higher than the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state You may make it higher than an expected value. Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. Main CPU
1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B. determine the variation pattern of The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S1037 of FIG. 78 described later.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74, the main C
PU1201 sets a look-ahead flag, when the random number value for production|presentation selection extracted based on the prize-winning of the game ball to the 1st start opening 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, in a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, or a low-probability short-time game state, for example, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the special symbol variation pattern is the type of special symbol,
It is determined based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (hit or lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number. However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start of FIG. 75, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start of FIG. The expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is greater than when it is determined. In particular, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 6000.
Variable display is performed for an extremely long time of 00 msec (for example, long fluctuations A to C).
On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for each setting value, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection is changed so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different. good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74) is referred to determine the special symbol variation pattern, for example, high probability short game state, high probability non In the time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of special symbols for high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of variable display times of special symbols per unit time are provided, for example, according to the type of time-saving gaming state, special symbols Different tables may be referred to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 have the possibility of a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Also, although the description is omitted for the second pachinko machine, as in the first pachinko machine,
The main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table ( 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 86), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers are changed,
The special symbol control processing will be explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first, in S1001, the second
Load the special symbol control state number. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201, when executing the special symbol control process, performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing.
Then, the main CPU 1201 determines that the number of pending first special symbols is "0
”, the demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol is performed, and if the number of pending second special symbols is “0” for a certain period of time or more, the demonstration display command transmission reservation for the second special symbol is performed. process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which the left-hand hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the right-hand hitting is the regular game mode (
For example, the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, and low-probability short-time gaming state. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols.
For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect. In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-probability short-time game state, instead of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, which is the main special design, other effects An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of times of time saving until the time saving game state ends) may be displayed.

At S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the time to start the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1003. For example, NO determination is made in S1002 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (when S1002 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S100.
Move to 4.

At S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 1201 is S
After executing the process of 1003, the process moves to S1004.

At S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1006. For example, NO determination is made in S1005 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S1005 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S100.
Move to 7.

At S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1006, 201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

At S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is reached (when S1008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1
009.

At S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1009, 201 shifts the process to S1010.

At S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

At S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the time to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (Fig. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is reached (YES in S1011), no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1
012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1012, 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the special symbol control processing (S
1001 to S1012) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 77, S1003 and S100 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76)
6, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1009 and S1012 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, S1003 or S1009 during special symbol control processing special symbol management processing
When the second special symbol is called and executed, the second special symbol is processed, and when the special symbol management process is called and executed at S1006 or S1012 during the special symbol control process, the first special symbol is processed. becomes.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S
1021).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S1021 (S1021 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 in S1021 (S102
1 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1023 based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 causes the process to proceed to S10.
Move to 24.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

At S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S
The processing of 1025 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.
If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 causes the processing to be changed to S
Move to 1026.

At S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S
The process of 1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S
The processing of 1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. This S102
The process of 8 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, and S
If called at 1006, the process returns to S1007, if called at S1009, the process returns to S1010, and if called at S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 78, at S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A special symbol variable display start process executed by PU 1201 will be described. Figure 78 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S1031 (S10
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S1031 (
If S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

At S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is determined as YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, is ON (NO determination in S1032 ), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off in S1032, that is, it is on (NO determination in S1032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is off in S1032 (S10
32 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

At S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination process is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether there is In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a time saving hit, and turns on the small winning flag when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off when shifting to the C time-saving game state, the small winning flag is turned off when the small winning game state is started, and the big winning flag is turned off when the big winning game state is started.

In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

At S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, big hit,
or loss) is a process of judging or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the error. In this process, referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72), using the symbol random number value of the special symbol,
The above-mentioned "selected pattern command" and "designated pattern command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the reach determination random number or/and the effect selection random number. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value or the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, a special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75 ) to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

At S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is
It is determined as the fluctuation time of the special design. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

At S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 77 S1024) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

At S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. The main CPU 1201 executes S1040
After executing the process of , the process moves to S1041.

At S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S
Move to 1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In addition, the special symbol effect start command that is reserved for transmission in this process is the next effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S1041) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)) by interrupt prohibition. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, S102 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77)
4, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S1051 (S10
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S1051 (
If S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

At S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value.
After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

At S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S1052.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on in S1053 (if the determination is NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is off in S1053 (S10
53 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

At S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. Main CPU 1201
executes the process of S1054, and then shifts the process to S1055.

At S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. In addition, the special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45), the sub control circuit 1300
sent to. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1
Move to 056.

At S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

At S1057, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing (S
1034) determines whether or not the result is a small hit.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO in S1057), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when S1057 determines YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1058.

At S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1058, 201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing (S
1034) determines whether or not the result is a big hit.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (when S1059 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when S1059 determines YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

At S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

When it is determined that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed in S1061 (S1061
is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S1
061 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1063, 201 shifts the process to S1064.

At S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing for the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. The main CPU 1201 performs S10
64, the process proceeds to S1065.

At S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

At S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

At S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2
” is set. After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S
Move to 1068.

At S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

At S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. The main CPU 1201, S1069
After executing the process of , the special symbol variable display end process is terminated, and the process is changed to the special symbol management process (
(see FIG. 77).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIGS. 81 and 82, S102 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77)
5, the special symbol game determination processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S1071 (S10
71 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S1071 (
If S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 120
1, when the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small hit (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU
1201 moves the process to S1076 after performing the process of S1075.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 120
1 also performs processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning) (S1077), the external terminal board 1184 Big hit signal set processing (S107
8), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), the game state designation parameter setting process (S1080), and the transmission reservation process of the jackpot start display command (
S1081) and other processing are performed. In addition, by performing the process (S1079) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 77 S1026) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 83, S1 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82)
The special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at 074 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and the processing is changed to the special symbol game determination processing (
81).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is lost,
The main CPU 1201 does not set or reset any of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 84, at S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A special winning opening preparation process executed by PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 84 shows the second
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S1101 (S11
01 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S1101 (
If S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the small winning big winning opening 1151) reaches the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the big-hit big winning opening 1131 opened in the big-hit gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit large winning opening 1151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S1103
is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

At S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104
) to switch the control state number, the jackpot ending process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. Main CPU 12
After executing the process of S1104, 01 moves the process to S1105.

At S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (
S1106). It should be noted that the jackpot end display command that is reserved for transmission in this process, in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process,
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 . After the processing of S1106, the main CPU 120
1 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit (S110
3 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 executes the process of
Move to S1108.

At S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened.
In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. A big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. The main CPU 1201 performs S110
After executing the process of No. 8, the process moves to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, a large winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151
), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when the big winning game control process is executed, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 1151 for small winnings when the small winning game control process is executed. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes.
After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 1131 and the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating open/close control data for the big winning openings (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

At S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111
) to switch the control state number, the large winning opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. Main CP
After executing the process of S1111, U1201 shifts the process to S1112.

At S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

At S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 85, at S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A special winning opening opening control process executed by PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 85 shows the second
is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S1121 (S11
21 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S1121 (
If S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S<b>1122 , the main CPU 1201 opens a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning).
, and determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won a prize in the small winning big prize opening 1151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 1132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70) etc.) is the value of the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

In S1122, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 115 for small winning
1) When it is determined that the number of winning game balls is not the maximum winning number (S1122 is NO
determination), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) is the maximum winning number (S1122
is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

At S<b>1123 , the main CPU 1201 opens a large winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning).
, It is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the small winning big winning opening 1151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has passed.

In S1123, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151
), if it is determined that the maximum opening time has not elapsed (if NO determination is made in S1123),
The main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and changes the process to a special symbol management process (
(see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1123, the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1 for small winning)
151) that the maximum open time has elapsed (YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

At S<b>1124 , the main CPU 1201 opens a big winning opening (big winning opening 1131
, closing processing of the small winning big winning opening 1151). The main CPU 1201 performs S1124
, the process moves to S1125.

At S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (
S1125) is performed to switch the control state number, and after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed again. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

At S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 86, at S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The jackpot end processing executed by the PU 1201 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, S1 during the special symbol management process for which this jackpot end process is the first special symbol to be processed
When called by 028, the first special symbol is processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S1131 (S11
31 is NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) as well as the big win end process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S1131 (
If S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

At S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) is set or reset, and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, pattern fixed number counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened) counter, big winning opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) is set or reset. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high-probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201
The process moves to S1133.

At S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. Main CPU 12
After executing the processing of S1133, 01 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), since hitting to the right is a regular game mode, the game to the second start port 1140A, 1140B A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting opening, the first The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed one.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the normal electric accessory 114
6 to increase the frequency of opening the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency that the second start opening 1140B will be in the open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state
Therefore, if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small winning large winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 1151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win the second starting port 1140A. When the game ball wins the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, for example, 3 as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71).
Not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/1 (approximate) derived, but also super-fast fluctuations ( For example, since variable display time 1000 msec) is executed, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state ). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high certainty short working hours gaming state, the low certainty short working hours gaming state), the second start port 1140B is in the open state by executing the electric sapo control,
Most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b are the second starting port 1
I will win 140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. The game ball hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a is the second
For example, three prize balls are paid out when the starting port 1140A wins, but the second starting port 11
In 40A, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls hit right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 1107a win a prize. In this way, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.)
The expected value of is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the normal symbol hit is displayed in a stop display mode. When pulled out, the normal electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small winning big winning opening 1151 is opened by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74). Even if it does, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 1151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first start opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived.
In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and establishes the starting condition of the second special symbol with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variator to However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko game machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 also has a protective glass 4 as in the first pachinko game machine.
3 (see FIG. 2) is positioned in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 formed with a game area 2105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down;
10, a center accessory 2115 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 2105, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize winning port 2122, and a passage gate unit 212.
5, a special electric accessory unit 2130, a normal electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is the guide rail 2
It is partitioned (defined) by 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

The game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 is the left area 2
106 or right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

Behind the center of the stage 2118 in the left-right direction is a chance entrance 21 into which game balls can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 2119 is
is configured to be emitted directly above the Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. Mouth 2
It is designed to win (pass) 120.

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 2120, the first starting port switch 2121 (
(see FIG. 88, which will be described later). In addition, the game ball hit to the right is the first start port 2120
may be able to win a prize. Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and the left-handed game ball is the second
It may be possible to win prizes at the starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007.
The game balls are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win prizes (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win prizes). When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the general winning opening 21
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 22 is not limited to four.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right area 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the big winning hole 2131,
It is a unit body integrated with the special electric accessory 2133 . Special electric accessories unit 2130
is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to
In place of or in addition to the large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a large winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize is arranged above the center accessory 2115. You may do so.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. The large winning opening 2 is selected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later).
When winning of game balls to 131 is detected, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. however,
The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that makes it possible.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right area 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 2147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the shutter 2147 for normal electric power. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the ordinary electric shutter 2147, has an open state in which the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second start port 2140 is possible or easy, and the second start port 2140
A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize, and a state transition to the closed state are possible. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, and a V that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151.
An attacker 2152, a V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates the V-attacker 2152 to open and close the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and a game inside the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V-attacker 2152. A V-attacker count switch 2153 for detecting the entry of a ball, a V-winning opening 2155 through which a game ball entering the inside of the V-winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and an opening/closing winning opening 2151.
A game ball entered into the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed through) the V winning opening 2155, and enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball that does not enter the V winning port 2155 among the game balls that have entered can enter (pass through), and a V shutter 21 that opens and closes the V winning port 2155.
58, a V-shutter solenoid 2159 that operates the V-shutter 2158 to open and close the V-winning opening 2155, and a locking member that can hold only one of the game balls entering the V-winning device 2150. 2160. In addition, the V winning device 2150
It may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that it is a "accessory hit" described later is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( (see FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. And V Attacker 2
While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of 152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . V winning device 21 by V attacker count switch 2153
50, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and changes the value of the V-attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. to add. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec
) has not yet passed, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 215
2 is activated to close the open/close winning opening 2151 .

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is released,
Continue controlling the opening of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the first round is V attacker 2
152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, a round game may be executed in which, for example, the big winning opening 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the middle of the round game.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), etc.
Only one attacker may be opened in the prize-winning game state and the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133 is opened.
When the game ball enters into, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). Missing mouth 2157
The game ball that has passed through is discharged out of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 2155 by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later)
A fixed operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the passage of the game ball to the winning opening 2155 is possible (or easy). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and the V winning device 2150
It is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one ball out of the game balls that have entered the inside. A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

Further, the locking member 2160 is held for a certain period of time (for example, 3
000 msec), the locking of the game ball is released by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, the losing opening 2157
pass through. In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150,
It is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the general winning openings 2122, etc., to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. Figure 88
is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201 , a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 220
4 and a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a WDT that monitors the operation.
and functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU 22
01 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is an I/O circuit connected to be communicable with various devices.
It also has a port 2205 and a command output port 2206 connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to output various commands.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol pending display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol pending display portion 2165,
Second special symbol holding display unit 2166, time saving display unit 2168, general electric solenoid 21
48, a special power solenoid 2135, a V-attacker solenoid 2154, a V-shutter solenoid 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like.
Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting switch 2121 and a second starting switch 2
141, pass gate switch 2127, big winning slot count switch 2132, V attacker count switch 2153, V winning slot switch 2156, and general winning slot switch 2123 are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 217 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function
4. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like is connected, which can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the administrator of the game arcade.
In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 is
It may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. When the notch is provided and the key managed by the person in charge of the game hall is used to rotate the pachinko game machine from the island facility to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. In this case also, a third party other than the person in charge of the game hall may operate the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2.
Preferably, 176 is not easily accessible.

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work R
AM 2303, display control circuit 2304, audio control circuit 2305, LED control circuit 2306
, a role item control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. Sub control circuit 2
300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 .
Although not shown in FIG. 88, as in the first pachinko game machine, the sub-control circuit 230
0 is also connected to a performance button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . note that,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier for amplifying audio signals (hereinafter referred to as AM
P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . Sound source IC is sub C
One voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command supplied from the PU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands transmitted from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is connected to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 230).
0, payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display a hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007 .

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 89 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit determination table of special symbols stored in .

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol jackpot determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory release hit".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". ,
It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed.
In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes the first start port 21
As the data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning to 20, the range of the jackpot determination random number (
width) and the corresponding determination value data (“time saving determination value data”, “big hit determination value data”, “losing determination value data”) are defined. Also, the second starting port 2140
As the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the
The range (width) of the random number value for judging the jackpot determined for "time-saving hit", "jackpot" or "accessory open hit", and the corresponding judgment value data ("time-saving hit judgment value data", "jackpot judgment value data", and "determination value data for opening a role item") are stipulated.

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, the probability of a big hit, the probability of opening a role, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the V
Attacker 2152 operation frequency), opening time, time reduction continuation number of times, etc. By adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, the expectation value that is controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 90 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting port 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 9.
9, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 2201 selects, for example, a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, the pattern random number of the first special pattern is 61 to 99
, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
The main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2
201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
”.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 22
01 selects "z6" as a selection symbol command and "zA5" as a symbol designation command.
to select.

Furthermore, when the accessory release hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows.
That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CP
U2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "z7" as the symbol designation command.
Select A6.

Although the explanation is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 2200
M2202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the winning prize or the display mode of losing is derived based on the result of the special symbol win determination processing. be. Further, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300 .

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.
It is an example of a hit type determination table stored in . In the hit type determination table, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the aspect of the subsequent game state (more specifically, It is referred to when determining time saving flag and time saving end condition). The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state.
"L" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2. Also, if the selection pattern command is "z
2”, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=50, M=5, and N=1. do. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 and determines not to set the time saving flag to ON. again,
When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end condition to L=
50, M=5, N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the main CP
U2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory released", if the big win game state is not controlled through the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big win game state. Not only does it not, the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing the control based on the winning of the opening of the role, the game state immediately before the opening of the role is returned.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines whether the jackpot game state mode and the subsequent game state mode are selected. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the aspect of the jackpot game state and the aspect of the subsequent game state as described above Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this, different conditions may be used. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B Only one of the time saving game state and the C time saving game state may be different. Also, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. , A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state may be changed only in one of the time saving game state. That is, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to at least one of the A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state, and C time reduction game state. You may make it differ in a game state.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the "remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for the sake of convenience. Main C
PU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2120, and the variation of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2140 determine the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving winning", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first start port 2120 when the game ball wins. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when (passing).

Also, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 22
01 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball wins (passes) through the first starting port 2120. - 特許庁

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 22
01 is based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the first start port 2120, and the random value for effect selection. decide. It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, since hitting to the right is the normal game mode, it is considered that the game ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 2
201, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the game ball wins (passes) to the second start port 2140
It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2120 is a specific random number. Main CPU 22
The sub CPU 2301 that receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from 01,
If the look-ahead flag is set, a look-ahead effect is performed.

For the sake of convenience, it does not appear in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. If the probability variation flag is on, do not set the look-ahead flag.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on.
Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, set the look-ahead flag (
It may be so that a look-ahead effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Also, although the description is omitted for the third pachinko machine, as in the first pachinko machine,
The main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table ( 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 103), etc. ), in the following
Including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). Main CPU
2201 moves the process to S2002 after executing the process of S2001.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing.
Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. It should be noted that the demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent to the sub-control circuit 2 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG.
300. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command,
The sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

When it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 in S2002 (S2002 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S2002 (S200
2 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when S2003 is NO determination), the main CP
U2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when S2004 is NO determination), the main CP
U2201 ends the special symbol control process, and the process is changed to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 23
reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved (when S2003 is YES determination), the main C
PU2201 moves a process to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. The main CPU 2201 is S
After executing the process of 2003, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is changed to the main control main process (
20 to 23).

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets the interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (
S2001 to S2005) are preferably performed within the interrupt disabled section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is given a higher priority than the first special symbol.
) has been described, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 94, at S2005 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93), the main C
A special symbol management process executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S2003 is YES determination, and S2004 is YES.
In the case of S determination, the first special symbol is to be processed. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
2002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for special symbols is 0 (S
2011).

If it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 in S2011 (S2011 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 in S2011 (S201
1 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S201.
Move to 3. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

At S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 causes the process to proceed to S20.
Move to 14.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 causes the process to proceed to S20.
Move to 15.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S
The process of 2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The processing of this S2016 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 causes the processing to proceed to S2017.
to

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 causes the processing to proceed to S201.
Move to 8.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This S
The process of 2018 is a process performed when the special symbol control state number is "5".
The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 . If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This S
The process of 2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6".
The details of this big winning hole opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 . If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This S202
The process of 0 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 95, at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
A special symbol variable display start process executed by the PU 2201 will be described. Figure 95 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S20 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol
If it is the process called in 13, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" in S2021 (S20
21 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S2021 (
If S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing object, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is the object of processing, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time saving hit, a big hit, a role release hit or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S2024, 201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a winning (time-saving winning, big winning, accessor product opening winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, a prize-opening hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the prize-opening hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and accessory-opening wins. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or prize release wins, a plurality of losing types may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S20.
Move to 26.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol,
As a result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the special symbol variation pattern is determined according to the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random number value and/or the effect selection random number value. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. The main CPU 2201 performs S202
After executing the process of No. 8, the process moves to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S
Move to 2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. In addition, the special symbol effect start command that is reserved for transmission in this process is the next effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 .

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 96, at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
A special symbol variable display end process executed by PU 2201 will be described. Figure 96 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" in S2041 (S20
41 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" in S2041 (
If S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (S2 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process
015) is performed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. In addition, the special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2
Move to 044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 97, at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol game determination processing executed by PU2201 will be described. FIG. 97 shows the third
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game determination process targets the second special symbol
, the second special symbol will be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" in S2051 (S20
51 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" in S2051 (
If S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In addition, in the big hit game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057) to set to
Processing such as game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058) and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of a jackpot start display command is performed. In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends,
A special winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 9).
4).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that it is not a winning prize, that is, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 22
01 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has been stopped is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the opening of the role (S
2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the V winning device 2150 set in this process
is, for example, one time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting a winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), and a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
2064), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2065), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of a per-accessory start display command are performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the main CPU 220
1, when the special symbol game end processing is performed, the special symbol game determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. Figure 98 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy game state, the time-saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is similar to that shown in Fig. 32 in the first pachinko game machine. ~ Figure 3
9 is different from the processing described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in the first pachinko machine,
When the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value,
Although it has been explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to ON, the third pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in again,
In the first pachinko game machine, in the time reduction transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S191), on the condition that the probability variation flag is off S192 Although processing is being performed, in the third pachinko game machine, since it is not controlled to the high accuracy gaming state as described above, the processing of S191 is not performed, and the processing of S192 is performed. Other processes in the time saving management process are shown in FIG. 3 in the first pachinko game machine.
2 to 39 are the same as the processing described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 2201 executes S2071
After executing the process of , the process moves to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

At S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and the processing is changed to the special symbol game determination processing (
97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 99, at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
V winning device opening preparation processing executed by PU 2201 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" in S2081 (S20
81 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S2081 (
If S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 selects the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, as the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152, for example, the maximum open time and the maximum number of open times are set. In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time e.g. up to 60
It may be opened for 0 msec and then opened for a maximum of 1200 msec for the second time. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the process of S2083, 01 moves the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084
), the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation processing. The main CPU 2201 performs S208
After executing the process of 4, the process moves to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the processing of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).
back to

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" in S2091 (S20
91 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process,
The processing is returned to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" in S2091 (
If S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning prizes (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the open/close winning opening 2151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has passed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when S2093 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S20.
Move to 94.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection.
In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the interior of the V winning device 2150. The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a V hit signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. Main C
After executing the process of S2096, PU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V per game control of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, it was determined that there was a V winning detection (S2095 is Y
The game control per V executed by ES determination is started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S209
9), V hit signal set processing to the external terminal plate 2184 (S2100), processing of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), game state designation parameter setting processing (S
2102), and processing such as transmission reservation processing (S2103) of the start display command per V is performed. In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (S2 in FIG. 94
018) is performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that no V winning has been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the processing of S2104, 01 ends the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. Figure 101 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" in S2111 (S21
11 is NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" in S2111 (
If S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S2113
is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114
), the jackpot ending process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (
S2116). It should be noted that the jackpot end display command that is reserved for transmission in this process, in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process,
It is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 . After the processing of S2116, the main CPU 220
1 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit (S211
3 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S211.
Move to 8.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened.
In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is the winning of the winning character, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the character is derived (S2060 of FIG. 97 is determined as YES).
, In the case of V winning game control started by further V winning detection (S2095 of FIG. 100 is determined YES), V winning device 2150 (that is, opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as a large winning opening to be opened be done. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. In addition, in one round, the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150
is not intended to exclude those that are opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121
), the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the completion of this large winning opening opening preparation process. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. Figure 102 shows
It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" in S2131 (S21
31 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" in S2131 (
If S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

At S2132, the main CPU 2201 selects the big winning port 2131 or the V winning device 2
It is determined whether or not the number of game balls winning 150 is the maximum winning number. This process
Large winning hole count switch 2132 (
(see FIG. 88) or the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of game balls entering the interior of the V winning device 2150 is determined whether or not it is the value of the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or V-attacker count switch 2153 is
It is stored in a predetermined area in the AM2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when S2132 is NO determination), the main C
PU2201 moves a process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES),
The main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S2133, the main CPU 2201 selects the big winning port 2131 or the V winning device 2
Determine if the maximum open time of 150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed (if S2133 determines YES), the main CPU 22
01 moves the process to S2134.

At S2134, the main CPU 2201 selects the big winning port 2131 or the V winning device 2
150 closing processing is performed. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (
By performing S2135), after the end of this big winning opening opening control process, the big winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. Main CPU 2201
executes the processing of S2135, and then shifts the processing to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" in S2141 (S21
41 is NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" in S2141 (S21
41 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. Main CPU
After executing the process of S2142, 2201 moves the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU 22
After executing the process of S2143, 01 ends the big hit end process and the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot, and if the variable probability flag is set to ON, the variable probability number is determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be adopted.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. It should be noted that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning hole is opened for a short time and then long open, the opening mode of the big winning hole is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening to the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the special prize opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special prize opening is started (these two times are short )except,
A specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is possible to pass through the specific area.
It is more difficult than both the open mode and the second open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one of the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot
The number of opening modes of the specific area through which one game ball can easily pass through the specific area is not limited to two modes, and may be one mode or three modes or more.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The winning selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. selected, with a selectivity of 50%, "z2" is selected. Also, if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit,
As for the hit selection symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, the selection pattern command at the time of hit is "z0
, the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode jackpot (
It is determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C).

That is, according to the above FIGS. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%.
A 10R normal jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 0%, and a 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way
When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to vary the probabilities.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is a big winning (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball wins the big winning hole, Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, passing through the specific area even if one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening,
It is more difficult than the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is
During the short opening of the big prize gate and after the long opening of the big prize gate is started, it is open for a predetermined time twice (both short times), but it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. If so, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of big winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which probability variation control is executed alternately and repeatedly executed until reaching the limiter number of times so-called limiter machine has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached,
The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[4-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, time saving control can be executed after the big win game control process is finished. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number out of the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start hole (for example, for special symbol hit determination) A random number, a symbol random number of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determination process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol winning determination process. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol winning determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU determines that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win"
In spite of this, for example, it is preferable to forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving failure".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a game ball shooting method recommended in the big win game state. It is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball shooting method is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the method of shooting the game ball recommended when the time-saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction per" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2
times or more) is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it may not be displayed. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process are, for example, random numbers for special symbol per determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, random numbers for normal hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for special symbol fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used for the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random number used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. Time, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-loss determination process, etc.
Any timing is acceptable. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the time saving win-lose determination random number may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving hit-loss determination process using the random number value for special symbol hit determination, when it is specific loss determination value data, specific small hit determination value data or / and specific big hit determination value data, time saving It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the condition that is determined to be a time saving hit in the time saving hit/loss determination process,
Various conditions can be arbitrarily determined without being limited to the above conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the opening of the accessory. It is better to In spite of the fact that the result of the special symbol winning judgment processing is the winning of the opening of the accessory and the opening of the V attacker 2152, the V winning opening 2
When the passage of the game ball to 155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not executed, the main CPU 2201 determines, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination processing is "time saving hit", "time saving hit".
It is preferable to determine the execution presence or absence of time saving control and the number of time saving times based on. However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time-saving win-lose determination random number obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU provides the start information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number to be used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, to execute the time-saving win-lose determination process in any game state,
The conditions for executing the time-saving win-lose determination process, such as executing the time-saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, are determined in advance, and the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the predetermined conditions are met. good too.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, for example, it may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is executed It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable that the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, the random number for time-saving winning/losing determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first
If it is the time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to "100", and if it is the second time saving hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the time saving times to "50".

In addition, the game state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.)
Even if the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and if the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving hit",
Instead of the remaining number of times of saving time, it may be newly set (that is, resetting the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state with the time saving flag turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, the game state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.)
Even if the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and if the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving hit",
You may make it add to the number of times of shortening of working hours remaining. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, the game state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.)
Even if the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and if the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU determines the number of time saving times determined based on the "time saving hit". Either a process of newly setting instead of the number of times or a process of adding the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' to the remaining number of times of time saving is determined in advance, and this predetermined condition is satisfied. You may make it set the number of times of time saving in a mode.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which time saving control with different functions is executed when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on,
If the result of the time saving determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving control of the same function. You may make it change the process which sets the time-saving frequency|count with the case where it is time-saving control of a different function. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process.
Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the winning time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time saving judgment process and the execution of the time saving judgment process, and it is possible to enhance the interest becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed,
The main CPU may start the time saving control based on the "time saving win" based on the closure of the open/close winning opening 2151 .

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

In addition, in the game state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control process ends be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2 is derived by deriving the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is the opening hit.
151 is opened, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CP
U2201 continues the time saving control even after the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high probability time saving game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which time saving control is executed, time saving hit/loss determination processing is executed, and if the result of this time saving hit/loss determination processing is "time saving hit",
The main CPU may rewrite the number of times of saving time, or may not rewrite the number of times of saving time (that is, execute the time saving control until the number of times of saving time in the time saving control being executed is consumed).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the second than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving hit or loss determination process is performed
It is possible to increase the time saving hit probability when the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed, or when the first time saving hit/loss determination process is performed than the time saving hit probability when the second time saving hit/loss determination process is performed. The time-saving winning probability may be increased, or the time-saving winning probability may be set to be the same or substantially the same between when the first time-saving winning/losing determination processing is performed and when the second time-saving winning/losing determination processing is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the winning of the opening of the role and the big winning game control process is not executed based on the opening of the role, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and rewards (for example,
It can be applied to all forms of gaming machines that provide prize balls, prize data, etc.). i.e.
A game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and game media are paid out based on the results of the game. The main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. In addition, the game media owned by the player are electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit (
connected) to manage game media.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM),
An external game medium handling device (not shown) is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface. operation of providing game media) or winning a prize related to the payout of game media (
game media payout operation (that is, the action of causing the player to acquire the necessary game media by paying out the game media on the line), or the game media to be used for the game. What is necessary is just to be able to perform the operation|movement which records electromagnetically. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. In addition, it is also possible to eject cash or a cash equivalent instead of just ejecting the recording medium, or to store the information in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, but the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using game balls, or a sealed game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. can be reduced, the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area.
When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit,
A ball-feeding pestle pushes out a game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, to get the ball,
It means that a player obtains game media for data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, a game machine of the type in which game balls are shot from above the game area does not have the concept of foul balls. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls.
It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. In addition, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the game machine,
Conversion from game value managed by the game media management device to possessed balls (ball lending), count of possessed balls (
return) is accepted. These requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored.
Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. In addition, a launch control circuit is provided separately from the main control circuit,
A frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel,
The main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol,
As described above, the general game state is shifted to the jackpot game state.
The PU newly performs neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol,
Based on the transition from the general game state to the small winning game state (stopping at the combination of symbols showing the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special pattern is interrupted, and the change from the small winning game state to the general game state is performed. Based on the shift (end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning pattern, the general game state shifts to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are met, and the main CPU
Neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol is newly performed. however,
When both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed and one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU controls the other symbol during variable display. With regard to the special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine have been described as examples. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technique described in this specification is applied to a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, an effect accompanied by a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. The "stop" of the symbol includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and any interpretation of the "stop" is acceptable. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be operation of a lever, a handle, a button, or the like, touch, or the like.

In a pachinko game machine, there are cases where the administrator of the gaming machine sets effects, etc. by operating the effect buttons, but there are cases in which the player starts the game after setting the effect buttons. be. In this case, it is conceivable that an operation by the manager may result in an operation for the player to play a game. Similarly, in pachislot, the manager performs a 2-bet game,
It may be assumed that a player performs a 3-bet game while the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established. In this case, the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc., may be operations for the player to play the game.

In the pachinko machine, the game method of the player is managed by notifying whether the game is right-handed or left-handed under the control of the main CPU. The fact that it is unintended may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, the main CPU controls the player's playing method, such as the player's pushing order (assist).
However, if the game method of the player is not intended,
An error or warning that the game is unintended may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be mounted on one board. In pachi-slot, there may be no payout control board, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

In addition, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing containing devices necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the housing, the outer frame and the base door are regarded as the housing, and the entire game machine consisting of the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the plate unit is regarded as the housing. is possible. Between the housing and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit provided with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., or a door, a frame, a housing, etc. Various control boards, display means, decorations, accessories, etc. may be present in the device.

Below, the game board P1100 of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. Components identical or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same names or the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

A game board P1100 shown in FIG. 108 includes a transparent plate unit P1110 and a game area P1120.
, ball launch path P1130, warp path P1140, stage P1150, general winning unit P1160, upper attacker section P1170, lower attacker section P1180, out port P119
0, an upper movable performance accessory P2000, a rotating accessory P3000, and the like.

A transparent plate unit P1110 shown in FIG. 108 is provided so as to be positioned on the front side of the game board P1100. The transparent plate unit P1110 is formed so as to cover the entire front side of the game board P1100, including the front of the opening area 1d opened in the center of the game board P1100. The transparent plate unit P1110 includes a base plate P1111 and a base plate P12 positioned around the opening region 1d.
10 (see FIG. 113, etc.), a light guide plate P1112 (transparent panel) of the light guide plate unit, and the like. The light guide plate P1112 is arranged in front of the opening region 1d, and can perform light emitting effect by light emitted from a plurality of LEDs.

A game area P1120 shown in FIGS. 108, 111, 113, etc. is an area in which a game ball can roll. The game area P1120 is formed in front of the transparent plate unit P1110. The game area P1120 is formed so as to surround the opening area 1d.

The ball shooting path P1130 shown in FIG. 108 is a path that guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 shown in FIG. 1 etc. to the game area P1120. The ball launch passage P1130 is the outer rail P
1131 and an inner rail P1132. A ball launch path P1130 is formed to the left of the game area P1120.

A warp path P1140 shown in FIG. 108 is a path that guides game balls to a stage P1150, which will be described later. The warp passage P1140 is formed in the shape of a tunnel in which game balls can roll. A warp passage P1140 is formed along the lower left edge of the opening region 1d. The upper end of the warp passage P1140 is opened to face the game area P1120. A lower end of the warp path P1140 is opened to face a stage P1150, which will be described later.

Stage P1150 shown in FIG. 108 distributes the fluidized area of the game ball in the game area P1120. A stage P1150 is formed at the lower edge of the opening region 1d.
Stage P1150 has an upper surface on which a game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Stage P115
The left and right center, left and right portions of the upper surface of 0 are recessed downward and slanted forward. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage P1150 falls downward (lower game area P1120) from one of the left and right center, left and right parts.

A general winning hole unit P1160 shown in FIG. 108 has a later-described general winning hole P1161a in which game balls can win. General winning mouth unit P1160, game area P1
120 (lower left of the opening region 1d). General winning entrance unit P1160
will be described in detail later.

The upper attacker portion P1170 shown in FIG. 108 is a portion having a first big winning hole P1176, which will be described later, and the like, in which game balls can win. The upper attacker part P1170 is located in the upper right part of the game area P1120 (upper right part of the opening area 1d). In the upper attacker part P1170, the game area P1
A game ball passage (passage P1172), which will be described later, is formed by a plurality of walls standing forward from 120 and a plurality of walls standing rearward from a cover P1171, which will be described later. The details of the upper attacker portion P1170 will be described later.

The lower attacker part P1180 shown in FIG. 108 includes a second big winning port P1300, which can win a game ball, which will be described later, a first starting port P1350, an upper second starting port P1250, and a lower second starting port P136.
It is the part that has 0 and so on. The lower attacker part P1180 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area P1120 (the lower right part of the opening area 1d). The lower attacker portion P1180 includes a cover P1, which will be described later.
A plurality of wall portions erected rearward from 220 form a flow path for a game ball (flow path P123, which will be described later).
0) is formed. The details of the lower attacker portion P1180 will be described later.

The out port P1190 shown in FIG. 108 is a portion into which gaming balls that have not won a prize (entered a ball) in any winning port or starting port finally flow. The out port P1190 is the game area P112
0 is formed at the lower end portion of the left and right central portion.

The upper movable effect accessory P2000 shown in FIG. 108 is a vertically movable accessory. The upper movable effect accessory P2000 is arranged behind (behind) the rotating accessory P3000, which will be described later. The operation of the upper movable effect accessory P2000 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the accessory control circuit 307) shown in FIG. 6, for example. Details of the upper movable effect accessory P2000 will be described later.

The rotating accessory P3000 shown in FIG. 108 is a rotating accessory. Rotating Accessory P300
0 is arranged above the opening region 1d in a front view. Also, the rotating accessory P3000 is arranged in front of the upper movable effect accessory P2000. The operation of the rotating accessory P3000 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 shown in FIG. 6, for example. Details of the rotating accessory P3000 will be described later.

The details of the general winning slot unit P1160 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG.

The general prize winning unit P1160 includes a main body P1161, a reflector P1162, a left light emitting board P1163 and a right light emitting board P1164.

The main body portion P1161 is formed in a generally sectoral shape when viewed from the front. The body portion P1161 is made of a translucent (light-transmissive) material. A sticker (not shown) for decorating the main body P1161 is attached to the front surface of the main body P1161. The body portion P1161 has a general winning opening P1161a.

The general winning hole P1161a is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls without performing a lottery when a game ball enters. The general prize winning opening P1161a is formed by recessing the left and right center portions of the upper surface of the main body portion P1161.

The reflector P1162 is for guiding forward the light from the light emitting portions P1163a and P1164a, which will be described later. The reflector P1162 is arranged behind the main body P1161. The reflector P1162 is made of a material that does not transmit light (does not transmit light). The reflector P1162 is provided so as to pass through the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. The reflector P1162 includes a left light guide portion P1162a and a right light guide portion P11.
62b.

The left light guide portion P1162a and the right light guide portion P1162b are formed in a substantially tubular shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The left light guide portion P1162a is similar to the general winning opening P1 in a front cross-sectional view.
161a to the left. The right light guide portion P1162b is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening P1161a in a front sectional view.

A left light emitting board P1163 and a right light emitting board P1164 are for emitting light behind the reflector P1162. Left light emitting board P1163 and right light emitting board P1
164 are provided with light emitting portions P1163a and P1164a, respectively.

The light emitting part P1163a is mounted on the left light emitting base P so as to irradiate light forward (toward the main body part P1161).
1163 attached. The light emitting part P1163a is arranged behind the left light guide part P1162a of the reflector P1162. The light emitting portion P1163a is arranged inside the left light guide portion P1162a in a front sectional view. The light emitting part P1163a is configured by, for example, an LED.

The light emitting part P1164a is attached to the right light emitting base P so as to irradiate light forward (toward the main body part P1161).
1164 attached. The light emitting part P1164a is arranged behind the right light guide part P1162b of the reflector P1162. The light emitting portion P1164a is arranged inside the right light guide portion P1162b in a front sectional view. The light emitting part P1164a is configured by, for example, an LED.

The general winning hole unit P1160 configured in this way emits light from the light emitting unit P at a predetermined timing.
Light is emitted forward from 1163a and P1164a. The light is reflected by reflector P11
After passing through the left light guide portion P1162a and the right light guide portion P1162b of 62, the main body portion P11
61. The light travels forward in the body portion P1161 and is emitted outside the body portion P1161. As a result, the main body P1161 can be caused to emit light by the light.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting portion P11 is
The light emitted from 63a and P1164a is guided into the main body P1161.
According to this, the light emitted from the light emitting portions P1163a and P1164a is emitted from the main body portion P116.
1 can be suppressed from diffusing before being guided into the inside. In this way, the left and right light emitting portions P1163a and P1164a can easily cause the main body portion P1161 to emit light as intended.

Details of the upper attacker portion P1170 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 and 111. FIG.

The upper attacker portion P1170 shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 includes a cover P1171, a flow path P1
172, a detour entrance P1173, a detour exit P1174, a detour P1175, a first prize winning opening P1176, a shutter P1177, and the like.

A cover P1171 shown in FIG. 108 is a substantially plate-shaped member positioned in front of the upper attacker portion P1170. The cover P1171 has a plurality of walls erected rearward. cover P1
171 forms a flow path P1172, which will be described later, with a plurality of wall portions erected forward from the game area P1120 (base plate P1111).

A flow path P1172 shown in FIG. 111 is a flow path for game balls in the upper attacker portion P1170. The flow path P1172 is included in the game area P1120. The flow path P1172 is formed so as to guide the game ball through a predetermined path from the flow path entrance P1172a formed at the upper end of the upper attacker part P1170 to the flow path exit P1172b formed at the lower end. be.

A detour entrance P1173 shown in FIG. 111 is a hole serving as an entrance of a game ball to a detour P1175 described later. The detour entrance P1173 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1111 in the front-rear direction. The detour inlet P1173 is formed directly below the channel inlet P1172a. A wall is formed around the detour entrance P1173 except for the upper side.

A detour exit P1174 shown in FIG. 111 is a hole that serves as an exit for a game ball from a detour P1175, which will be described later. The detour outlet P1174 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1111 in the front-rear direction. The detour exit P1174 is formed below and to the left of the detour entrance P1173.
Below the detour exit P1174, a plate-like wall portion is formed with the plate surface facing in a generally vertical direction.

The detour P1175 shown in FIG. 111 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The detour P1175 is formed by a predetermined member or the like fixed to the back side of the base plate P1111. The detour P1175 is formed in a tunnel shape through which game balls flow on the back side of the game area P1120. The detour P1175 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a posture of upper right, lower left. The right end of the detour P1175 is connected to the detour entrance P1173. The left end of the detour P1175 is connected to the detour exit P1174.

The first big winning hole P1176 shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball wins (enters a prize). The first big prize winning opening P1176 is formed in a substantially box-like shape when viewed from the front, with an upper side opened by a plurality of walls or the like. The upper end of the first big prize winning opening P1176 is relatively large in the left-right direction.

Also, the first big prize winning opening P1176 is formed directly below the detour exit P1174. Specifically, the upper left end of the first big winning opening P1176 is positioned to the left of the detour exit P1174. The upper right end of the first big prize opening P1176 is located to the right of the detour exit P1174. In the vertical direction middle part of the first big winning opening P1176, the first big winning opening count switch P1
176a is placed. At the lower end of the first big winning port P1176 (below the first big winning port count switch P1176a), there is a recovery port P that penetrates the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction.
1178 is formed.

The shutter P1177 shown in FIG. 111 opens and closes the first big prize opening P1176. The shutter P1177 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed vertically. Shutter P11
77 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed generally in the left-right direction so as to block the opening at the upper end of the first big prize winning opening P1176. The shutter P1177 is configured to be switchable between a state protruded forward from the game area P1120 and a state retracted backward from the game area P1120 by a solenoid (not shown). The shutter P1177 protrudes forward in the first
The big winning opening P1176 is closed. In addition, the shutter P1177 is retracted to the rear to open the first prize winning opening P1176.

Details of the lower attacker section P1180 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 and 112 to 122. FIG.

The lower attacker portion P1180 shown in FIGS. 108 and 112 includes a base plate P1210 and a cover P1.
220, flow path P1230, passage gate P1240, upper second starting port P1250, opening/closing unit P1260 (blade member P1261), upper detour entrance P1270, upper detour exit P128
0, upper detour P1290, second big prize opening P1300, lower attacker unit P1310 (shutter P1311), lower detour entrance P1320, lower detour exit P1330, lower detour P1
340, a first starting port P1350, a lower second starting port P1360, and the like.

The base plate P1210 shown in FIGS. 112 to 117 is a plate-like member that serves as the base of the lower attacker portion P1180. The base plate P1210 is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. Base plate P1
210 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. The base plate P1210 is a transparent plate unit P111.
0 to the lower right. A first starting port P1350, which will be described later, is formed in the base plate P1210. Further, the base plate P1210 is formed with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Members such as a blade member P1261, a shutter P1311, and a passage gate switch P1241, which will be described later, are provided in some of the plurality of holes. In addition, (other) part of the plurality of holes configures an upper detour entrance P1270 and the like, which will be described later.

The cover P1220 shown in FIGS. 108 and 112 is a substantially plate-shaped member positioned in front of the lower attacker portion P1180. The cover P1220 is formed in a shape corresponding to the base plate P1210. As shown in FIG. 118, the cover P1220 has a plurality of walls erected rearward. The cover P1220 forms a flow path P1230, which will be described later, with the plurality of wall portions and the like.

A flow path P1230 shown in FIG. 113 is a flow path for game balls in the lower attacker portion P1180. The flow path P1230 is included in the game area P1120. The flow path P1230 is formed so as to be able to guide a game ball so as to pass through a predetermined path from a flow path inlet P1231 formed at the upper end of the lower attacker portion P1180 toward generally downward left.

Further, the flow path P1230 is largely divided into two regions by the wall portion (wall portion P1232) of the cover P1220. The wall portion P1232 is formed to vertically extend over the lower attacker portion P1180 on the left side of the center portion in the left-right direction. That is, the flow path P1230 is
It is partitioned into a right side area and a left side area with the wall P1232 interposed therebetween in a front view. Flow path P12
A game ball is configured to be movable from the area on the right side of 30 to the area on the left side through a lower detour P1340, which will be described later.

The passage gate P1240 shown in FIGS. 113, 118 and 119 is for giving the opportunity of the normal symbol lottery on condition that the game ball passes through. The pass gate P1240 is
The walls of the cover P1220 and the like form a path through which game balls can pass. As shown in FIG. 113, the passage gate P1240 is formed immediately below the channel inlet P1231. Immediately below the passgate P1240 is a passgate switch P1241.

The upper second starting port P1250 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118 and 119 is for giving a chance of a winning lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (enters a ball). The upper second starting port P1250 is formed in a substantially box-like shape in a front view with an upper side opened by a plurality of walls and the like.
An upper end portion of the upper second starting port P1250 is opened relatively wide in the left-right direction.

Also, the upper second starting port P1250 is formed below the passage gate P1240. upper second
An upper second starting port count switch P1251 is arranged in the middle of the starting port P1250 in the vertical direction. Lower end of upper second starting port P1250 (upper second starting port count switch P1251)
), a recovery port P1252 that penetrates the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction is formed.

The opening/closing unit P1260 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 has a blade member P1261 and is configured to be capable of opening and closing the blade member P1261 by a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing unit P1260 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210.

The blade member P1261 shown in FIGS. 113, 116, 118 and 119 opens and closes the upper second starting port P1250. The blade member P1261 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed vertically. More specifically, the blade member P1261 is formed in an inclined shape that descends from right to left. The blade member P1261 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed generally in the left-right direction so as to block the opening at the upper end of the upper second starting port P1250. The blade member P1261 is configured to be switchable between a state of protruding forward from the game area P1120 and a state of retreating backward from the game area P1120 by a solenoid provided in the opening/closing unit P1260. The blade member P1261 protrudes forward, and the upper second starting port P125
Let 0 be the closed state. In addition, the blade member P1261 is retracted rearward to open the upper second start port P1250.

An upper detour entrance P1270 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 corresponds to an upper detour P1290 described later.
It is a hole that serves as an entrance for game balls to. The upper detour entrance P1270 is the transparent plate unit P111.
0 base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the upper bypass inlet P1270 is formed just above the right portion of the vane member P1261.

The upper detour exit P1280 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 corresponds to the upper detour P1290 described later.
It is a hole that serves as an exit for a game ball from. The upper detour exit P1280 is the transparent plate unit P11.
10 baseplate P1210 is formed so that it may penetrate in the front-back direction. As shown in FIG. 113,
An upper bypass outlet P1280 is formed just above the left portion of vane member P1261.

The upper detour entrance P1270 and the upper detour exit P1280 are formed as one hole in the base plate P1210. Then, as shown in FIG. 113, the wall portion of the cover P1220 or the like divides the right side and the left side in a front view, and the portion divided on the right side is formed as an upper detour entrance P1270. In addition, the part partitioned on the left side is the upper detour exit P1
280.

The upper detour P1290 shown in FIGS. 113 and 117 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The upper detour P1290 is formed by a predetermined member fixed to the back side of the base plate P1210. The upper detour P1290 is formed in a tunnel shape through which game balls flow on the back side of the game area P1120. The upper detour P1290 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a posture of upper right and lower left. The right end of the upper detour P1290 is connected to the upper detour entrance P1270. The left end of the upper detour P1290 is connected to the upper detour exit P1280.

The second big winning hole P1300 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118 and 119 is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball wins (enters a prize). 2nd Grand Prize Opening P
1300 is formed in a substantially box-like shape in a front view with an upper side opened by a plurality of walls and the like. The upper end of the second big prize opening P1300 is relatively large in the left-right direction.

Also, the second big winning opening P1300 is formed to the lower left of the upper second starting opening P1250. The second big winning opening P1300 is formed at a position separated from the upper second starting opening P1250. A second big winning hole count switch P1301 is arranged in the vertical middle part of the second big winning hole P1300. The lower end of the second big winning port P1300 (the second big winning port count switch P1301)
), a recovery port P1302 that penetrates the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction is formed.

The lower attacker unit P1310 shown in FIG. 117 has a shutter P1311, and is configured to be able to open and close the shutter P1311 by a solenoid (not shown). The lower attacker unit P1310 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210.

A shutter P1311 shown in FIGS. 113, 116, 118 and 119 opens and closes the second prize winning opening P1300. The shutter P1311 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed vertically. The shutter P1311 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed generally in the left-right direction so as to block the opening at the upper end of the second big prize winning opening P1300. The shutter P1311 is configured to be switchable between a state of projecting forward from the game area P1120 and a state of retreating backward from the game area P1120 by a solenoid provided in the lower attacker unit P1310. The shutter P1311 protrudes forward, and the second big prize opening P1300
is closed. In addition, the shutter P1311 is retracted to the rear, and the second big prize opening P
1300 is opened.

A lower detour entrance P1320 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 corresponds to a lower detour P1340 described later.
It is a hole that serves as an entrance for game balls to. The lower detour entrance P1320 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. A lower detour entrance P1320 is formed below and to the left of the shutter P1311.

A wall portion P1232 is formed to the left of the lower detour entrance P1320. i.e.
As described above, the passage gate P1240, the upper second starting port P1250, the opening/closing unit P1260 (
Blade member P1261), upper detour inlet P1270, upper detour outlet P1280, upper detour P
1290, 2nd Grand Prize Opening P1300, Lower Attacker Unit P1310 (Shutter P131
1) and the lower detour inlet P1320 are formed in the area on the right side of the flow path P1230 partitioned by the wall P1232.

The lower detour exit P1330 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is the lower detour P1340 described later.
It is a hole that serves as an exit for a game ball from. The lower detour outlet P1330 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. A lower detour exit P1330 is formed at the lower left portion of the base plate P1210. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed such that its vertical position is lower than the lower detour entrance P1320.

The lower detour P1340 shown in FIG. 113 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The lower detour P1340 is formed by a predetermined member fixed to the back side of the base plate P1210. The details of the rear guide portion P1341 will be described later.

The first starting port P1350 shown in FIGS. 108 and 113 to 117 is for giving a chance of a winning lottery on the condition that a game ball wins (enters a ball). First start port P1350
is formed at the left lower part of the base plate P1210 and above the lower detour exit P1330. The first starting port P1350 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. The rear side of the first starting port P1350 is connected to a notch formed in the base plate P1210. At the first start port P1350,
A first starting port count switch (not shown) is provided.

The lower second starting port P1360 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118 and 119 is for giving an opportunity for a winning lottery on the condition that a game ball wins (enters a ball). The lower second starting port P1360 is formed immediately below the lower detour exit P1330. Lower second start port P1
360 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. The rear side of the lower second starting port P1360 is connected to a hole formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. Lower second start port P1
360 is provided with a lower second starting port count switch (not shown).

Thus, the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350 and the lower second starting port P136
0 is formed in the area on the left side of the flow path P1230 partitioned by the wall P1232. More specifically, the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350 and the lower second starting port P1360
is formed at a position spaced leftward from the wall portion P1232. In addition, lower detour exit P133
0, the first starting port P1350, and the details of the positional relationship of members near the lower second starting port P1360 will be described later.

In addition, the lower detour P1340 is formed on the back side of the game area P1120 so as to straddle the wall P1232 in the left-right direction, that is, so as to extend over the area on the right side and the area on the left side of the flow path P1230. 120 to 122, the rear guide portion P of the lower detour P1340
Details of 1341 will be described.

The rear side guide portion P1341 shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is a member that guides the game ball from the lower detour entrance P1320 to the lower detour exit P1330 in the lower detour P1340. The rear guide portion P1341 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210. The rear guide portion P1341 is
Longitudinally formed. The rear side guide portion P1341 is arranged in a slightly inclined posture with its longitudinal direction directed to the upper right, lower left, and lower in a front view. The rear side guide portion P1341 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open front side. The upper surface of the bottom plate P1343 (lower side surface) of the rear guide portion P1341 is formed so that the game ball can roll. The rear guide portion P1341 includes a first inclined portion P1344 and a second inclined portion P1345.
, a right guide portion P1346 and a left guide portion P1347.

The first inclined portion P1344 is a portion of the bottom plate P1343 whose upper surface is inclined downward to the left. The first inclined portion P1344 is formed so as to extend from the right end to the vicinity of the left end of the bottom plate P1343.

The second inclined portion P1345 is a portion of the bottom plate P1343 in which the upper surface is inclined forward and downward. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed at the left end of the bottom plate P1343. Second inclined portion P13
45 is formed to the left of the first inclined portion P1344 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion P1344 in the left-right direction. A step is provided in the vertical direction at the connecting portion between the second inclined portion P1345 and the first inclined portion P1344. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed to have the lowest height on the upper surface of the bottom plate P1343 compared to other portions. The front end portion of the second inclined portion P1345 is formed to protrude further forward than the front end portion of the first inclined portion P1344.

The right side guide portion P1346 is a portion for guiding the game ball downward to the left in the rear side guide portion P1341. The right guide portion P1346 is formed in a substantially right-angled triangular shape in a plan view with the oblique side facing forward left. The right guide portion P1346 is the first inclined portion P134.
4 at the right rear end.

The left side guide portion P1347 is a portion for guiding the game ball forward in the rear side guide portion P1341. The left guide portion P1347 is formed in a substantially right-angled triangular shape in a plan view with the oblique side facing forward right. The left guide portion P1347 is the second inclined portion P1345.
is formed at the left end of the

Thus, the lower detour P1340 is formed on the back side of the game area P1120 so as to straddle the wall P1232 in the left-right direction, that is, across the right area and the left area of the flow path P1230.

123, details of the positional relationship of members near the first start port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second start port P1360 will be described below. In the following, for convenience, the first start port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second start port P1360 are referred to as "
It is sometimes called "three mouths".

As shown in FIG. 123, the three openings are arranged so as to be continuous in the vertical direction without any gap. Specifically, in the three ports, the first starting port P1350, the lower detour outlet P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 are arranged in order from the upper side to the lower side. Above the three mouths,
A stage P1150, more specifically, a left-right central portion (hereinafter referred to as a “stage central portion P1151”) recessed downward of the stage P1150 is arranged.

Also, the three openings are arranged at positions spaced leftward from the wall portion P1232 of the lower attacker portion P1180. Specifically, the three openings are arranged to the left from the wall P1232 with a width that is at least equal to or greater than the outer diameter of the game ball. Between the three mouths and the wall P1232, the game area P
1120 is formed. In addition, the game area P1120 between the three mouths and the wall P1232
A lower detour P1340 (rear side guide portion P1341) is arranged on the rear side of the . Further, above between the three mouths and the lower attacker part P1180, the stage P1150, more specifically, the right part of the stage P1150 that is recessed downward (hereinafter referred to as the "stage right part P1152") is arranged. be done.

Also, the three openings are arranged at positions spaced rightward from the general winning opening unit P1160. Specifically, the three openings are arranged to the right from the general winning opening unit P1160 with a width of at least the outer diameter of the game ball or more. A game area P1120 is formed between the three mouths and the general winning mouth unit P1160. Also, above between the three mouths and the lower attacker part P1180, the stage P1150, more specifically, the left part of the stage P1150 that is recessed downward (hereinafter referred to as "stage left part P1153") is arranged. be done.

124 to 128, the main flow of game balls in a game will be described below. 124 to 128, thick black line (solid and dotted lines) arrows indicate an example of the flow of game balls. 124 indicates the warp path P
An example of the flow of game balls at 1140 is shown. Further, the thick black dotted line arrows shown in FIGS. 125 to 128 show an example of the flow of game balls in various detours (the flow of game balls behind the game area P1120).

As shown in FIG. 124, the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 shown in FIG. 1 etc. is guided to the game area P1120 by the ball shooting path P1130. Then, according to the momentum of the game ball hit, it flows in the area on the left side of the opening area 1d or the area on the right side of the opening area 1d. Although illustration is omitted for the sake of convenience, a large number of game nails are provided in the game area P1120. In this way, the game ball guided to the game area P1120 falls through the game area P1120 while repeatedly colliding with the game nail and rebounding in various directions.

When the game ball falls in the game area P1120 on the left side of the opening area 1d (when so-called left-handed hitting is performed), some game balls enter the warp passage P1140, and the warp passage P1140 causes the stage P1150. be guided to As will be described later, the game ball guided to the stage P1150 falls downward (lower game area P1120) from one of the left, right, left, and right portions of the stage P1150.

Also, when the game ball falls in the game area P1120 on the right side of the opening area 1d (when a so-called right hit is performed), the game ball is first guided to the upper attacker portion P1170.

As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball guided to the upper attacker portion P1170 passes through the passage entrance P1.
It flows into the inside of the upper attacker portion P1170 from 172a. Then, the game ball is guided from the detour entrance P1173 to the detour P1175, and rolls on the detour P1175 (that is, the back side of the game area P1120). Next, the game ball that has rolled on the detour P1175 is returned to the game area P1120 again from the detour exit P1174, and rolls on the shutter P1177.
At this time, if the shutter P1177 is in an open state, the game ball wins the first big winning hole P1176. In addition, the game ball that rolls on the shutter P1177 falls downward, and the flow path outlet P1
172b to the outside of the upper attacker portion P1170. And the upper attacker part P11
The game ball ejected to the outside of 70 is guided to the lower attacker portion P1180.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the game ball guided to the lower attacker portion P1180 is
It flows into the inside of the lower attacker portion P1180 from the flow path inlet P1231. And the game ball
It falls inside the lower attacker part P1180, and is distributed in two directions at the upper second starting port P1250 (see thick black arrows R1a and R1b). Then, the game ball distributed in the left direction indicated by the thick black arrow R1a rolls on the blade member P1261 and is guided from the upper detour entrance P1270 to the upper detour P1290 on the way, and the upper detour P1290 (that is, ,
It rolls on the back side of the game area P1120). Then, the game ball that rolls on the upper detour P1290 is returned to the game area P1120 again from the upper detour exit P1280, and the blade member P1261
to roll. At this time, if the blade member P1261 is in an open state, the game ball enters the upper second start opening P1250.

Then, the game ball that rolls on the blade member P1261 falls, and the second big winning hole P13
00 are distributed in two directions (see thick black arrows R2a and R2b). Then, the game ball distributed in the leftward direction indicated by the thick black arrow R2a rolls on the shutter P1311. At this time, if the shutter P1311 is in an open state, the game ball wins the second big winning hole P1300. Then, the game ball that rolls on the shutter P1311 is guided from the lower detour entrance P1320 to the lower detour P1340 (back direction of the game board P1100), and is guided to the lower detour P134.
0 of the rear side guide portion P1341 (that is, the back side of the game area P1120). Then, the game ball that rolls the lower detour P1340 is again the game area P from the lower detour exit P1330
It is returned to the 1120 side (the front direction of the game board P1100).

As described above, the lower second starting port P1360 is arranged immediately below the lower detour exit P1330. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128, when the game ball is returned to the game area P1120 side again from the lower detour exit P1330, the game ball easily moves to the lower second start port P1360 as indicated by the thick black arrow R3. The ball will be entered in .

In addition, in the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second start opening P1360, the game area P1 on the right side
120 (that is, from the lower attacker section P1180 to the lower detour P134
0), but also game balls that have flowed from the left game area P1120 fall. For example, a game ball that rolls on stage P1150 falls.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128, the game ball dropped from the stage left part P1153 of the stage P1150 is, as indicated by the thick black arrow R4, the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second It falls to the left of the starting port P1360. Also, stage P115
The game ball that fell from the stage right part P1152 of 0, as indicated by the thick black arrow R5, is the right side of the first start port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second start port P1360 (that is, the three ports and area between the wall P1232).

Also, the game ball that has fallen from the stage central portion P1151 of the stage P1150 falls to the first starting port P1350 arranged directly below, as indicated by the bold black arrow R6. Then, if the dropped game ball can slip through between the game nails (not shown), it wins the first start port P1350.

Also, even if the game ball has fallen from the central part P1151 of the stage, if it collides with, for example, a game nail (not shown), it will be repelled leftward as indicated by the thick black arrow R6b, and
Tsunoguchi (first starting port P1350, lower detour exit P1330 and lower second starting port P1360)
and the general winning opening unit P1160.

Also, even if the game ball has fallen from the central part P1151 of the stage, when it collides with a game nail (not shown), it is repelled to the right as indicated by the thick black arrow R6a, for example, and the three openings (first
starting port P1350, lower detour exit P1330 and lower second starting port P1360) and wall P12
32 in the game area P1120.

Thus, in the game area P1120 between the three mouths and the wall P1232,
Although the game ball flows from the right to the left in the case of hitting to the right, the game ball rolls on the lower detour P1340 on the back side of the game area P1120, so it falls from above. Collisions with incoming game balls (see thick black arrows R5 and R6a) can be prevented. That is, since the areas where the game ball rolls in two directions (right direction and downward direction) can be overlapped when viewed from the front, it is possible to save space in the rolling area of the game ball. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging game parts, such as forming a winning opening.
In addition, since the game area P1220 can be secured on the left and right of the lower detour exit P1330, instead of uniformly guiding the game balls discharged from the lower detour exit P1330 to the lower second start opening P1360, the lower second start It is also possible to generate a losing ball that does not win a prize in the opening P1360, thereby enhancing the game playability.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine has been disclosed that includes a large winning opening unit having a guide path for guiding game balls launched on the right side of a game board to a large winning opening. For example, as described in JP-A-2017-35176.

However, since it is necessary to secure a wide prize winning area, the large prize winning opening is often formed relatively large, and even if an attempt is made to form another prize winning opening in the vicinity of the large prize winning opening, it is difficult to secure the arrangement space. there was a point

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily secure a space for arranging a prize winning opening.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment
A game machine having a game board P1100 having a game area P1120 on the front side on which game balls can roll,
The game board P1100 is
A first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) provided in the game area P1120;
A first ball passage provided on the front side of the game board in which game balls can roll (for example, the flow path P1172 of the upper attacker section P1170 and the flow path P1230 of the lower attacker section P1180);
An inflow port (lower detour entrance P1320) that is provided downstream of the first ball passage and guides game balls toward the back of the game board P1100;
A second ball passage (lower detour P1340) in which the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port (lower detour entrance P1320) can roll;
It is provided on the downstream side of the second ball passage (lower detour P1340), and the game board P
1100 an exit (lower detour exit P1330) that guides in the front direction,
A second winning opening (lower second start opening P1360) provided below the discharge opening (lower detour exit P1330) provided in the game area P1120,
The second winning opening (lower second starting opening P1360) is the same as the first winning opening (first starting opening P1
350) is provided below,
On the left and right sides of the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350), a game area P1120 is formed in which the game balls that have not flowed into the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) can roll downward. has been
At least one of the game areas P1120 formed on the left and right sides of the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) is located on the front side of the game board of the second ball passage (lower detour P1340). characterized by being formed in

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the winning openings.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the "first winning opening" is the first starting opening P1350, and the "
Although the second winning opening is defined as the lower second starting opening P1360, it is not limited to this.

Also, the configuration of the rear guide portion P1341 is not limited to that according to the present embodiment. For example, the rear guide portion P1341 may have various configurations, such as having a shape that curves or bends when viewed from the front.

Below, the upper movable production accessory P2000 and the upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 148. FIG.

[Upper movable production accessory P2000]
The upper movable production accessory P2000 performs production by moving. in particular,
The upper movable production accessory P2000 includes a first production section P2110 and a second production section P212, which will be described later.
0 is used for the production. Although details will be described later, the upper movable production accessory P2000 performs production by rotating around an axis extending in the left-right direction.
The description will be made on the basis of the state in which the surface (first effect surface) of the player faces forward.

The upper movable effect accessory P2000 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Upper movable production accessories P200
0 is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The upper movable production accessory P2000 mainly includes a first production part P2110, a second production part P2120, a lifting part P2140, and a driving mechanism P220.
0.

[First production department P2110]
The first effect part P2110 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, 135, etc. is appropriately decorated and performs effects by being moved. Specifically, the first production department P
2110 is decorated to imitate human eyes and eyebrows on both left and right sides. First production department P211
0 is provided on the front surface of the upper movable production accessory P2000. The first effect part P2110 mainly includes the eyebrow movable body P2111, the movable body support arm P2112, the pupil decoration body P2113, the accessory illumination board P2114, the rear cover P2115, the outer lens P2116, and the diffusion sheet P21.
17, a light guiding lens P2118 and an inner lens P2119.

An eyebrow movable body P2111 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 and 135 is a portion that is movable when effecting. The eyebrow movable body P2111 is formed in a shape that imitates human eyebrows. A pair of left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 are provided at the front part of the first effect part P2110. Left eyebrow movable body P
2111 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the right. The eyebrow movable body P2111 on the right side is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the left. The left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 are provided so as to be bilaterally symmetrical with each other. An eyebrow shaft portion P2111a is provided at the rear portion of the eyebrow movable body P2111 (see FIG. 131). The eyebrow shaft portion P2111a is provided so as to extend rearward from the eyebrow movable body P2111 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction.

The movable body support arm P2112 shown in FIG. 131 supports the eyebrow movable body P2111. The movable body support arm P2112 is formed in an arm shape. Movable body support arm P21
12 are provided in a left and right pair behind the eyebrow movable body P2111. Left movable body support arm P2
112 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the right. Right movable body support arm P21
12 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is downward to the left. Left and right movable body support arms P211
2 are provided so as to be symmetrical to each other. In the following, the left movable body support arm P21
12 will be described, and description of the right movable body support arm P2112 will be omitted.

An insertion hole (not shown) is formed in the front surface of the movable body support arm P2112. The insertion hole is provided near the left end of the movable body support arm P2112. The eyebrow shaft portion P2111a of the eyebrow movable body P2111 is inserted through the insertion hole.

An arm shaft portion P2112a is formed on the rear surface of the movable body support arm P2112. The arm shaft portion P2112a is provided near the right end portion of the movable body support arm P2112. The arm shaft portion P2112a is oriented in the front-rear direction, and the movable body support arm P2112
provided to extend rearward from the rear surface of the The arm shaft portion P2112a is supported by a drive mechanism P2200, which will be described later.

In this way, the movable body support arm P2112 moves the eyebrow movable body P2111 to the eyebrow shaft portion P21.
It is supported so as to be rotatable around 11a.

The pupil decoration body P2113 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 and 135 is the first effect part P211
It is the part that constitutes the front of 0. The pupil decoration body P2113 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.
The pupil decoration body P2113 is provided behind the eyebrow movable body P2111 with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. A through-pupil hole P2113a is formed in the pupil ornament P2113 (see FIG. 131).
. The pupil through hole P2113a is formed in a shape that imitates a human pupil when viewed from the front. A pair of left and right pupil through holes P2113a are formed, and the left and right pupil through holes P2113a are formed so as to be bilaterally symmetrical with each other. The surface (front surface) of the pupil ornament P2113 constitutes the "first rendering surface" according to the present invention.

The accessory electrical decoration board P2114 shown in FIG. 131 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Accessory illumination board P
2114 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the accessory electrical decoration board P2114 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory electrical decoration board P2114. By causing the LED to emit light, the accessory illumination board P21
Light can be emitted forward of 14 .

The rear cover P2115 shown in FIG. 131 is a part that constitutes the rear part of the first effect part P2110. The rear cover P2115 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Rear cover P2115
is provided behind the decorative accessory board P2114 with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction, and supports the decorative accessory board P2114.

Outer lens P2116
, a diffusion sheet P2117, a light guiding lens P2118 and an inner lens P2119 are provided in order from the front (see FIG. 131). These outer lenses P2116 and the like are the pupil ornaments P
A pair of left and right lenses are provided at positions corresponding to the pupil through holes P2113a of 2113 . By providing these outer lenses P2116 and the like, it is possible to illuminate the entire portion where the pupil through hole P2113a is formed by irradiating light from the LED of the accessory electrical board P2114.

[Second production department P2120]
The second effect part P2120 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 is appropriately decorated and performs effects by being moved. Specifically, the second effect part P2120 is decorated to imitate the eyes and eyebrows on the left and right sides of a person. The second effect part P2120 is provided on the lower surface of the upper movable effect accessory P2000. The second effect part P2120 mainly includes the eyebrow decoration body P
2121, accessory electrical decoration board P2122, light guide lens P2123, upper cover P2124, and pupil movable body unit P2130.

The eyebrow decoration body P2121 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 is a part that constitutes the lower surface of the second effect part P2120. The eyebrow ornament P2121 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. Eyebrow ornament P2
121 is provided below the second effect portion P2120 with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The eyebrow decoration body P2121 is formed in a shape imitating a person's right and left eyebrows in a bottom view. The surface (lower surface) of the eyebrow ornament P2121 constitutes the "second rendering surface" according to the present invention.

The accessory electrical decoration board P2122 shown in FIG. 133 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Accessory illumination board P
2122 is provided with its plate surface facing up and down and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the accessory electrical decoration board P2122 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory electrical decoration board P2122. By causing the LED to emit light, the eyebrow ornament P2121
Light can be directed to the side.

A light guiding lens P2123 is provided between the eyebrow ornament P2121 and the ornamental accessory board P2122 (see FIG. 133). By providing the light guide lens P2123, the eyebrow decoration body P2121 can be illuminated as a whole by irradiating light from the LED of the accessory electrical decoration board P2122.

The upper cover P2124 shown in FIG. 133 is a part that constitutes the upper part of the second effect part P2120. The upper cover P2124 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. Upper cover P2124
is provided above the ornamental accessory board P2122 with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction, and supports the ornamental accessory board P2122.

A pupil movable body unit P2130 shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 is a part that is movable when producing an effect. A pair of left and right pupil movable body units P2130 are provided above the upper cover P2124. The pupil movable body unit P2130 includes a pupil movable body P2131, an illumination board P2132, and a light guiding lens P2133. The left and right pupil movable body units P2130 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other. Therefore, the left pupil movable body unit P2130 will be described below, and the description of the right pupil movable body unit P2130 will be omitted.

A pupil movable body P2131 shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 is formed in a shape that imitates a part (half part) of a human left and right pupil when viewed from the bottom. The pupil movable body P2131 is provided on the lowermost side of the pupil movable body unit P2130.

The electrical board P2132 shown in FIG. 134 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Decorative board P2132
is provided above the pupil movable body P2131 with its plate surface facing up and down. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the electrical board P2132 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the electrical board P2132. By causing the LED to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light downward on the electrical board P2132.

A light guide lens P2133 is provided between the pupil movable body P2131 and the illumination substrate P2132 (see FIG. 134). By providing the light guide lens P2133, the decorative substrate P21
By emitting light from the 32 LEDs, the pupil movable body P2131 can be illuminated as a whole.

The pupil movable body P2131, the illumination board P2132, and the light guide lens P2133 are fixed together to form a unit. A left pupil cover P2231, which will be described later, is also fixed to the left pupil movable body unit P2130 (see FIG. 134). A right pupil cover P2232, which will be described later, is also fixed to the right pupil movable body unit P2130 (see FIG. 134).

[lifted part P2140]
The lifted part P2140 shown in FIGS. 130, 132, and 135 is a part that is lifted by an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300, which will be described later. The lifted part P2140 is the first effect part P2
110, the second effect section P2120, and an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300, which will be described later. The lifted part P2140 mainly includes a base member P2141, a left mounting shaft member P2142, a right mounting shaft member P2143, a left mounting guide P2144, and a right mounting guide P.
2145, a left carriage P2146 and a right carriage P2147.

The base member P2141 shown in FIGS. 130, 135, etc. constitutes the left-right central portion of the lifted portion P2140. The base member P2141 extends in the left-right direction behind the first effect portion P2110 and the second effect portion P2120, and both the left and right ends thereof are formed so as to bend forward. The lateral width of the base member P2141 is the first effect portion P2110 and the second effect portion P
It is formed to be substantially the same as 2120 .

The left mounting shaft member P2142 shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is the upper movable production accessory P2000.
The left rotating shaft (insertion member P2213, which will be described later) is attached. The left mounting shaft member P2142 is fixed to the left end of the base member P2141.

The right mounting shaft member P2143 shown in FIGS. 135 and 137 is the upper movable production accessory P2000.
The right rotating shaft (rotating shaft P2143a, which will be described later) is attached. The right attachment shaft member P2143 is fixed to the right end of the base member P2141. A rotation shaft P2143a is provided on the right mounting shaft member P2143. The rotation shaft P2143a is provided so as to extend leftward from the right attachment shaft member P2143 with its axis directed in the left-right direction. The rotation axis P2143a is
It is inserted through a through hole provided at the right end of the base member P2141.

The left attachment guide P2144 shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is attached to the left carriage P21 described later.
46 to the left mounting shaft member P2142. Left mounting guide P2144
is fixed to the left side of the left mounting shaft member P2142. The left mounting guide P2144 has a shaft hole P
2144a and slots P2144b are formed.

A shaft hole P2144a shown in FIG. 136 is formed so as to pass through the vicinity of the upper end portion of the left attachment guide P2144 in the front-rear direction.

The elongated hole P2144b shown in FIG.
It is provided below a. The elongated hole P2144b corresponds to a first pin P214, which will be described later, when viewed from the front.
It is formed in an arc shape centering on 6a.

The right attachment guide P2145 shown in FIGS. 135 and 137 is attached to the right carriage P21 described later.
47 to the right mounting shaft member P2143. Right mounting guide P2145
is fixed to the right side of the right mounting shaft member P2143.

The left carriage P2146 shown in FIGS. 129, 130 and 135 is a part attached to an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 (left guide portion P2310) which will be described later. The left carriage P2146 is fixed to the left mounting guide P2144. The left carriage P2146 is formed to be vertically movable along the left guide portion P2310. The left carriage P2146 is provided with a first pin P2146a and a second pin P2146b.

Both the first pin P2146a and the second pin P2146b are provided to extend forward from the left carriage P2146. The first pin P2146a is provided above the second pin P2146b. The first pin P2146a is inserted through the shaft hole P2144a, and the second pin P214
6b is inserted through slot P2144b (see FIG. 136).

The right carriage P2147 shown in FIGS. 129, 130 and 135 is a part attached to an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 (right guide section P2320) which will be described later. The right carriage P2147 is fixed to the right mounting guide P2145. The right carriage P2147 is formed to be vertically movable along the right guide portion P2320. A pressing member P2147a is provided on the right carriage P2147.

A pressing member P2147a shown in FIG. 135 regulates forward movement of the right attachment guide P2145. The pressing member P2147a is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. More specifically, the pressing member P2147a is composed of a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending leftward from the lower end of the portion. The pressing member P2147a is attached to the right mounting guide P2145.
is provided in front of the

[Driving Mechanism P2200]
The drive mechanism P2200 drives the first effect section P2110 and the second effect section P2120. The drive mechanism P2200 includes a accessory rotation drive section P2210 and an eyebrow rotation drive section P222.
0 and a pupil rotation drive unit P2230.

[Accessory rotation drive part P2210]
The accessory rotation driving part P2210 shown in FIGS.
0 is rotated. The accessory rotation drive part P2210 is mainly made of the left shaft hole member P2.
211, a rotary bush P2212, an insertion member P2213, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215, a rotary drive motor P2216 and a right shaft hole member P2217.

The left shaft hole member P2211 shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 has a plate-like portion P2211a with its plate surface facing in the left-right direction. provided (see FIG. 140). The left shaft hole member P2211
122 and fixed to the eyebrow ornament P2121. Left shaft hole member P2
211 is formed with a shaft hole P2211b and a guide P2211c.

A shaft hole P2211b shown in FIG. 140 is formed to penetrate the plate-like portion P2211a. Further, a guide P2211c is formed on the leftward surface of the plate-like portion P2211a. The guide P2211c is formed to protrude leftward from the plate-like portion P2211a. The guide P2211c is formed in an arc shape concentric with the shaft hole P2211b in a left side view. The guide P2211c is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the left mounting shaft member P2142 above and behind the shaft hole P2211b in a left side view.

A rotary bushing P2212 shown in FIG. 140 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. Rotating bush P2
212 is provided in a shaft hole P2211b so as to be rotatable around the axis with the axis directed in the left-right direction. A protrusion (not shown) is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rotary bushing P2212. The rotary bushing P2212 is provided such that its axis coincides with the axis of the rotary shaft P2143a.

The insertion member P2213 shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 is formed in a substantially columnar shape and is inserted through the inner peripheral surface of the rotary bush P2212 with its axis directed in the left-right direction. A groove portion P2213a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the insertion member P2213. Rotating bush P221 is provided in groove P2213a.
Two said projections (not shown) are engaged. The left end of the insertion member P2213 is fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142.

The transmission gear P2214 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 to 143 is provided on the right side of the insertion member P2213 with its axis directed in the horizontal direction, and is fixed to the insertion member P2213. The transmission gear P2214 is provided such that its axis coincides with the rotation axis P2143a.

A motor gear P2215 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 is a transmission gear P2214.
to transmit the driving force. The motor gear P2215 is provided behind and above the transmission gear P2214 with its axis directed in the left-right direction. The motor gear P2215 is provided so as to mesh with the transmission gear P2214.

The rotary drive motor P2216 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 rotates the motor gear P2215. The rotary drive motor P2216 is provided to the right of the motor gear P2215 with the output shaft P2216a directed leftward. A motor gear P is mounted on the left end of the output shaft P2216a.
2215 is fixed. The rotary drive motor P2216 is supported by a motor bracket (not shown). The motor bracket is placed on the accessory electrical decoration board P2122 and fixed to the eyebrow ornament P2121.

The right shaft hole member P2217 shown in FIG. 138 is provided so as to be positioned to the left of the right mounting shaft member P2143. The right shaft hole member P2217 is placed on the right end of the accessory electrical decoration board P2122 and fixed to the eyebrow ornament P2121. A shaft hole (not shown) is formed in the right shaft hole member P2217, and the rotation shaft P2143a of the right mounting shaft member P2143 is inserted through the shaft hole.

By configuring the accessory rotation drive unit P2210 in this way, the upper movable production accessory P2
000 can be rotated around the rotation axis P2143a. 139 and 1 below
41, a specific description will be given.

First, the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven. When the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven, the motor gear P2215 rotates. Here, the transmission gear P2214 is connected to the insertion member P221.
3 to the left mounting shaft member P2142. Therefore, when the motor gear P2215 meshing with the transmission gear P2214 rotates, the rotary drive motor P2216 and the upper movable effect accessory P2000 (the parts other than the insertion member P2213 and the lifted part P2140)
It rotates around the axis of the rotation shaft P2143a and the rotation bush P2212.

[Eyebrow rotation driving unit P2220]
The eyebrow rotation driving part P2220 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 to 143 is configured to
11 is movable. The eyebrow rotation drive part P2220 is mainly the movable rack P222.
1, idle gear P2222, first bevel gear P2223, second bevel gear P2224,
It comprises a bevel gear shaft P2225, a shaft gear P2226, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215 and a rotary drive motor P2216. In addition, the transmission gear P2214,
The motor gear P2215 and the rotary drive motor P2216 are connected to the accessory rotary drive section P2 as described above.
210, but also belongs to the eyebrow rotation driving section P2220.

The movable rack P2221 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 is a
, the longitudinal direction thereof is oriented in the left-right direction. The movable rack P2221 is supported by the rear cover P2115 (see FIG. 131) so as to be movable in the left-right direction. A long hole P2221a, a guide hole P2221b, a gear P2221c and an engaging portion P2221d are formed in the movable rack P2221.

The elongated hole P2221a shown in FIG. 142 faces the movable rack P22 with its longitudinal
21 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right ends thereof, respectively. Rear cover P211 is inserted into long hole P2221a.
5 projection P2115a is inserted. As a result, the movable rack P2221 is supported by the rear cover P2115 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

A guide hole P2221b shown in FIG. 142 guides the movable body support arm P2112. The guide hole P2221b is formed to extend leftward in a front view, then to the upper left, and further to the left. A pair of left and right guide holes P2221b are formed. Guide hole P2
A movable body support arm P2112 is inserted through 221b.

A gear P2221c shown in FIG. 142 is formed at the upper end of the movable rack P2221 to the left of the guide hole P2221b.

An engaging portion P2221d shown in FIG. 139 is a portion that engages with a movable rack P2234 described later. The engaging portion P2221d is formed to protrude rearward from the left and right intermediate portions of the movable rack P2221.

The idle gear P2222 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 is a gear P2221c.
to transmit the driving force. The idle gear P2222 has its axis oriented in the front-rear direction,
It is provided so as to mesh with the gear P2221c.

The first bevel gear P2223 shown in FIGS. 139, 142 and 143 is the idle gear P
2222 to transmit the driving force. The first bevel gear P2223 is provided above and to the left of the idle gear P2222 with its axis directed in the longitudinal direction. The first bevel gear P2223 is
It is provided so as to mesh with the idle gear P2222.

The second bevel gear P2224 shown in FIGS. 139 and 142 is the first bevel gear P2223.
to transmit the driving force. The second bevel gear P2224 is provided behind the first bevel gear P2223 with its axis directed in the left-right direction. The second bevel gear P2224 is provided so as to mesh with the first bevel gear P2223.

A bevel gear shaft P2225 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 transmits driving force to the second bevel gear P2224. The bevel gear shaft P2225 is provided with its extending direction facing the left-right direction. The right end of the bevel gear shaft P2225 is fixed to the second bevel gear P2224.

The shaft gear P2226 shown in FIGS. 139, 141 and 142 transmits driving force to the bevel gear shaft P2225 (second bevel gear P2224). The shaft gear P2226 is fixed to the left end of the bevel gear shaft P2225 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. Above the transmission gear P2214, the shaft gear P2226 is connected to the transmission gear P
2214 are provided to mate with each other.

Since the transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215 and the rotary drive motor P2216 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

By configuring the eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 in this manner, the eyebrow movable body P2111 can be rotated. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 139, 141 and 142. FIG.

First, when the rotation drive motor P2216 is driven, as described above, the upper movable production accessory P2
000 (the portion other than the insertion member P2213 and the lifted portion P2140) is the rotation shaft P214.
3a and rotating bush P2212. Then, the shaft gear P222
6 moves along the outer circumference of the transmission gear P2214. Since the shaft gear P2226 and the transmission gear P2214 are in mesh with each other, the shaft gear P2226 rotates with respect to the transmission gear P2214 fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142. This also rotates the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the second bevel gear P2224. Then, the first bevel gear P2223 meshing with the second bevel gear P2224 also rotates, and the first bevel gear P2223
The idle gear P2222 that meshes with is also rotated. As the idle gear P2222 rotates, the movable rack P2221 meshing with the idle gear P2222 moves left and right. As a result, the movable body support arm P2112 and the eyebrow movable body P2111 fixed to the movable body support arm P2112 are guided to the guide hole P2221b to form the eyebrow shaft portion P2111a.
rotate around. In this way, the upper movable production accessory P2000 (the lifted part P2140
etc.) rotates, the eyebrow movable body P2111 also rotates.

[Pupil rotation drive unit P2230]
The pupil rotation drive section P2230 shown in FIGS. 134, 139, and 143 moves the pupil movable body unit P2130. The pupil rotation driving part P2230 mainly operates the left pupil cover P
2231, right pupil cover P2232, movable gear P2233, movable rack P2234, movable rack P2221, idle gear P2222, first bevel gear P2223, second bevel gear P2224, bevel gear shaft P2225, shaft gear P2226, transmission gear P22
14, a motor gear P2215 and a rotary drive motor P2216; Incidentally, the transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215 and the rotary drive motor P2216 belong to the accessory rotary drive section P2210 and eyebrow rotary drive section P2220 as described above, and the movable rack P22
21, idle gear P2222, first bevel gear P2223, second bevel gear P2224
, the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the shaft gear P2226 are connected to the eyebrow rotation driving part P222.
0, but also belongs to the pupil rotation driving section P2230.

The left pupil cover P2231 shown in FIGS. 134, 139 and 143 covers the left pupil movable body unit P2130 from above. Left pupil cover P2231 has left transmission gear P2
231a is formed.

The left transmission gear P2231a is provided at the right rear portion of the left pupil cover P2231 with its axis directed vertically.

The right pupil cover P2232 covers the right pupil movable body unit P2130 from above. The right pupil cover P2232 has a first right transmission gear P2232a and a second right transmission gear P22
32b are formed.

The first right transmission gear P2232a is provided at the left rear portion of the right pupil cover P2232 with its axis directed vertically. The first right transmission gear P2232a is provided so as to mesh with the left transmission gear P2231a.

The second right transmission gear P2232b is arranged such that its axis is directed vertically and the first right transmission gear P2232
It is provided above a. The second right transmission gear P2232b is integrated with the first right transmission gear P2232a.

The movable gear P2233 shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 is provided in front of the second right transmission gear P2232b with its axis directed vertically. The movable gear P2233 is connected to the second right transmission gear P2
232b.

The movable rack P2234 shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 transmits driving force to the movable gear P2233. The movable rack P2234 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The movable rack P2234 is provided above the movable gear P2233 with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. A protruding portion of the movable gear P2233 is inserted through the long hole formed in the movable rack P2234, and the protruding portion engages with the movable gear P2233. The front portion of the movable rack P2234 engages with the engaging portion P2221d of the movable rack P2221.

Since the transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215 and the rotary drive motor P2216 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

By configuring the pupil rotation driving section P2230 in this way, the pupil movable body unit P21
30 can be rotated. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 139 and 143. FIG.

First, when the rotation drive motor P2216 is driven, as described above, the upper movable production accessory P2
000 (the portion other than the insertion member P2213 and the lifted portion P2140) is the rotation shaft P214.
3a and rotating bush P2212. Then, the shaft gear P222
6 moves along the outer circumference of the transmission gear P2214. Since the shaft gear P2226 and the transmission gear P2214 are in mesh with each other, the shaft gear P2226 rotates with respect to the transmission gear P2214 fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142. This also rotates the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the second bevel gear P2224. Then, the first bevel gear P2223 meshing with the second bevel gear P2224 also rotates, and the first bevel gear P2223
The idle gear P2222 that meshes with is also rotated. As the idle gear P2222 rotates, the movable rack P2221 meshing with the idle gear P2222 moves left and right. Then, the movable rack P2234 engaged with the movable rack P2221 also moves in the horizontal direction, and the movable gear P2233 rotates. Then, the second right transmission gear P2232b and the first right transmission gear P2232a rotate, and the left transmission gear P22 meshing with the first right transmission gear P2232a
31a also rotates. This causes the pupil movable body unit P2130 to rotate. In this way, the pupil movable unit P2130 rotates simultaneously with the rotation of the upper movable production accessory P2000 (the portion other than the lifted part P2140 and the like) and the rotation of the eyebrow movable body P2111.

[Upper Accessory Lifting Mechanism P2300]
The upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 shown in FIGS. 129 and 144 to 148 drives up and down the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the lower movable performance accessory (not shown). The upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 mainly includes a left guiding part P2310, a right guiding part P2320, a left driving mechanism P2330 and a right driving mechanism P2340.

The left guide part P2310 shown in FIG. 144 guides the upper movable production accessory P2000 and the lower movable production accessory (not shown) up and down. The left guide portion P2310 is provided on the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction directed vertically. A left elevating shaft P2311 is formed on the right side of the left guide portion P2310 so as to vertically extend from the lower end to the upper end thereof.
The left elevating shaft P2311 guides the left carriage P2146 (and thus the upper movable production accessory P2000) up and down by being inserted inside the left carriage P2146.

The right guide part P2320 shown in FIG. 147 guides the upper movable production accessory P2000 and the lower movable production accessory (not shown) up and down. The right guide part P2320 is provided on the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. A right elevating shaft P2321 is formed on the left side surface of the right guide portion P2320 so as to extend vertically from its lower end to its upper end.
The right elevating shaft P2321 guides the right carriage P2147 (and thus the upper movable production accessory P2000) up and down by being inserted inside the right carriage P2147.

The left drive mechanism P2330 shown in FIGS.
is driven up and down. The left drive mechanism P2330 is primarily driven by the upper pulley P2.
331, a lower pulley P2332, a belt P2333, a transmission gear P2334 and an elevation drive motor P2335.

The upper pulley P2331 shown in FIG. 145 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley P2331 is rotatably supported near the upper end of the right surface of the left guide portion P2310.

A lower pulley P2332 shown in FIG. 146 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley P2332 is rotatably supported near the lower end of the right surface of the left guide portion P2310 (below the upper pulley P2331). A gear P2332a is formed on the lower pulley P2332.

The belt P2333 shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 supports the upper movable production accessory P2000. The belt P2333 has an upper pulley P2331 and a lower pulley P2332.
is wound on.

The transmission gear P2334 shown in FIG. 146 transmits driving force to the lower pulley P2332. The transmission gear P2334 is arranged to mesh with a gear P2332a formed on the lower pulley P2332.

The elevation driving motor P2335 shown in FIG. 146 is a drive source for vertically raising and lowering the upper movable production accessory P2000. The elevation drive motor P2335 is provided near the lower end of the right surface of the left guide portion P2310. A drive force from an output shaft (not shown) of the elevation drive motor P2335 is transmitted to the transmission gear P2334. When the transmission gear P2334 is rotated by the driving force of the elevation drive motor P2335, the lower pulley P2 is pulled up with the rotation of the transmission gear P2334.
332 rotates. This causes the belt P2333 to rotate between the upper pulley P2331 and the lower pulley P2332.

The right driving mechanism P2340 shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 is an upper movable production accessory P2000.
is driven up and down. The right drive mechanism P2340 mainly includes an upper pulley (not shown), a lower pulley P2342, a belt P2343, a transmission gear P2344 and an elevation drive motor P2345. The right drive mechanism P2340 is the left drive mechanism P2330.
Since it is configured substantially in the same manner as (substantially symmetrical), the configuration will be briefly described below.

An upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley P2342 are provided on the left surface of the right guide portion P2320. A belt P2343 is wound around an upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley P2342. The lower pulley P2342 is connected to the lift drive motor P2 via a transmission gear P2344.
345 driving force is transmitted. The belt P2 is
343 rotates.

By configuring the upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 in this way, the upper movable effect accessory P
2000 can be raised, lowered and tilted. Specifically, the rotation of the belts P2333 and P2343 causes the left carriage P2 fixed to the belt P2333 to move.
146, and the right carriage P2147 fixed to the belt P2343 can move up and down, thereby moving up and down and tilting the upper movable production accessory P2000.

[Operation of the upper movable production accessory P2000 at the time of production]
Hereinafter, the operation of the upper movable production accessory P2000 when performing production will be described.

The upper movable performance accessory P2000 is located behind the rotating accessory P3000 in the state (initial position) before performing the performance, and is not visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 108).

When effecting, first, the up-and-down drive motor P2335 of the left drive mechanism P2330 is driven to rotate the belt P2333 and lower the left carriage P2146. Similarly,
The lift drive motor P2345 of the right drive mechanism P2340 is driven to rotate the belt P2343 and lower the right carriage P2147.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 149, the upper movable production accessory P2000 descends to a position visible to the player. As a result, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil ornament P2113 moves to the effect position where the player can easily visually recognize it. At this time, at least part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 protrudes outward (upward) from the end of the surface (first rendering surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 in front view.

Next, the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven to rotate the upper movable production accessory P2000 (parts other than the lifted part P2140, etc.) counterclockwise in left side view (see FIG. 139, etc.).

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 150, the eyebrow decoration body P2 of the upper movable production accessory P2000
121 is directed forward (front). As a result, the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow ornament P2121 moves to the effect position where the player can easily recognize it. At this time, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil ornament P2113 is directed upward, that is, it moves to a waiting position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

At this time, the rotation drive motor P2216 is driven to move the movable rack P2221 and rotate the movable gear P2233. As a result, the pupil movable body unit P2130 rotates (see FIG. 143, etc.).

Then, as shown in FIG. 150, left and right pupil movable body units P2130 (pupil movable body P21
31) respectively extend from the inside to the outside (
downward). As a result, the left and right pupil movable body units P2130 form a shape that imitates the left and right pupils in a front view.

By rotating the upper movable effect accessory P2000 in this way, the effect surface visually recognized by the player changes from the surface of the eye decoration P2113 (first effect surface) to the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121 (second effect surface). ). Also, the pupil movable body unit P2130 moves (rotates) so as to be visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, by driving the rotary drive motor P2216 and moving the movable rack P2221,
The movable body support arm P2112 and the eyebrow movable body P2111 fixed to the movable body support arm P2112 are rotated (moved parallel to the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113) (see FIG. 142, etc.).

Then, as shown in FIG. 151, the left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 move so as to be accommodated inside the outer peripheral edge of the pupil decoration body P2113 in plan view.

In this way, when the upper movable production accessory P2000 rotates, the first production part P2 is rotated at the same time as the rotation.
Since the eyebrow movable body P2111 of 110 rotates and retracts inward, the upper movable production accessory P200
It is possible to prevent the eyebrow movable body P2111 from hitting the liquid crystal located behind 0.

In addition, by driving the rotation drive motor P2216, the upper movable effect accessory P200
0 (parts other than the lifted part P2140, etc.) are rotated so that the surface (second rendering surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 can be visually recognized by the player, and the pupil movable body unit P2130 is rotated to the eyebrow decoration body P2121. and move the eyebrow movable body P2111 to the pupil decoration body P
2113 can be moved. In other words, a single drive source can express various movements and perform various effects.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the upper movable production accessory P2000 is tilted. Specifically, the elevation drive motor P2345 is driven to raise the right carriage P2147, and the elevation drive motor P2335 is driven to lower the left carriage P2146. Then, the upper movable production accessory P2000 (parts other than the lifted part P2140, etc.) rotates counterclockwise in front view around the first pin P2146a (see FIG. 136). This rotation range is regulated by the second pin P2146b and the long hole P2144b, and the upper movable effect accessory P2000 (parts other than the lifted part P2140, etc.) tilts up to a predetermined angle. Incidentally, when tilting the upper movable effect accessory P2000, it is possible to drive only the elevation drive motor P2345 so that the right carriage P2147 rises, without driving the elevation drive motor P2335.

Here, the light guide plate P1112 has a light emitting region P1112a capable of reflecting light forward by partial surface processing. The light emitting region P1112a is provided around the pupil movable body unit P2130 (at least part of the periphery of the eyebrow decoration body P2121). Light-emitting region P11
12a is formed in a shape that imitates the left and right pupils and eyebrows when viewed from the front (FIG. 153).
reference). When the upper movable effect accessory P2000 is tilted, light is emitted from the illumination board P2132 to the front light guide plate P1112, and the light is most strongly reflected forward in the light emitting area P1112a. It is possible to perform an interesting presentation that more closely resembles human eyes and eyebrows.

In addition, by tilting the upper movable production accessory P2000, the angle of the longitudinal direction of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 changes to a state in which the surface (first production surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is directed forward (see FIG. 149). is approximately the same as the angle in the longitudinal direction of the eyebrow movable body P2111. As a result, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil ornament P2113 is visible to the player (first mode),
The surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow ornament P2121 can be enhanced in relation to the state (second mode) in which the player can visually recognize it.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, when the upper movable effect accessory P2000 tilts upward to the right, the right mounting guide P2145 provided on the right side of the upper movable effect accessory P2000 is pulled out to the left. Become. At this time, since the pressing member P2147a is formed so as to extend leftward from its lower end, even if the right mounting guide P2145 is pulled out leftward,
The right mounting guide P2145 can be pressed from the front by this leftwardly extending portion.
Therefore, forward movement of the right mounting guide P2145 can be restricted.

At the end of the production, the upper movable production accessory P2000 returns to the initial position (see FIG. 108) by performing the operation opposite to the operation described so far. At that time, when the upper movable production accessory P2000 rotates so that the surface (second production surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 faces downward (moves to a standby position that is difficult for the player to see), the left and right pupil movable bodies The unit P2130 moves so as to fit inside the outer peripheral edge of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 on the back side of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (second rendering surface).

In this way, when the upper movable effect accessory P2000 rotates, the movable pupil unit P2130 rotates and retracts inward at the same time as the rotation. It is possible to prevent P2130 from hitting.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a production rotating body that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of production surfaces, and that can display the production during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. It is

However, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has a problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed and lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of presentation contents.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
It has a plurality of rendering surfaces including a first rendering surface (surface of pupil ornament P2113) and a second rendering surface (surface of eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface. A game machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device),
an effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize and an effect position that is easily visible to the player;
an eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first rendering surface;
An effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111,
The effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) is
When controlling the movement of the first effect surface from the standby position to the effect position, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 that is contained inside the end of the first effect surface at the standby position is moved to the above position. Controlling the movement so as to protrude from the inside to the outside of the end of the first rendering surface,
When controlling the movement of the first effect surface from the effect position to the standby position, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111 protruding outward from the end of the first effect surface at the effect position is moved to the above position. The movement is controlled so that it can be accommodated inside the end of the first rendering surface.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the presentation content. Furthermore, interference with other members can be prevented when the rendering surface is controlled to move to the standby position.

Specifically, when the upper movable production accessory P2000 rotates from the state in which the first production surface is visible to the state in which the second production surface is visible, the first production part P2110 is rotated at the same time as the rotation. Since the eyebrow movable body P2111 rotates and fits inside the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113, it is possible to prevent the eyebrow movable body P2111 from hitting the liquid crystal positioned behind the upper movable production accessory P2000.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a production rotating body that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of production surfaces, and that can display the production during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. It is

However, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has a problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed and lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of presentation contents.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
It has a plurality of rendering surfaces including a first rendering surface (surface of pupil ornament P2113) and a second rendering surface (surface of eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface. A game machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device),
an effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize and an effect position that is easily visible to the player;
an eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first rendering surface;
An effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111,
The effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) is
When the first effect surface is controlled to move to the effect position by the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means), the eyebrow movable body P2111 is moved parallel to the first effect surface. At least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111, which is located inside the edge of the first rendering surface in the standby position, is moved to protrude outward from the inside of the edge of the first rendering surface. control.
That is, it is provided with an effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of controlling movement by switching between the first effect surface and the second effect surface to an effect position easily visible to the player. Here, the switching of the rendering surface means that the first rendering surface is easily visible and the second rendering surface is difficult to be visually recognized, and the first rendering surface is difficult to be visually recognized and the second rendering surface is easily visible. It is to control the movement of the movable body so that it becomes.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the presentation content. Furthermore, the production can be executed without widening the width of the production device in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, the eyebrow movable body P2111 is formed to move in parallel with the first rendering surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113). The width of the object P2000 in the front-rear direction does not widen, and interference between members can be suppressed.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a production rotating body that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of production surfaces, and that can display the production during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. It is

However, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has a problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed and lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of presentation contents.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
It has a plurality of rendering surfaces including a first rendering surface (surface of pupil ornament P2113) and a second rendering surface (surface of eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface. A game machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device),
an effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the first effect surface or the second effect surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize and an effect position that is easily visible to the player;
a pupil movable body P2131 (movable body) provided on the second rendering surface;
an effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the pupil movable body P2131,
The effect operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) is
When the second effect surface is controlled to move to the effect position by the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means), at least a part of the pupil movable body P2131 is moved from the end of the second effect surface. Control the movement so that it protrudes outward,
When the second effect surface is controlled to move to the standby position by the effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means), the second effect surface projecting outward from the end of the second effect surface at the effect position At least a portion of the pupil movable body P2131 is controlled to move so as to be within the end portion of the second effect surface on the back side of the second effect surface.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the presentation content. Furthermore, interference with other members can be prevented when the rendering surface is controlled to move to the standby position.

Specifically, the pupil movable body P2131 is provided above the eyebrow decoration body P2121, not on the same plane as the eyebrow decoration body P2121 (see FIG. 133). Therefore, in a state where the second rendering surface (the surface of the eyebrow ornament P2121) is easily visible to the player, the pupil movable body P2131
It is positioned on the back side (rear) of the eyebrow ornament P2121. Therefore, the pupil movable body P213
1 can be used to produce an effect with depth. Then, the second rendering surface (eyebrow ornament P2
121) is difficult for the player to see (the surface of the eyebrow ornament P2121 is directed downward), the pupil movable body P2131 is located on the back side of the eyebrow ornament P2121 at the outer peripheral edge of the eyebrow ornament P2121. Since it fits inside the part, it is possible to prevent interference with other members.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a production rotating body that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of production surfaces, and that can display the production during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. It is

However, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has a problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed and lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of presentation contents.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
It has a plurality of rendering surfaces including a first rendering surface (surface of pupil ornament P2113) and a second rendering surface (surface of eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface. A game machine comprising an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device) and a light guide plate P1112 (display means) provided on the front side of the upper movable production accessory P2000,
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first effect surface or the second effect surface to an effect position easily visible to the player,
On the first rendering surface, the decoration part of the first mode (decoration imitating the left and right eyes and eyebrows of a person)
includes
The second rendering surface includes a decoration part of a second aspect related to a part of the first aspect (a part of a person's left and right eyes and a decoration imitating eyebrows),
The light guide plate P1112 (display means) provides, at least partly around the second effect surface, a third mode effect related to a part of the first mode ) is displayed using the light emitting area P1112a that imitates the .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the presentation contents. Furthermore, the effect related to the effect displayed on the first effect surface (surface of the pupil ornament P2113) is displayed using the second effect surface (surface of the eyebrow ornament P2121) and the display means (light guide plate P1112). It is possible to realize a novel production by executing it.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a production rotating body that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of production surfaces, and that can display the production during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. It is

However, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has a problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed and lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of presentation contents.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
It has a plurality of rendering surfaces including a first rendering surface (surface of pupil ornament P2113) and a second rendering surface (surface of eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface. A game machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device),
An effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first effect surface or the second effect surface to an effect position easily visible to the player,
The first rendering surface includes the decorative portion of the first aspect,
The second rendering surface includes a second aspect of the decoration part related to a part of the first aspect,
When the movement of the second performance surface is controlled to a performance position that is easily visible to the player, an upper accessory elevating mechanism P2300 (tilting means) for tilting the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Even if the production device is tilted, the relationship between part of the first mode and the second mode is maintained.

According to such a configuration, a novel effect can be realized by executing an effect related to the effect displayed on the first effect surface using the second effect surface and the display means.

Specifically, by tilting the upper movable effect accessory P2000, the eyebrow ornament P2121
The angle in the longitudinal direction is approximately the same as the angle in the longitudinal direction of the eyebrow movable body P2111 in the effect displayed on the first effect surface. As a result, the surface of the pupil ornament P2113 (first rendering surface)
is visible to the player (first aspect) and the surface of the eyebrow ornament P2121 (second effect surface) is visible to the player (second aspect). An interesting production can be performed for the player.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a production rotating body that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of production surfaces, and that can display the production during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. It is

However, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has a problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed and lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of presentation contents.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
It has a plurality of rendering surfaces including a first rendering surface (surface of pupil ornament P2113) and a second rendering surface (surface of eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface. A game machine equipped with an upper movable production accessory P2000 (production device),
an effect operation control circuit 89 (effect surface control means) capable of moving and controlling the movement of the first effect surface or the second effect surface to an effect position easily visible to the player;
An eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first rendering surface,
The first rendering surface includes the decorative portion of the first aspect,
The second rendering surface includes a second aspect of the decoration part related to a part of the first aspect,
In the first aspect, the eyebrow movable body P2111 moves in one direction,
In the second aspect, the second rendering surface moves in the one direction.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Even if the second rendering surface moves in the first direction, the relationship between part of the first aspect and the second aspect is maintained.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the presentation contents. Furthermore, novel effects can be realized by executing effects related to the effects displayed on the first effect surface using the second effect surface and the display means.

Specifically, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil ornament P2113 is visible to the player (
In the first aspect), the right eyebrow movable body P2111 is controlled to move in the direction of tilting upward to the right. When the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow ornament P2121 is visible to the player (second mode), the movement of the upper movable effect accessory P2000 is controlled to tilt upward to the right. That is, since the right eyebrow movable body P2111 in the first mode and the upper movable production accessory P2000 in the second mode are controlled to move in substantially the same direction, the production of the first mode and the production of the second mode are controlled. can increase the relevance of

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the first effect part P2110 and the second effect part P2120
Although it is assumed that the decorations that imitate human eyes and eyebrows are applied, the decorations can be arbitrary.

In addition, in this embodiment, one drive source (rotational drive motor P2216) rotates the upper movable effect accessory P2000 (parts other than the lifted part P2140, etc.), moves the movable pupil unit P2130, and moves the eyebrows. Although the movement of the movable body P2111 is performed, each of these operations may be performed by separate driving sources.

Further, in this embodiment, the eyebrow movable body P2111 projects from the outer peripheral edge of the pupil decoration body P2113 in front view in both the initial position shown in FIG. 108 and the effect position shown in FIG. However, as described above, the upper movable production accessory P2000 (lifted part P
2140, etc.) and the drive source for moving the eyebrow movable body P2111 are separate drive sources, and when the eyebrow movable body P2111 is in its initial position (FIG. 108), the pupil decoration body P2113 , and when it moves to the production position (Fig. 149) (as it moves), it may move so as to protrude from the inside of the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration body P2113. .

By doing so, the player can visually recognize the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111 on the right side. Here, when the surface (first rendering surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is visible to the player (first mode), the eyebrow movable body P2111 on the right side tilts upward and to the right. Then, the surface (second effect surface) of the eyebrow ornament P2121 is visible to the player (second
mode), the upper movable production accessory P2000 moves in the direction of tilting upward to the right. That is, since the player visually recognizes that the right eyebrow movable body P2111 in the first mode and the upper movable production accessory P2000 in the second mode move in substantially the same direction, the first
It is possible to further enhance the relevance between the presentation of the aspect of (1) and the second presentation.

Below, the rotating accessory P3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 170. FIG.

The rotating accessory P3000 rotates a body of rotation P3400, which will be described later, and emits light emitting means P3.
By causing the 300 to emit light, a predetermined effect is performed. The rotating accessory P3000 is arranged on the upper part of the game board P1100. The rotating accessory P3000 mainly includes the left support portion P310.
0, right supporting portion P3200, light emitting means P3300, rotating body P3400, driving means P350
0 and shielding means P3600.

The left support portion P3100 shown in FIGS. 154 to 156 is a member fixed to the game board P1100. The left support portion P3100 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right.
The rear portion of the left support portion P3100 is fixed to the game board P1100 with screws or the like.

The right support part P3200 is a member fixed to the game board P1100. The right support portion P3200 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right support portion P3200 is arranged to the right of the left support portion P3100 with a predetermined gap from the left support portion P3100. The rear portion of the right support portion P3200 is fixed to the game board P1100 with screws or the like.

Between the left support portion P3100 and the right support portion P3200, a rotating body P3400, which will be described later, is provided.
etc. are arranged. The rotating body P3 is supported by the left support portion P3100 and the right support portion P3200.
400 and the like are fixed to the game board P1100.

The light emitting means P3300 shown in FIGS. 155 to 159 emits light to the outside of the body of rotation P3400 by irradiating the inside of the body of rotation P3400, which will be described later. The light emitting means P3300 mainly includes a support shaft P3310, a substrate support portion P3320, and a substrate P3330.
, a light-emitting portion P3340 and a rotation support portion P3350.

A support shaft P3310 shown in FIGS. 156, 158, and 159 is connected to a substrate support portion P33, which will be described later.
20 or the like. The support shaft P3310 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. Support shaft P331
0 is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. Both left and right ends of the support shaft P3310 are supported by the left support portion P3100 and the right support portion P3200, respectively. The support shaft P3310 is fixed so as not to rotate with respect to the left support portion P3100 and the right support portion P3200.

The substrate support part P3320 is a member that supports a substrate P3330, which will be described later. The substrate support portion P3320 mainly includes a support plate portion P3321 and a boss portion P3322.

The support plate portion P3321 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The support plate portion P3321 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with the longitudinal direction directed left and right in a rear view. A concave portion P3321a is formed in the support plate portion P3321.

The recessed portion P3321a is a portion formed by recessing the back surface of the support plate portion P3321 toward the front. The concave portion P3321a is formed in the upper-lower middle portion (approximately in the upper-lower center) of the support plate portion P3321. The recess P3321a is formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the support plate portion P3321 from the left end to the right end of the support plate portion P3321. Support plate part P
In the concave portion P3321a of the 3321, the support shaft P3310 is arranged so as to be fitted therein.
In this way, the support plate portion P3321 (substrate support portion P3320) is rotated by the support shaft P3310.
) is supported.

The boss portion P3322 is a portion for attaching a substrate P3330, which will be described later, to the support plate portion P3321. The boss portion P3322 is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The boss portion P3322 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing forward and backward. The boss portion P3322 is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the support plate portion P3321. A plurality of boss portions P3322 are provided on the support plate portion P3321.

A substrate P3330 shown in FIGS. 155 to 159 is a member on which a light emitting portion P3340, which will be described later, is provided. The substrate P3330 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. Substrate P
3330 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The vertical width and horizontal width of the substrate P3330 are formed to be substantially the same as the vertical width and horizontal width of the support plate portion P3321. The substrate P3330 is arranged in front of the support plate portion P3321. The substrate P3330 is attached to the boss portion P3 by screws or the like.
322. Thereby, the substrate P3330 is supported by the substrate supporting portion P3320.

The light emitting part P3340 is a member capable of emitting light. As the light emitting part P3340, for example, an LED capable of emitting light in an appropriate color is used. The light emitting part P3340 is provided on the front surface of the substrate P3330. A plurality of light emitting units P3340 are provided over substantially the entire front surface of the substrate P3330.

The rotation support portion P3350 shown in FIGS. 155, 157, and 158 is a rotating body P3, which will be described later.
400 rotatably supported. The rotation support portion P3350 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side. The rotation support P3350 is arranged to the left of the substrate support P3320 and the substrate P3330. The rotation support part P3350 is fixed to the left end of the substrate support part P3320. A support shaft P3310 is inserted through the center of the rotation support portion P3350 so as to be relatively unrotatable.

A rotating body P3400 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160, and 161 has a plurality (two in this embodiment) of rendering surfaces and is rotatable. Rotating body P3400
is mainly the first rendering surface P3410, the first lens member P3420, the second rendering surface P3
430, second lens member P3440, first connecting surface P3450, second connecting surface P346
0, a left side P3470 and a right side P3480. That is, in the present embodiment, a first rendering surface P3410 is provided as an example of the first rendering section, and a second rendering surface P3430 is provided as an example of the second rendering section. Note that the rendering portion may have a shape other than a planar shape, and may be a rendering portion that is unevenly formed, or a rendering portion that is formed in a curved shape.

As will be described later, the rotating body P3400 is provided so as to be rotatable. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160 and 161, the first
The configuration of the rotating body P3400 will be described based on a state in which the second rendering surface P3410 is directed forward and the second rendering surface P3430 is directed backward.

The first rendering surface P3410 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, and 160 is a portion that is appropriately decorated. The first rendering surface P3410 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The first rendering surface P3410 is arranged with the plate surface facing forward and backward. Appropriate characters, figures, symbols, colors, and the like are applied as decorations to the front surface of the first rendering surface P3410.
A portion (first light-transmitting portion) that allows light to pass through is formed on the first rendering surface P3410. In this embodiment, the entire first rendering surface P3410 is formed to be the first translucent portion.

The first lens member P3420 shown in FIGS. 156 and 159 has a first rendering surface P3410.
It is a member for appropriately guiding (diffusing, etc.) the light radiated to the . First lens member P34
20 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. First lens member P3420
are arranged with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The first lens member P3420 has a first rendering surface P3.
It is fixed to the rear surface of 410 .

Second rendering surface P3430 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160 and 161
is an appropriately decorated part. The second rendering surface P3430 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The second effect surface P3430 is arranged with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The second rendering plane P3430 is arranged behind the first rendering plane P3410. Appropriate characters, figures, symbols, coloring, etc. are applied as decorations to the rear surface of the second rendering surface P3430. The second rendering surface P3430 is decorated differently from the first rendering surface P3410. A portion (second light-transmitting portion) that allows light to pass is formed on the second rendering surface P3430. In this embodiment, the entire second rendering surface P3430 is formed to serve as the second translucent portion. That is, the second rendering surface P3430 (second translucent portion) is the same as the first rendering surface P3
410 (first translucent portion), any shape, character, figure, symbol, coloring, or the like is formed to be different.

The second lens member P3440 shown in FIGS. 155, 159, 160, and 161 is a member for appropriately guiding (diffusing, etc.) the light irradiated onto the second rendering surface P3430. The second lens member P3440 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The second lens member P3440 is arranged with its plate surface facing forward and backward. Second lens member P3440
is fixed to the front surface of the second rendering surface P3430.

First connecting surface P3450 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160 and 161
is a portion that connects the first rendering plane P3410 and the second rendering plane P3430. The first connecting surface P3450 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. First connecting plane P3
450 is arranged with its plate surface facing up and down. The front end of the first connecting plane P3450 is fixed to the upper end of the first rendering plane P3410. The rear end of the first connecting plane P3450 is fixed to the upper end of the second rendering plane P3430. Thus, the first connecting plane P3450 connects the upper ends of the first rendering plane P3410 and the second rendering plane P3430. First connecting plane P3
The upper surface of 450 is appropriately decorated. In this embodiment, the first connecting surface P34
50 is formed so as to be impermeable to light.

The second connecting plane P3460 is a portion that connects the first rendering plane P3410 and the second rendering plane P3430. The second connecting surface P3460 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. The second connecting surface P3460 is arranged with the plate surface facing up and down. Second connecting plane P3
460 is fixed to the lower end of the first rendering surface P3410. Second connecting surface P34
60 is fixed to the lower end of the second rendering surface P3430. Thereby, the second connecting plane P3460 connects the lower ends of the first rendering plane P3410 and the second rendering plane P3430. Appropriate decoration is applied to the lower surface of the second connecting surface P3460. In this embodiment, the second connecting surface P3460 is formed so as to be impermeable to light.

The left side P3470 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 160 and 161 is the body of rotation P34.
This is the part that forms the left side of 00. The left side surface P3470 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The left side P3470 includes a first rendering surface P3410 and a second rendering surface P343.
0, fixed to the left ends of the first connection plane P3450 and the second connection plane P3460. A circular hole P3471 is formed in the left side surface P3470.

The circular hole P3471 is a hole penetrating the left side surface P3470 from side to side. Circular hole P3471
is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side.

The right side surface P3480 is a portion forming the right side portion of the rotating body P3400. Right side P34
80 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right side P3480 includes a first rendering plane P3410, a second rendering plane P3430, a first connecting plane P3450 and a second connecting plane P3.
460 at the right end. A gear P3481 is formed on the right side surface P3480.

The gear P3481 receives driving force from a driving means P3500, which will be described later. The gear P3481 is integrally formed on the right side of the right side P3480 with its axis directed to the left and right.

In this way, the rotating body P3400 has a first rendering plane P3410, a second rendering plane P3430,
First connecting surface P3450, second connecting surface P3460, left side P3470 and right side P34
80, it is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having six faces.

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 158 and 159, the rotating body P3400 accommodates the substrate supporting portion P3320, the substrate P3330 and the light emitting portion P3340 of the light emitting means P3300. As shown in FIG. 158, the rotation support portion P3350 of the light emitting means P3300 is inserted through the left side surface P3470 (circular hole P3471 shown in FIG. 160) of the rotating body P3400 so as to be relatively rotatable. The support shaft P3310 of the light emitting means P3300 is inserted through the right side surface P3480 (the central portion of the gear P3481) of the rotating body P3400 so as to be relatively rotatable. A gear P3481 on the right side P3480 is inserted into a housing portion P3510 of a drive means P3500, which will be described later. In this manner, the rotating body P3400 accommodates the substrate P3330 and the like, and is arranged so as to be rotatable around the support shaft P3310.

The driving means P3500 shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 162 controls the rotation of the rotor P3400. The driving means P3500 mainly includes a housing portion P3510, a motor P
3520, drive gear P3530, first detection gear P3540, second detection gear P3550
, a first detection sensor P3560 and a second detection sensor P3570.

The accommodation portion P3510 accommodates a drive gear P3530, a first detection gear P3540, and a second detection gear P3550, which will be described later. The housing portion P3510 is formed in a box shape having an internal space. The housing portion P3510 is fixed to the right support portion P3200. Note that FIG. 162 shows a state in which the right portion of the accommodating portion P3510 is opened in order to show the inside of the accommodating portion P3510 (driving gear P3530, etc.).

The motor P3520 is for generating a driving force (driving source) for rotationally driving the rotating body P3400. The motor P3520 is fixed to the right side surface of the housing portion P3510.

The driving gear P3530 shown in FIG. 162 is rotated by the driving force of the motor P3520. The drive gear P3530 is arranged inside the housing portion P3510 with its axis directed to the left and right. Drive gear P3530 is fixed to an output shaft (not shown) of motor P3520. The driving gear P3530 is arranged behind and below the gear P3481 of the rotating body P3400 inserted into the housing portion P3510. Drive gear P3530 meshes with gear P3481.

The first detection gear P3540 is for detecting the rotational position of the rotor P3400. The first detection gear P3540 is arranged inside the housing portion P3510 with its axis directed to the left and right. The first detection gear P3540 is arranged behind and above the gear P3481. The first detection gear P3540 meshes with the gear P3481.

The second detection gear P3550 is for detecting the rotational position of the rotor P3400. The second detection gear P3550 is arranged inside the housing portion P3510 with its axis directed to the left and right. The second detection gear P3550 is arranged forwardly and downwardly of the gear P3481. The second detection gear P3550 meshes with the gear P3481.

The first detection sensor P3560 shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 is connected to the first detection gear P354.
It detects whether or not 0 is at a predetermined rotational position. A first detection sensor P3560 is fixed to the upper portion of the housing portion P3510. Part of the first detection sensor P3560 (detection part)
is inserted into the housing portion P3510, and can detect whether or not the first detection gear P3540 is at a predetermined rotational position.

A second detection sensor P3570 shown in FIG. 155 detects whether or not the second detection gear P3550 is at a predetermined rotational position. The second detection sensor P3570
It is fixed to the bottom of 510 . A part (detection part) of the second detection sensor P3570 is the housing part P3.
510 to detect whether the second detection gear P3550 is at a predetermined rotational position.

In the driving means P3500 configured as described above, when the motor P3520 is driven,
The driving force of the motor P3520 is transmitted to the gear P3481 of the rotating body P3400 via the driving gear P3530. As a result, the rotating body P3400 rotates about the spindle P3310 of the light emitting means P3300.

Further, the first detection gear P3540 and the second detection gear P3550 rotate with the rotation of the rotating body P3400. First detection sensor P3560 and second detection sensor P3570
By detecting whether or not the first detection gear P3540 and the second detection gear P3550 are at predetermined rotational positions, the rotational position of the rotating body P3400 can be detected.

Specifically, a state in which the rotating body P3400 directs the first effect surface P3410 to the front (forward), that is, a position where the first effect surface P3410 can be visually recognized by the player (hereinafter, this position is simply referred to as "effect position ”), the first detection sensor P35
60 detects that the first detection gear P3540 is at a predetermined rotational position. i.e.
The first detection sensor P3560 can detect that the first rendering surface P3410 is in the rendering position.

In addition, in a state in which the rotating body P3400 faces the second rendering surface P3430 toward the front (forward), that is, in a state in which the second rendering surface P3430 is rotated to the rendering position, the second detection sensor P3570 detects the 2 detection gear P3550 is at a predetermined rotational position. That is, the second detection sensor P3570 can detect that the second effect surface P3430 is at the effect position.

Thus, by the first detection sensor P3560 and the second detection sensor P3570,
It can be detected that either the first rendering plane P3410 or the second rendering plane P3430 is positioned at the rendering position. By driving or stopping the motor P3520 based on the detection, either the first rendering surface P3410 or the second rendering surface P3430 can be arbitrarily rotated to the rendering position.

The shielding means P3600 shown in FIGS. 159 and 163 to 166 is the light emitting means P3.
300 to limit the irradiation range of the light emitted from 300 to the inner surface of the rotating body P3400 to a predetermined range. The shielding means P3600 mainly includes a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and a rotor side shielding means P3620.

The light emitting means side shielding means P3610 shown in FIGS. 159, 163, 164 and 166 is
It is a member fixed to the light emitting means P3300. The light emitting unit side shielding means P3610 mainly includes a left shielding portion P3611, a right shielding portion P3612, an upper connecting portion P3613, and a lower connecting portion P3614.
, a left fixing part P3615 and a right fixing part P3616.

The left shielding part P3611 is a part forming the left part of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610.
The left shielding part P3611 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The vertical width of the rear end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed to be substantially the same as the vertical width of the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300. The front end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed in an arcuate shape in a side view that bulges forward from the rear end portion. More specifically, as will be described later, the light emitting means side shielding means P36
10 is attached to the substrate P3330, the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed to have an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310 in a side view (see FIG. 159). The left shielding portion P3611 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The left shielding part P3611 according to the present embodiment is formed so as to extend generally vertically when viewed from the front, and a step (bending part) is formed in the middle of the upper part and lower part so that the lower part is positioned to the left compared to the upper part. It is

The right shielding part P3612 is a part forming the right part of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610.
The right shielding part P3612 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right shielding part P3612 is arranged to the right of the left shielding part P3611. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the left shielding portion P3611 in side view. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The right shielding portion P3612 according to the present embodiment is inclined leftward from the upper and lower end portions toward the upper and lower middle portions so that the upper and lower middle portions are located inside (to the left) compared to the upper and lower end portions in a front view. is formed as

The upper connecting portion P3613 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612. The upper connecting portion P3613 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. Upper connecting part P3
Left and right ends of 613 are connected to upper ends of left shielding part P3611 and right shielding part P3612, respectively. As a result, the upper connecting portion P3613 is divided into the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P36.
12 are connected to each other.

The lower connecting portion P3614 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612. The lower connecting portion P3614 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. Lower connecting part P3
The left and right ends of 614 are connected to the lower ends of the left shielding part P3611 and the right shielding part P3612, respectively. As a result, the lower connecting portion P3614 is divided into the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P36.
12 are connected to each other.

The left fixed part P3615 is a part fixed to the substrate P3330. Left fixed part P3
615 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction directed up and down. The upper and lower end portions of the left fixing portion P3615 are connected to the left portions of the upper connecting portion P3613 and the lower connecting portion P3614, respectively.

The right fixed part P3616 is a part fixed to the substrate P3330. Right fixing part P3
616 is formed in a longitudinal shape with the longitudinal direction directed up and down. The upper and lower end portions of the right fixing portion P3616 are connected to the right portions of the upper connecting portion P3613 and the lower connecting portion P3614, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 159 and 163, the left fixing part P3615 and the right fixing part P3616 are
It is fixed to the front surface of the board P3330 with screws or the like. As a result, the shielding means P on the side of the light emitting means
3610 are attached to the left and right central portions of the board P3330. At this time, among the plurality of light-emitting portions P3340 provided on the substrate P3330, the light-emitting portion P3340 arranged in the left-right central portion of the substrate P3330 is located inside the light-emitting means side shielding means P3610 (in front view, the left shielding portion P3
611, the range surrounded by the right shielding part P3612, the upper connecting part P3613 and the lower connecting part P3614).

The rotating body side shielding means P3620 shown in FIGS. 159, 163, 165 and 166 is a member fixed to the rotating body P3400. The rotating body side shielding means P3620 mainly includes a left shielding portion P3621, a right shielding portion P3622, a first connecting portion P3623, and a second connecting portion P36.
24.

The left shielding part P3621 is a part forming the left part of the rotor side shielding means P3620. The left shielding part P3621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The vertical width of the rear end portion of the left shielding portion P3621 is formed to be substantially the same as the vertical width of the second lens member P3440. The left shielding portion P3621 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The left shielding part P3621 according to the present embodiment is formed so as to extend generally vertically when viewed from the front, and a step (bent part) is formed in the middle of the upper and lower parts so that the upper part is positioned to the left compared to the lower part. It is
A concave portion P3621a is formed in the left shielding portion P3621.

The recessed portion P3621a is formed by recessing the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3621 toward the rear. The recessed part P3621a is formed in the upper and lower substantially central part of the front end part of the left shielding part P3621. The concave portion P3621a is formed in a generally arcuate shape when viewed from the side. More specifically, when the rotor-side shielding means P3620 is attached to the second lens member P3440, as will be described later, the concave portion P3621a is formed to have an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310 in a side view. (See FIG. 159). In addition, the radius of the concave portion P3621a is equal to that of the shielding means P
It is formed so as to have approximately the same radius as the arc-shaped radius of the left shielding portion P3611 of 3610 (strictly, slightly larger).

The right shielding part P3622 is a part forming the right part of the rotor side shielding means P3620. The right shielding part P3622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right shielding part P3622 is
It is arranged to the right of the left shielding part P3621. The distance between the left shielding part P3621 and the right shielding part P3622 (left and right distance) is equal to the left shielding part P3611 and the right shielding part P of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610.
It is formed so as to be substantially the same as the interval of 3612 . The right shielding portion P3622 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the left shielding portion P3621 in side view. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The right shielding part P3622 according to the present embodiment is inclined leftward from the upper and lower end portions toward the upper and lower middle portions so that the upper and lower middle portions are located inside (to the left) relative to the upper and lower end portions when viewed from the front. is formed as A concave portion P3622a is formed in the right shielding portion P3622.

The recessed portion P3622a is formed by recessing the front end portion of the right shielding portion P3622 toward the rear. The recessed part P3622a is formed in the upper and lower approximately central part of the front end part of the right shielding part P3622. The recessed portion P3622a corresponds to the recessed portion P3621a of the left shielding portion P3621 in side view.
It is formed to have substantially the same shape as the .

The first connecting portion P3623 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622. The first connecting portion P3623 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing up and down. first
The left and right ends of the connecting portion P3623 are connected to the upper ends of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622, respectively. As a result, the first connecting portion P3623 is connected to the left shielding portion P3621.
and the upper ends of the right shielding part P3622.

The second connecting portion P3624 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622. The second connecting portion P3624 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing up and down. second
The left and right ends of the connecting portion P3624 are connected to the lower ends of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622, respectively. As a result, the second connecting portion P3624 is connected to the left shielding portion P3621.
and the lower ends of the right shielding part P3622.

As shown in FIGS. 159 and 163, the first connecting portion P3623 and the second connecting portion P36
24 is fixed to the front surface of the second lens member P3440 with screws or the like. by this,
The rotator-side shielding means P3620 is attached to the left-right central portion of the second lens member P3440 (the same position as the light-emitting means-side shielding means P3610 in the left-right direction).

Below, an effect mode by the rotating accessory P3000 configured as described above will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 166, the case where the first rendering plane P3410 among the rendering planes of the rotating body P3400 is located at a position facing the front (rendering position) will be described.

In this case, the player can easily visually recognize the first effect surface P3410. Also, the second
Since the effect surface P3430 of is facing backward, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. At this time, the rotor-side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second rendering surface P3430 (second lens member P3440) is positioned behind the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300.

In this state, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330,
The rotor-side shielding means P3620 fixed to the inside of the second rendering surface P3430 are in a separated state (hereinafter simply referred to as "separated state"). In the separated state, a large gap is formed between the light-emitting-means-side shielding means P3610 and the first rendering surface P3410 of the rotating body P3400. Therefore, the light from the plurality of light emitting units P3340 provided on the substrate P3330 passes through the gap between the light emitting unit side shielding means P3610 and the first rendering surface P3410 of the rotating body P3400. 1 lens member P3420 is illuminated. The light transmitted through the first lens member P3420 is irradiated to the entire inner area of the first rendering surface P3410. As a result, as shown in FIG. 167, light is emitted substantially uniformly from the entire first rendering surface P3410 to the outside, and the entire first rendering surface P3410 emits light substantially uniformly. That is, in this case, the light emitting means P3
Light is irradiated from 300 to the entire inner surface side of the first rendering surface P3410 (first irradiation range).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the case where the second rendering plane P3430 among the rendering planes of the rotating body P3400 is located at a position facing the front (rendering position) will be described.

In this case, the player can easily visually recognize the second effect surface P3430. Also, the first
Since the effect surface P3410 of is directed backward, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. At this time, the rotor-side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second rendering surface P3430 (second lens member P3440) is positioned in front of the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300.

In this state, the front end of the illuminator-side shielding means P3610 fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330 is the recess (
It is located so as to fit into the recess P3621a and the recess P3622a). In this way, the substrate P3 is
A state in which one cylindrical member extending from 330 to the second rendering surface P3430 is formed (hereinafter simply referred to as a “restricted state”) is reached. In the limited state, the shielding means P3600 limits the irradiation range of the light from the plurality of light emitting units P3340 provided on the substrate P3330 to a predetermined range.

Specifically, among the plurality of light emitting units P3340, the light emitted from the light emitting units P3340 arranged inside the shielding means P3600 (light emitting unit side shielding means P3610) may go outside the shielding means P3600. Can not. For this reason, the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 is emitted only to a range located inside the shielding means P3600 in a front view of the second rendering surface P3430 (see FIG. 170).

On the other hand, among the plurality of light emitting units P3340, the shielding means P3600 (light emitting means side shielding means P3
610), the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 arranged outside the shielding means P36
Cannot go inside 00. Therefore, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion P3340 is emitted only to the area of the second rendering surface P3430 that is located outside the shielding means P3600 in front view (see FIG. 170).

In this way, when the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the shielding means P3600 is in a restricted state, and the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 to the inside of the second effect surface P3430 is It can be limited to a predetermined range (a range positioned inside or outside the shielding means P3600 in a front view). That is, the first rendering surface P
3410 is controlled to move to the production position (first irradiation range), and the irradiation range of light when the second production surface P3430 is controlled to move to the production position (second irradiation range ) can be different. As a result, for example, the light emitting portion P3340 inside the shielding means P3600 and the light emitting portion P3340 outside the shielding means P3600 are caused to emit light in different modes (for example, different brightness, color, timing, etc.), thereby making the second rendering surface P3430 non-uniform. can be made to emit light.

Especially in this embodiment, the shape of the shielding means P3600 in the front view is the second rendering surface P3
It is assumed that it is formed so as to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to 430 . As a result, the irradiation range (second irradiation range) of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 is made to correspond to the second rendering surface P3430 (second translucent portion), and the second rendering surface P3430 is decorated. can be made to emit light to enhance the For example, by forming the characters provided on the second rendering surface P3430 and the shielding means P3600 so as to match when viewed from the front, the characters can be illuminated in a manner different from other decorations.

Further, in this embodiment, in the restricted state, the rear end portion of the rotor-side shielding means P3620 is located behind the substrate P3330 (see FIG. 168). This allows the substrate P333
0 is effectively prevented from circulating from behind the shielding means P3600 (irradiated from the inside to the outside or from the outside to the inside of the shielding means P3600). can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168 and the like, the shielding means P3610 on the side of the light emitting means has a shape that bulges in an arc around the support shaft P3310 (the center of rotation of the rotating body P3400). The shielding means P3620 has an arcuate concave shape centered on the support shaft P3310. As a result, it is possible to reduce the gap between the shielding means P3600 (the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotor side shielding means P3620) in the limited state while eliminating the interference between the members when the rotating body P3400 rotates. .

That is, by forming an arcuate portion along the rotation trajectory of the rotating body P3400 in the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620
Interference between 3610 and rotating body side shielding means P3620 can be avoided. In addition, with this configuration, the opposing portions (arc-shaped portions) of the light emitting unit side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 can be brought closer to each other to reduce the gap, thereby improving the light shielding performance. can be improved. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 from leaking beyond the shielding means P3600.

In this way, the effect surface (the first effect surface P3410 or the second effect surface P3410 or the second
The lighting mode of the decoration surface by the light emitting means P3300 can be varied depending on the type of the effect surface P3430). As a result, different effects (light-emitting effects) are performed according to the type of the decorative surface, and the attraction of the effect by the rotating accessory P3000 can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a performance rotator that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of performance surfaces, and that can display performance during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of performance surfaces. disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has the problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed, which lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
Rotating body P3 formed from a plurality of performance surfaces (performance portions) that have translucent portions and are visible to the player
A game machine equipped with 400,
a light emitting means P3300 which is provided inside the rotating body P3400 and can irradiate light to the outside of the rotating body P3400 through the translucent portion by irradiating the inner surface side of at least one rendering surface with light;
Shielding means P3600 for limiting the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 to the inner surface side of the rendering surface to a predetermined range;
a driving means P3500 that rotates the rotating body P3400 and controls the movement of one of the plurality of performance surfaces to a performance position that is easily visible to the player;
The plurality of performance surfaces are
a first rendering surface P3410;
A second rendering surface P3430, which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface P3410,
The rotating body P3400 is moved to the first rendering surface P341 by the shielding means P3600.
0 is controlled to move to the effect position, and the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the irradiation range of the light irradiated to the inner surface side of the effect surface is It is characterized by being different.

Further, the shielding means P3600 according to this embodiment is
Rotor-side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotor P3400;
a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 provided in the light emitting means P3300;
including
The shielding means P3600 is
When the rotating body side shielding means P3620 moves with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 together with the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 to the inner surface side of the rendering surface (rendering portion) is reduced. The irradiation range can be limited to a predetermined range,
When the first effect surface P3410 is controlled to move to the effect position, the light emitting means P3
300 to the inner surface side of the first effect surface P3410 becomes the first irradiation range, and when the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the light emitting means It is characterized in that the irradiation range of the light irradiated from P3300 to the inner surface side of the second rendering surface P3430 becomes a second irradiation range different from the first irradiation range.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game machine.

Specifically, when the first effect surface P3410 is controlled to move to the effect position and when the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the lighting mode of the effect surface by the light emitting means P3300 is changed. can be different. That is, depending on the type of the effect surface whose movement is controlled to the effect position, different light emission effects are possible, and thus the amusement of the game machine can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a performance rotator that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of performance surfaces, and that can display performance during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of performance surfaces. disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has the problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed, which lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine comprising a rotating body formed of a plurality of effect sections that have a translucent section and are visible to a player,
a light emitting means provided inside the rotating body, capable of emitting light to the outside of the rotating body through the translucent section by irradiating the inner surface of at least one effect section with light;
a shielding means for limiting the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inner surface side of the effect section to a predetermined range;
driving means for rotating the rotating body and controlling the movement of any one of the plurality of rendering units to a rendering position that is easily visible to the player;
The plurality of performance surfaces are
a first rendering surface P3410;
A second rendering surface P3430, which is a rendering surface different from the first rendering surface P3410,
The shielding means P3600 is
including a rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided in the rotating body P3400,
The rotor-side shielding means P3620 is
By moving with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the first rendering surface P341
0 is controlled to move to the effect position, and the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the irradiation range of the light irradiated to the inner surface side of the effect surface is It is characterized by making it different.

Further, the first rendering surface P3410 according to the present embodiment is
Having a first translucent part formed in a predetermined shape,
The second rendering surface P3430 is
Having a second light-transmitting part formed in a shape different from that of the first light-transmitting part,
The rotor-side shielding means P3620 is
By moving with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the first rendering surface P341
0 is controlled to move to the effect position, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 becomes the first irradiation range corresponding to the first light transmitting portion, so that the first When the light-transmitting portion emits light and the movement of the second rendering surface P3430 is controlled to the rendering position, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light-emitting means P3300 corresponds to the second light-transmitting portion. It is characterized in that the second translucent part emits light when the second irradiation range is reached.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game machine.

Specifically, when the first effect surface P3410 is controlled to move to the effect position and when the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the lighting mode of the effect surface by the light emitting means P3300 is changed. can be different. That is, depending on the type of the effect surface whose movement is controlled to the effect position, different light emission effects are possible, and thus the amusement of the game machine can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine provided with an effect device is publicly known. For example, JP 2018-1613
No. 33 of the same publication.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a game machine that has a performance rotator that incorporates a light emitting unit and has a plurality of performance surfaces, and that can display performance during a big hit, game information, etc. on the plurality of performance surfaces. disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect content displayed on the effect surface has the problem that the same effect mode is repeatedly displayed, which lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine comprising a rotating body formed of a plurality of effect sections that have a translucent section and are visible to a player,
a light emitting means provided inside the rotating body, capable of emitting light to the outside of the rotating body through the translucent section by irradiating the inner surface of at least one effect section with light;
a shielding means for limiting the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inner surface side of the effect section to a predetermined range;
driving means for rotating the rotating body and controlling the movement of any one of the plurality of rendering units to a rendering position that is easily visible to the player;
The shielding means P3600 is
Rotor-side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotor P3400;
a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 provided in the light emitting means P3300;
including
The shielding means P3600 is
By moving the rotating body side shielding means P3620 along with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the light emitting means P3300 together with the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 can irradiate the inner surface side of the rendering surface with a predetermined irradiation range. and a state in which the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inner surface side of the rendering surface is not limited.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game machine.

Specifically, when the first effect surface P3410 is controlled to move to the effect position and when the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the lighting mode of the effect surface by the light emitting means P3300 is changed. can be different. That is, it is possible to perform different lighting effects in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, thereby improving the amusement of the gaming machine.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the movement (rotation) of the rotating body P3400 by the driving means P3500 and the light emitting means P3
The irradiation of light by 300 can be arbitrarily controlled. By appropriately setting the timings of both, it is possible to perform various forms of effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the entirety of the first rendering surface P3410 and the second rendering surface P3430 is a translucent portion (light can be transmitted as a whole) has been shown, but the first rendering Surface P341
It is also possible to make only a part of the 0 and second rendering planes P3430 a light-transmissive portion (only a part of which can transmit light). For example, the first rendering surface P3410 can be formed by combining a translucent member and a non-translucent member depending on the decoration applied to the surface.

It is also possible to use only the rotating body side shielding means P3620 as the shielding means P3600. That is, it is possible to omit the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. In this case, when the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the rotating body side shielding means P3
620 limits the irradiation range of the light.

Also, the configuration (shape, size, etc.) of the shielding means P3600 is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the shape, size, and the like can be set appropriately according to the decoration applied to the performance surface.

Further, the shielding means P3600 does not necessarily have to be provided on the rotating body P3400, unlike the rotating body side shielding means P3620 of the present embodiment. That is, the shielding means P3600 may be switched between a state in which the irradiation range of light is limited and a state in which it is not limited according to the movement control (rotation) of the rotating body P3400. For example, according to the movement control of the rotating body P3400, it is moved to a position where the light irradiation range is limited and a position where it is not limited by a separately provided driving means (or using the driving force of the driving means P3500). A possible member can be shielding means P3600.

The rendering device P4000 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 171 to 191. FIG.

The effect device P4000 shown in FIG. 171 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. For convenience, the production device P4000
Assume that it is provided on the game board P1100, which is another example of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

The effect device P4000 is installed on the game board P1100. The effect device P4000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 at a position visible to the player in the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The effect device P4000 comprises a movement control mechanism P4010, a movable body P4300 and a reinforcing cover P4400.

The movement control mechanism P4010 moves the movable body P4300 between the standby position shown in FIG. It controls movement. A detailed description of the movable body P4300 will be given later.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, the standby position is the opening area 1 of the game board P1100.
d (position overlapping the lower part of the game board P1100). Also, FIG.
5 to 187, the effect position is the lower part of the opening area 1d. The movement control mechanism P4010 includes a vertical movement control mechanism P4100 and a horizontal movement control mechanism P42.
00.

The vertical movement control mechanism P4100 shown in FIGS. 171, 172, and 185 has a movable body P43
00 is controlled to move up and down. Here, the movable body P4300 is provided in a lateral movement control mechanism P4200, which will be described later, and the vertical movement control mechanism P4100 controls the movement of the movable body P4300 via the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. That is, the vertical movement control mechanism P4100 directly controls the movement of the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction. A detailed description of the left/right movement control mechanism P4200 will be given later.

As shown in FIGS. 171 and 185, the vertical movement control mechanism P4100 controls movement of the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200 (movable body P4300) between the standby position and the performance position.
In the following, the configuration of the up-and-down movement control mechanism P4100 will be mainly described with reference to the state in which the movable body P4300 is positioned at the standby position. The elevation movement control mechanism P4100 comprises a left movement unit P4110 and a right movement unit P4160.

The left-side movement unit P4110 moves the left-right movement control mechanism P on the left side of the game board P1100.
4200 in the vertical direction and guides the movement in the vertical direction. The left moving unit P4110 comprises a base part P4120, a first motor P4130, a first transmission part P4140 and an elevating shaft P4150.

The base portion P4120 is provided with a first motor P4130, a first transmission portion P4140, and an elevating shaft P4150, which will be described later. The base part P4120 is the game board P1
It is fixed to the left part of 100 . The base portion P4120 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The base portion P4120 has a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

A first motor P4130 shown in FIG. 171 is a drive source for vertically moving the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. A first motor P4130 is installed on the upper portion of the base portion P4120. Also, the first motor P4130 is installed on the left side of the base portion P4120. As shown in FIG. 172, the first motor P4130 has an output shaft P4131
It is provided so as to penetrate the base portion P4120 in the front-rear direction and protrude rearward.

The first transmission portion P4140 shown in FIG. 172 transmits the driving force generated by the first motor P4130 to the side of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The first transmission part P4140 is installed on the left side of the base part P4120. The first transmission portion P4140 is the output gear P
4141, a first gear P4142 and a second gear P4143.

The output gear P4141 takes out the driving force of the first motor P4130. The output gear P4141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft P4131 of the first motor P4130.

The first gear P4142 is arranged substantially below the output gear P4141, and the output gear P414
meshes with 1. The first gear P4142 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the base portion P4120 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P4143 is arranged substantially below the first gear P4142, and the first gear P4
meshes with 142. The second gear P4143 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the base portion P4120 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The elevation shaft P4150 guides the vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The lifting shaft P4150 has a substantially cylindrical shape elongated in the vertical direction.
The lifting shaft P4150 is installed on the right side of the base portion P4120. Also, the lifting shaft P4150 is installed so as to be separated from the rear surface of the base portion P4120.

The right movement unit P4160 guides the vertical movement of the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200 on the right side of the game board P1100. The right moving unit P4160 is
It comprises a base portion P4170 and an elevating shaft P4180.

The base portion P4170 is provided with an elevation shaft P4180, which will be described later. The base part P4170 is fixed to the right part of the game board P1100. The base portion P4170 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The base portion P4170 has a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

The elevation shaft P4180 guides the vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The lifting shaft P4180 has a substantially cylindrical shape elongated in the vertical direction.
The lifting shaft P4150 is installed on the left side of the base portion P4170. Also, the lifting shaft P4180 is installed so as to be separated from the rear surface of the base portion P4170.

Left-right movement control mechanism P4200 shown in FIGS. 171 to 178 and 185 to 187
supports the movable body P4300 and controls the lateral movement of the movable body P4300. The left/right movement control mechanism P4200 controls movement of the movable body P4300 at the rendering position, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the left and right movement control mechanism P4200
is controlled to move vertically by the vertical movement control mechanism P4100. The lateral movement control mechanism P4200 is arranged between the left movement unit P4110 and the right movement unit P4160. The lateral movement control mechanism P4200 includes a base portion P4210, a cover portion P4220, a connecting portion P4230, a rack portion P4240, a guide portion P4250, a second motor P4260, and a second transmission portion P4270.

A base portion P4210 shown in FIGS. 172 and 174 to 178 is provided with a second motor P4260 and a second transmission portion P4270, which will be described later. Base part P4210
comprises a body portion P4211 and a support portion P4219.

The body portion P4211 shown in FIG. 175 constitutes most of the base portion P4210. The main body portion P4211 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. In addition, the main body part P
4211 has a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Body part P4211
has a front wall portion P4212, an upper wall portion P4215, a lower wall portion P4216, a left wall portion P4217 and a right wall portion P4218.

The front wall portion P4212 constitutes the front portion of the main body portion P4211. Front wall P4
212 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The front wall portion P4212 includes a guide hole portion P4213 and a first biasing portion receiving portion P4214.

The guide hole portion P4213 shown in FIGS. 174 and 177 guides the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300. The guide hole portion P4213 is formed so as to pass through the front wall portion P4212 in the front-rear direction. The guide hole portion P4213 is formed at the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the front wall portion P4212. The guide hole portion P4213 is elongated in the left-right direction.

The first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 shown in FIG. 178 receives the biasing force of the biasing portion described later. The first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 is provided so as to protrude rearward on the right side portion of the front wall portion P4212.

The upper wall portion P4215 shown in FIG. 175 constitutes the upper portion of the main body portion P4211. The upper wall portion P4215 is provided at the upper end portion of the front wall portion P4212. The upper wall portion P4215 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. The upper wall portion P4215 has a notch portion P4
215a.

The notch portion P4215a is obtained by notching the rear portion of the upper wall portion P4215. The notch portion P4215a is formed in the center portion of the upper wall portion P4215 in the left-right direction.

The lower wall portion P4216 constitutes the lower portion of the main body portion P4211. Lower wall P4
216 is provided at the lower end of the front wall portion P4212. The lower wall portion P4216 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically.

The left wall portion P4217 constitutes the left portion of the main body portion P4211. Left wall P4
217 is provided at the left end of the front wall portion P4212. The left wall portion P4217 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the left-right direction.

The right wall portion P4218 constitutes the right portion of the main body portion P4211. Right wall P4
218 is provided at the right end of the right wall portion P4218. The right wall portion P4218 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the left-right direction.

The support portion P4219 supports a guide portion P4250, which will be described later. Support part P4
219 is formed to extend upward from the right end of main body P4211.

The cover portion P4220 shown in FIG. 172 covers the opening of the main body portion P4211. The cover portion P4220 has a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction.
The cover portion P4220 and the main body portion P4211 are connected to a second transmission portion P4270, which will be described later.
constitute a housing that accommodates the

The connecting portion P4230 connects the cover portion P4220 (base portion P4210) and the rack portion P4240 described later. The connecting portion P4230 has a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The connecting portion P4230 has a right portion fixed to the left end portion of the rear surface of the cover portion P4220. In addition, the connecting portion P4230 has a cover portion P4220 on the left side.
protrudes leftward beyond the left end of the

The rack portion P4240 shown in FIGS. 172 to 174 converts the rotation transmitted by the first transmission portion P4140 into vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The rack portion P4240 is fixed to the left portion of the connecting portion P4230. The rack portion P4240 includes a body portion P4241, a guide hole portion P4242, and a rack tooth portion P4243.

The body portion P4241 shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 constitutes most of the rack portion P4240. The body portion P4241 has a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The main body portion P4241 has a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Body part P42
41 has its lower portion fixed to the front surface of the left portion of the connecting portion P4230.

The guide hole portion P4242 is a hole vertically penetrating the body portion P4241. The elevating shaft P4150 of the left moving unit P4110 is inserted through the guide hole P4242. By inserting the elevating shaft P4150 through the guide hole portion P4242, the vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200 is guided in the left portion of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200.

The rack tooth portion P4243 meshes with the second gear P4143 of the first transmission portion P4140. The rack tooth portion P4243 is provided at the left end portion of the main body portion P4241. The rack tooth portion P4243 meshes with the second gear P4143 with the lifting shaft P4150 inserted through the guide hole portion P4242.

The guide portion P4250 shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 guides the vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The guide portion P4250 is fixed to the upper end portion of the support portion P4219. The guide portion P4250 has a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction.
The guide portion P4250 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The guide portion P4250 includes a guide hole portion P4251.

The guide hole portion P4251 is a hole that vertically penetrates the guide portion P4250. An elevating shaft P4180 of the right moving unit P4160 is inserted through the guide hole P4251. By inserting the elevation shaft P4180 through the guide hole P4251, the vertical movement of the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200 is guided in the right portion of the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200.

A second motor P4260 shown in FIG. 173 is a drive source for moving the movable body P4300 in the horizontal direction. The second motor P4260 includes a base portion P4210 (main body portion P421
1) is installed on the left side. As shown in FIG. 176, the second motor P4260 is provided such that the output shaft P4261 passes through the base portion P4210 in the front-rear direction and protrudes rearward.

The second transmission part P4270 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 is the second motor P4260
to the movable body P4300. Second transmission part P427
0 is the output gear P4271, the first gear P4272, the second gear P4273, the belt P4
274, tension pulley P4275, tension applying part P4276, first pulley P4277
and a second pulley P4278.

The output gear P4271 shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 takes out the driving force of the second motor P4260. The output gear P4271 is connected to the output shaft P of the second motor P4260.
4261 rear end.

The first gear P4272 is arranged substantially below the output gear P4271, and the output gear P427
meshes with 1. The first gear P4272 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P4273 is arranged substantially to the right of the first gear P4272, and the first gear P4
272. The second gear P4273 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A belt P4274, which will be described later, is wound around the second gear P4273.

A belt P4274 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 is formed in an endless shape and wound around a second gear P4273 and a tension pulley P4275 which will be described later. The belt P4274 is arranged in the front wall portion P4212 so as to extend in the left-right direction above the guide hole portion P4213.

The belt P4274 rotates as the second gear P4273 rotates. Belt P4274
has a rack-shaped tooth portion P4274
a is formed. The tooth portion P4274a meshes with the second gear P4273.

A belt P4274 is wound around the tension pulley P4275 shown in FIG. The tension pulley P4275 is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the right side of the front wall portion P4212 via a tension applying portion P4276, which will be described later.

The tension applying part P4276 rotatably supports the tension pulley P4275,
It provides tension to the belt P4274. The tension applying portion P4276 is the front wall portion P42.
12 on the right side. The tension applying portion P4276 is connected to the tension pulley support portion P42.
76a and biasing portion P4276d.

The tension pulley support portion P4276a rotatably supports the tension pulley P4275. The tension pulley support portion P4276a is supported movably in the left-right direction. The tension pulley support part P4276a has a tension pulley P
4275 is supported. In addition, the tension pulley support portion P4276a is
It has a hole portion P4276b and a second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c.

The hole portion P4276b is a hole that penetrates the tension pulley support portion P4276a in the front-rear direction. The hole P4276b is formed in the right portion of the tension pulley support portion P4276a.
The hole P4276b has an elongated hole shape elongated in the left-right direction. In the hole P4276b,
A first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 formed on the front wall portion P4212 is inserted.

The second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c receives the biasing force of the biasing portion P4276d, which will be described later. The second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c is provided so as to protrude rearward from the right end portion of the tension pulley support portion P4276a.

The biasing portion P4276d biases the tension pulley support portion P4276a to the right. By urging the tension pulley P4275 rightward by the urging portion P4276d via the tension pulley support portion P4276a, a constant tension can be applied to the belt P4274. The biasing portion P4276d is interposed between the first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 and the second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c of the tension pulley support portion P4276a. A compression spring is configured to bias the second biasing portion receiving portions P4276c so as to separate them from each other.

The first pulley P4277 shown in FIGS. 174, 176 and 177 is connected to the second gear P
4273 is arranged substantially to the right. The first pulley P4277 is arranged below the belt P4274 so as to contact the outer peripheral surface of the belt P4274. Also, the first pulley P
4277 is arranged such that its upper end is located above the lower end of the second gear P4273. The first pulley P4277 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first pulley P4277 rotates as the belt P4274 rotates.

The second pulley P4278, shown in FIGS. 174, 177 and 178, is arranged substantially to the left of the tension pulley P4275. The second pulley P4278 is arranged below the belt P4274 so as to contact the outer peripheral surface of the belt P4274. Second pulley P42
78 is arranged such that its upper end is located above the lower end of the tension pulley P4275. Also, the second pulley P4278 is arranged at substantially the same height as the first pulley P4277. The second pulley P4278 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A second pulley P4278 rotates in response to the rotation of the belt P4274.

A movable body P4300 shown in FIGS. 173 to 182 can move vertically and horizontally under movement control by a vertical movement control mechanism P4100 and a horizontal movement control mechanism P4200. The movable body P4300 is installed movably in the left-right direction with respect to the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The movable body P4300 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. Also, the movable body P4300 has a shape that resembles a fighter plane. The movable body P4300 comprises a base portion P4310, an engaging portion P4320, a substrate P4330 and a cover portion P4340.

The base portion P4310 shown in FIG. 179 includes a substrate P4330 and a cover portion P434 which will be described later.
It holds 0. The base portion P4310 is installed in the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The base portion P4310 includes a main body portion P4311, a roller accommodating portion P4312, and a guided portion P4313.

The body portion P4311 constitutes most of the base portion P4310. Body part P4
311 has a substantially plate-like shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The body portion P4311 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front.

The roller accommodating portion P4312 accommodates a roller P4322, which will be described later. A pair of roller accommodating portions P4312 are arranged on both sides in the left-right direction in the lower portion of the main body portion P4311. The roller accommodating portion P4312 is open rearward and downward.

The guided portion P4313 shown in FIGS. 177, 179, 181, and 182 is a portion that is guided in the horizontal direction by the guide hole portion P4213 of the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200. The guided portion P4313 is provided so as to extend downward from the center portion in the left-right direction of the lower portion of the main body portion P4311. The guided portion P4313 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The portion to be guided P4313 includes a protrusion P4314 and an enlarged diameter portion P43.
15.

A protrusion P4314 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the guided portion P4313. A pair of protrusions P4314 are provided at intervals in the left-right direction. The protrusion P4314 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The protruding portion P4314 is located in the guide hole portion P42.
13 is inserted.

The enlarged diameter portion P4315 is provided at the rear end portion of the protrusion P4314. Expanded diameter portion P43
15 has a shape with a larger diameter than the protrusion P4314. The outer diameter of the enlarged diameter portion P4315 is
It is formed larger than the vertical dimension of the guide hole P4213.

By inserting the protrusion P4314 described above into the guide hole P4213, the guide hole P4
213, the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300 can be guided. Further, by providing the above-described enlarged diameter portion P4315 at the rear end portion of the protrusion P4314, the guide hole portion P4
It is possible to prevent the projection P4314 from slipping off from 213.

The engaging portion P4320 shown in FIGS. 179 to 182 is fixed to the base portion P4310 and engaged with the belt P4274. The engaging portion P4320 is connected to the fixed portion P43.
21, a roller P4322 and an engaging guide portion P4323.

The fixed part P4321 is fixed to the rear surface of the base part P4310. Fixed part P4
321 is elongated in the left-right direction. The fixed part P4321 is fixed to the base part P4310 via an appropriate fastener.

The roller P4322 shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is rotatably supported on the fixing portion P4321 about the longitudinal axis. The roller P4322 is disc-shaped. The rollers P4322 are provided at both left and right ends on the front surface of the fixing portion P4321. The roller P4322 is housed in the roller housing portion P4312 with the fixing portion P4321 fixed to the base portion P4310. Moreover, the roller P4322 is shown in FIG.
As indicated by 82, it is grounded to the upper surface of the upper wall portion P4215 of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211).

The engagement guide portion P4323 shown in FIGS. 179 to 182 engages with the belt P4274 and guides the lateral movement of the movable body P4300. Engagement guide portion P4
323 is provided at the central portion in the left-right direction on the lower surface of the fixing portion P4321. The engagement guide portion P4323 includes a guide portion P4324, an engagement portion P4325, and an engagement maintenance portion P4326.

The guide portion P4324 shown in FIGS. 180 to 182 guides the lateral movement of the movable body P4300. The guide portion P4324 has a shape elongated in the left-right direction. The lateral dimension of the guide portion P4324 is formed smaller than the lateral dimension of the fixed portion P4321. The guide portion P4324 has a vertical portion P4324a and a horizontal portion P4324b.

The vertical portion P4324a shown in FIG. 182 extends from the rear end of the lower surface of the fixed portion P4321,
This is the part that protrudes downward. The vertical portion P4324a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4324b is a portion that protrudes forward from the lower end portion of the vertical portion P4324a.
The horizontal portion P4324b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically.

The guide portion P4324 described above is substantially L-shaped in a cross-sectional view (side view).
In the guide portion P4324, as shown in FIG. 182, the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4324b faces the lower surface of the upper wall portion P4215 of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211). As a result, the guide portion P4324 sandwiches the upper wall portion P4215 together with the roller P4322, thereby
4300 can be guided in the horizontal direction.

The engaging portion P4325 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 engages the belt P4274. The engaging portion P4325 is provided at the central portion in the left-right direction on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The engaging portion P4325 has a vertical portion P4325a and a horizontal portion P4325b.

A vertical portion P4325a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that protrudes downward from the front end portion of the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The vertical portion P4325a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4325b is a portion that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion of the vertical portion P4325a.
The horizontal portion P4325b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. Horizontal part P4
325b has a toothed portion P4325c that meshes with the toothed portion P4274a of the belt P4274.
is formed.

The engaging portion P4325 described above is substantially L-shaped in a cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the engagement portion P4325 is formed between the lower surface of the guide portion P4324 and the horizontal portion P43.
25b and the belt P4274 are held so as to be sandwiched vertically. Further, in this state, the toothed portion P4325c of the engaging portion P4325 and the toothed portion P427 of the belt P4274
4a and , mesh with each other. As a result, the engaging portion P4325 can be engaged with the belt P4274, and the movement of the belt P4274 can be transmitted to the movable body P4300.

The engagement maintaining portion P4326 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 is an engaging portion P4325 and the belt P4.
274. The engagement maintaining portion P4326 is provided on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. A pair of engagement maintaining portions P4326 are provided on both sides in the left-right direction of the engaging portion P4325. The engagement maintaining portion P4326 includes a vertical portion P4326a and a horizontal portion P4326b.
Equipped with

A vertical portion P4326a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that protrudes downward from the rear end portion of the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The vertical portion P4326a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4326b is a portion that protrudes forward from the lower end portion of the vertical portion P4326a.
The horizontal portion P4326b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically.

The engagement maintaining portion P4326 described above is substantially L-shaped in a cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the engagement maintaining portion P4326 holds the belt P4274 so as to be vertically sandwiched between the lower surface of the guide portion P4324 and the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4326b.
In addition, the rearward movement of the belt P4274 engaged with the engaging portion P4325 can be restricted by the vertical portion P4326a of the engaging portion P4326. As a result, the belt P4
274 can be prevented from coming off the engaging portion P4325.

A substrate P4330 shown in FIG. 179 is mounted with appropriate electronic components (functional components). The substrate P4330 is fixed to the front surface of the base portion P4310. The substrate P4330 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The substrate P4330 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. The substrate P4330 has a front surface as a mounting surface on which appropriate light emitting means are mounted.

The cover portion P4340 constitutes the appearance of the movable body P4300 when viewed from the front. The cover part P4340 is fixed to the front surface of the base part P4310 so as to cover the base part P4310 and the substrate P4330. The cover portion P4340 includes a body portion P4341, a contact portion P
4342 and a positioning protrusion P4343.

The body portion P4341 constitutes most of the cover portion P4340. Body part P4
A reference numeral 341 denotes a substantially box-like shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the main body portion P4341 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. The body portion P4341 is formed of a transmissive member capable of transmitting light emitted by the light emitting means provided on the substrate P4330.

The contact portion P4342 protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion P4341. The contact portion P4342 is arranged at the left end portion of the lower end portion of the main body portion P4341. Contact portion P4
342 is arranged to the left of the guide portion P4324 of the engaging portion P4320, as shown in FIG. Further, the contact portion P4342 is arranged below the guide portion P4324.
The contact portion P4342 has a substantially cylindrical shape.

The positioning protrusion P4343 protrudes downward from the lower end of the main body P4341. The positioning protrusion P4343 is provided at the central portion of the main body P4341 in the left-right direction.
The positioning protrusion P4343 has a shape in which the lateral dimension decreases toward the lower side in a front view.

The reinforcing cover P4400 shown in FIGS. 171, 183 and 184 is the
4110 and the right moving unit P4160. Reinforcing cover P4400
is placed on the lower part of the rear surface of the game board P1100. In addition, the reinforcement cover P440
0 is arranged in front of the movable body P4300. The reinforcing cover P4400 has a main body part P4
410, restricting means P4420 and notch P4430.

The body portion P4410 constitutes most of the reinforcing cover P4400. Body part P
4410 has a plate shape in which the thickness direction is oriented in the front-rear direction. In addition, the main body P4410
is elongated in the left-right direction. The body portion P4410 is fixed at both left and right ends to the lower portion of the left moving unit P4110 and the lower portion of the right moving unit P4160 via appropriate fasteners.

The restricting means P4420 contacts the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 in a predetermined case, thereby limiting the lateral movement of the movable body P4300 within a predetermined movement range. The restricting means P4420 constitutes a pair of wall portions spaced apart in the left-right direction. Regulatory means P44
20 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion P4410. In addition, the restricting means P4420 is arranged to the left of the central portion of the body portion P4410 in the left-right direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 171, the restricting means P4420 is positioned to the left of the left-right central portion of the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The regulating means P4420 is the first wall portion P44
21, a second wall P4422 and a third wall P4423.

The first wall portion P4421 constitutes the upper portion of the restricting means P4420. first
The wall portion P4421 can limit the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300 at the rendering position within a first range R1 between the left and right first wall portions P4421. first wall P
4421 is formed closer to the production position than the standby position.

The first wall portion P4421 has a shape extending linearly in the vertical direction. First wall portion P44
21 is formed smaller than the distance between the left and right first wall portions P4421. That is, the first range R1 has a shape elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. again,
The vertical dimension of the first wall portion P4421 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 in a front view.

The second wall portion P4422 constitutes the lower portion of the restricting means P4420. second
The wall portion P4422 controls the lateral movement of the movable body P4300 moving vertically from the standby position to the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the restricting means P4420 by the left and right second wall portions P4.
422 within a second range R2. The second wall portion P4422 is
It is formed closer to the standby position than the performance position.

The second wall portion P4422 has a shape extending linearly in the vertical direction. The distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422 is formed to be smaller than the distance between the left and right first wall portions P4421. That is, the width in the left-right direction of the second range R2 is formed smaller than the width in the left-right direction of the first range R1. Moreover, the vertical dimension of the second wall portion P4422 is the same as that of the left and right second wall portions P442.
is formed larger than the distance between 2. That is, the second range R2 has a vertically elongated shape when viewed from the front. Further, the distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 when viewed from the front.

The third wall portion P4423 constitutes a portion between the first wall portion P4421 and the second wall portion P4422. The third wall portion P4423 controls the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300 moving vertically between the first range R1 and the second range R2 by the left and right third wall portions P44.
23, which is a third range R3.

The third wall portion P4423 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first wall portion P4421 and the upper end portion of the second wall portion P4422. The third wall portion P4423 has a curved shape such that the distance between the left and right third wall portions P4423 gradually decreases downward (the width of the third range R3 decreases). be. In addition, the third wall portion P4423 extends within the third range R3 in front view.
It is an arc shape that protrudes toward the center in the left-right direction. Further, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 are continuous so as not to form an angle. again,
The vertical dimension of the third wall portion P4423 and the distance between the left and right third wall portions P4423 are formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 in front view.

The notch portion P4430 is a portion formed in a notch shape at the lower end portion of the main body portion P4410. The notch portion P4430 is formed in a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the main body portion P4410. Figure 17
1, the notch P4430 is provided with a starting opening (first starting opening P1350) through which a game ball wins (passes).

The first starting port P1350 shown in FIG. 171 is located in the substantially central portion in the horizontal direction of the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. Also, the first start port P13 on the rear surface of the game board P1100
50, a positioning recess P4001 is provided to receive the positioning protrusion P4343 of the movable body P4300 in the standby state. By receiving the positioning protrusion P4343 by the positioning recess P4001, the movable body P4300 can be positioned in the standby state.

Movement control of the effect device P4000 configured as described above will be described below. In the following, movement control for moving the movable body P4300 at the waiting position to the rendering position will be described.

At the standby position shown in FIG. 171, the movable body P4300 is positioned on the game board P1 in a front view.
It is located below the opening area 1d of 100 (position overlapping the lower part of the game board P1100). At the standby position, the movable body P4300 is hidden behind the game board P1100 and is in a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In this state, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 189(a),
The contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is located in the second range R2 of the restricting means P4420.

First, movement control by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 will be described. first motor P
When the 4130 is driven, the second gear P4143 rotates around the axis through the output gear P4141 and the first gear P4142 which mesh with each other shown in FIG.

The rotation of the second gear P4143 is transmitted to the rack portion P4240 of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 189(b), the movable body P4300 moves upward via the lateral movement control mechanism P4200.

As described above, when controlling the upward movement of the movable body P4300, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves upward within the second range R2 and the third range R3 of the restricting means P4420.

By controlling the movement as described above, the movable body P4300 is brought to the rendering position. At the performance position, the movable body P4300 is at a position visible to the player in the lower portion of the opening area 1d. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 185, the movable body P4300 is positioned at the approximately central portion in the left-right direction of the opening region 1d.

Next, movement control by the lateral movement control mechanism P4200 will be described. second motor P
When the 4260 is driven, the output gear P4271 and the first gear P4272 meshing with each other shown in FIG. 176 and the second gear P4273 rotate about the axis. second gear P
The rotation of 4273 is transmitted to the belt P4274 wound around the second gear P4273 and the tension pulley P4275, and the belt P4274 rotates. As a result, the movable body P4300 engaged with the belt P4274 is controlled to move rightward as shown in FIGS. 186 and 190(a), for example.

Further, if the second motor P4260 is driven to rotate in a direction opposite to the movement control described above, the movable body P4300 is controlled to move leftward as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190(b). be. In this manner, the movable body P4300 can be controlled to move in the horizontal direction at the effect position.

As described above, when controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the rendering position in the horizontal direction,
The contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves in the left-right direction within the first range R1 of the restricting means P4420. The movable body P4300 is controlled to move in the left-right direction so that the contact portion P4342 does not come into contact with the left and right first wall portions P4421. Note that the restricting means P4420 may be configured to restrict the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300 within a predetermined range over the entire vertical movable range of the movable body P4300. For example, the movable body P43
The restricting means P4420 is shaped so that the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300 is restricted within the first range R1 by the first wall P4421 regardless of where 00 exists in the rendering position. may be formed. Also, the restricted range may vary depending on the position of the movable body P4300.

Next, the movement control for setting the movable body P4300, which has been set to the performance position, to the standby position will be described. In the following example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190(b), the movable body P4300, which is controlled to move leftward at the effect position, is controlled to move to the standby position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 191, the movable body P43 at the production position
00 is set to the standby position, the movable body P4300 is moved obliquely downward.
At this time, rightward movement control by the lateral movement control mechanism P4200 and downward movement control by the vertical movement control mechanism P4100 are simultaneously performed.

As described above, when controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 obliquely downward, the movable body P4300
The contact portion P4342 moves obliquely downward in the third range R3 of the restricting means P4420. The movement of the movable body P4300 is controlled so that the contact portion P4342 does not come into contact with the left and right third wall portions P4423.

As described above, by moving the movable body P4300 obliquely downward, it is possible to position the movable body P4300 in the substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the opening region 1d. Next, movable body P4300
is controlled to move downward to the standby position by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100.

As described above, when controlling the downward movement of the movable body P4300, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves downward within the second range R2 of the restricting means P4420.

According to the effect device P4000 as described above, the range in which the movable body P4300 can move in the horizontal direction is defined by the left and right walls (the first wall P4421, the second wall P4421, the second wall P4420) that constitute the regulation means P4420.
4422 and the third wall P4423) (first range R1, second range R2 and third range R3). As a result, even when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movable body P4300 is
can be restricted within a predetermined range, and the movable body P4300 can move to the game board P1
100 can be prevented from contacting other members.

Also, the width of the second range R2 is narrower than the width of the first range R1 in the restricting means P4420. As a result, when the movable body P4300 is positioned at the standby position, by restricting the movement of the movable body P4300 within a relatively narrow range, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for other members around the restriction means P4420. In addition to being able to do it, at the production position the movable body P430
By widening the range in which 0 can be moved in the left-right direction, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

In addition, since the third wall portion P4423 of the regulating means P4420 has a curved surface shape, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 can be connected without forming an angle. As a result, when the movable body P4300 moves between the performance position and the standby position, an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, and the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is moved to the third wall portion. When the movable body P4300 abuts against P4423, the movement of the movable body P4300 can be smoothly guided by the third wall portion P4423. Further, in the present embodiment, the third wall portion P4423 has an arc shape that protrudes toward the center of the third range R3 in the left-right direction. As a result, a relatively large space for arranging other members can be secured outside the third wall portion P4423.

Further, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is the guide portion P4 of the movable body P4300.
324 (position shifted in the left-right direction (left side) from the guide portion P4324)
are placed in As a result, the contact portion P4342 and the guide portion P4324 are overlapped to increase the thickness of the movable body P4300. A member can be placed. again,
Since the impact when the abutting portion P4342 and the restricting means P4420 abut is not directly applied to the guide portion P4324, the guide portion P4324 is not damaged or the engagement between the guide portion P4324 and the belt P4274 is not properly engaged. can be prevented.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (movable body) is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2010-11934.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-11934 discloses a game machine that includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case that can accommodate the movable accessory, and that can accommodate the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable accessories, there is a risk that they may come into contact with the accessory storage case or other game components and be damaged. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A movable body P4300 that can move between a standby position and an effect position,
a movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling movement of the movable body P4300;
a restricting means P4420 for restricting movement of the movable body P4300;
A gaming machine comprising
The movable body P4300 moves in the vertical direction (first direction), which is the moving direction from the standby position to the effect position, and in the horizontal direction (second direction) different from the vertical direction at the effect position. is movable and
The movable body P4300 has a contact portion P4342 capable of coming into contact with the regulating means P4420,
The regulating means P4420 contacts the contact portion P4342 to allow the movable body P4 to move.
300 limits the distance that can be moved in the left and right direction within a predetermined range,
The predetermined range narrows as the movable body P4300 moves from the performance position to the standby position.

Such a configuration can prevent the movable body P4300 from contacting other members. That is, even when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the horizontal direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the restricting means P4420. Contact with other members of the board P1100 can be prevented.

Also, the width of the second range R2 is narrower than the width of the first range R1 in the restricting means P4420. As a result, when the movable body P4300 is positioned at the standby position, by restricting the movement of the movable body P4300 within a relatively narrow range, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for other members around the restriction means P4420. In addition to being able to do it, at the production position the movable body P430
By widening the range in which 0 can be moved in the left-right direction, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (movable body) is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2010-11934.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-11934 discloses a game machine that includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case that can accommodate the movable accessory, and that can accommodate the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable accessories, there is a risk that they may come into contact with the accessory storage case or other game components and be damaged. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A movable body P4300 that can move between a standby position and an effect position,
a movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling movement of the movable body P4300;
a restricting means P4420 for restricting movement of the movable body P4300;
A gaming machine comprising
The movement control mechanism P4010 is
A vertical movement control mechanism P4100 (first movement control means) capable of controlling movement from the standby position to the performance position by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction;
A lateral movement control mechanism P4200 (second
movement control means);
including
The movable body P4300 has a contact portion P4342 capable of coming into contact with the regulating means P4420,
The restricting means P4420 contacts the contact portion P4342 to move the movable body P43.
00, is formed closer to the rendering position than the standby position, and is capable of limiting the lateral movement of the movable body P4300 within a first range R1. P4421 and the movable body P4300 are formed closer to the standby position than the effect position.
a second wall portion P4422 capable of restricting the movement in the left-right direction to within a second range R2 having a smaller width in the left-right direction than the first range R1; Wall P44
22 and a third wall portion P4423 having a curved surface continuing to P4423.

Such a configuration can prevent the movable body P4300 from contacting other members. That is, even when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the horizontal direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the restricting means P4420. Contact with other members of the board P1100 can be prevented.

Further, by forming the third wall portion P4423 into a curved surface shape, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 can be connected without forming an angle. As a result, when the movable body P4300 moves between the performance position and the standby position, an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, and the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is moved to the third wall portion. When the movable body P4300 comes into contact with P4423, the movement of the movable body P4300 is controlled by the third wall portion P44.
23 can be smoothly guided.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (movable body) is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2010-11934.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-11934 discloses a game machine that includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case that can accommodate the movable accessory, and that can accommodate the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable accessories, there is a risk that they may come into contact with the accessory storage case or other game components and be damaged. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A movable body P4300 that can move between a standby position and an effect position,
a movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling movement of the movable body P4300;
a restricting means P4420 for restricting movement of the movable body P4300;
A gaming machine comprising
The movement control mechanism P4010 is
an elevation movement control mechanism P4100 (first movement control means) capable of controlling movement from the standby position to the effect position by controlling movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction (first direction);
a horizontal movement control mechanism P4200 (second movement control means) capable of controlling movement of the movable body P4300 in a horizontal direction (second direction) different from the direction of movement control by the vertical movement control mechanism P4100;
The movable body P4300 includes a contact portion P4342 that can contact the restricting means P4420,
and a guide portion P4324 for being guided in the left-right direction,
The regulating means P4420 contacts the contact portion P4342 to allow the movable body P4 to move.
300 limits the distance that can be moved in the left and right direction within a predetermined range,
The contact portion P4342 is provided at a position not overlapping the guide portion P4324 in the movable body P4300.

Such a configuration can prevent the movable body P4300 from contacting other members. That is, even when an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the movement of the movable body P4300 in the horizontal direction can be restricted within a predetermined range by the restricting means P4420. Contact with other members of the board P1100 can be prevented.

In addition, it is possible to secure a range in which the movable body P4300 can move, and the movable body P4300
is positioned at the standby position, the space below the guide portion P4324 can be effectively utilized. That is, the contact portion P4342 and the regulating means P4420 are moved to the guide portion P43.
24 (a position shifted in the left-right direction with respect to the guide portion P4324), there is no need to provide an unnecessary movement space in the depth direction, and other members can be arranged.

The up-and-down movement control mechanism P4100 is one form of first movement control means.
Further, the lateral movement control mechanism P4200 is one form of second movement control means.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the movement control by the vertical movement control mechanism P4100 and the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200
Movement control by is not limited to the aspect described above. For example, the order of each movement control may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body P4300 is controlled to move vertically and horizontally, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the movable body P4300 may be controllable to move in an oblique direction, and various directions can be adopted as the direction in which the movement of the movable body P4300 is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body P4300 is modeled after a fighter plane, but the movable body P4
The shape of 300 is not limited to this aspect, and various shapes can be adopted.

Below, the game board P1100 of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Components identical or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same names or the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is significantly different from the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment in that it has a role different from the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the rotating accessory P3000. Specifically, the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment includes a movable performance accessory P5000 (a lower accessory device P5100, a right accessory device P5200, and an upper left accessory device P
5300) and a rendering device P6000.

192 to 204, the movable production accessory P5000 according to this embodiment will be described below.
will be explained.

In addition, in FIG. 195, illustration of the accessory decorative body P5111 is omitted for the sake of convenience. Also, in FIG. 197, illustration of the base member P5130 is omitted for convenience. again,
In FIG. 201 (and FIGS. 205 to 207 to be described later), for convenience, the link arm P5
120 and the base member P5130 are omitted. Moreover, in FIGS. 202 to 204, illustration of the accessory decoration P5111 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The movable performance accessory P5000 shown in FIG. 192 includes the lower accessory device P5100, the right accessory device P5200, and the upper left accessory device P5300, as described above.

[Lower accessories device P5100]
First, the configuration of the lower accessory device P5100 will be described.

The lower accessory device P5100 shown in FIGS. 192 to 198 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. Lower accessory device P51
00 is provided in the lower part of the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction directed in the horizontal direction. The lower accessory device P5100 includes a lower accessory P5110, a link arm P5120, and a base member P5130.
, a crank gear P5140, a motor gear P5150, a rotary drive motor P5160, a cover member P5170 and a screw P5180. Although the details will be described later, the lower role product P5100 is formed so that the lower role product P5110 can be displaced between the standby position and the performance position. The description is based on the state.

The lower accessory P5110 shown in FIGS. 193 to 200 and 202 performs an effect by moving. The lower accessory P5110 includes an accessory decorative body P5111 and an accessory illumination board P51.
12, the rear cover P5113 and the accessory control arm P5114.

The accessory decoration body P5111 shown in FIGS. 194 and 200 constitutes the front part of the lower accessory P5110, and is a portion visually recognized by the player. The accessory decoration P5111 is made of a light transmissive material (lens). The accessory decoration body P5111 is provided so that its longitudinal direction is oriented substantially in the left-right direction (more specifically, it is slightly downward to the right). Accessory decoration P51
11 is appropriately decorated.

The accessory electrical decoration board P5112 shown in FIGS. 195 and 200 is provided such that its board surface is oriented in the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction is slightly downward to the right. Accessory illumination board P5112,
It is provided behind the accessory decoration body P5111. A plurality of LEDs P5112a are provided on the front surface of the accessory electrical decoration board P5112 over substantially the entire area of the accessory electrical decoration board P5112. the L
By causing the EDP 5112a to emit light, it is possible to irradiate the front of the decorative decorative board P5112 with light. By irradiating light from the LED P5112a of the accessory illumination board P5112,
The accessory decoration P5111 can be illuminated as a whole.

The rear cover P5113 shown in FIGS. 195 to 200 and 202 is a
This is the part that constitutes the rear part of 0. The rear cover P5113 is provided behind the decorative accessory substrate P5112 and supports the decorative accessory substrate P5112. The rear cover P5113 includes a rear cover main body P5113A, an arm portion P5113B, a first boss portion P5113a, and a second boss portion P5.
113b, a third boss portion P5113c and a fourth boss portion P5113d.

The rear cover body P5113A shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 constitutes the main structure of the rear cover P5113. The rear cover main body P5113A is provided with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction.

The arm portion P5113B shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 is formed to extend downward from substantially the center of the rear cover main body P5113A.

The first boss portion P5113a shown in FIGS. 198 to 200 and 202 is inserted through a first elongated hole P5122 of a link arm P5120 described later and a first control hole P5131 of a base member P5130 described later. The first boss portion P5113a is attached to the rear cover main body P51.
It is formed to protrude rearward from the left part of 13A. The first boss portion P5113a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

A second boss portion P5113b shown in FIGS. 198 to 200 and 202 is inserted through a second control hole P5132 of a base member P5130, which will be described later. Second boss part P5113
b is formed so as to protrude rearward from the upper and lower intermediate portions of the arm portion P5113B. The second boss portion P5113b is formed in a columnar shape with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. Second boss portion P511
3b is provided on the lower right side of the first boss portion P5113a.

The third boss portion P5113c shown in FIGS. 199, 200, and 202 is inserted through a rotation shaft hole P5114a of the accessory control arm P5114, which will be described later. Third boss part P511
3c is formed so as to protrude rearward from the substantially central portion of the rear cover main body P5113A.
The third boss portion P5113c is formed in a cylindrical shape with an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Third boss part P
5113c is provided to the right of the first boss portion P5113a and above the second boss portion P5113b.

The fourth boss portion P5113d shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 is to be inserted through a control hole P5114b of an accessory control arm P5114 to be described later. Fourth boss part P5113
d is formed to protrude rearward from the right portion of the rear cover main body P5113A. The fourth boss portion P5113d is formed in a columnar shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. Fourth boss part P511
3d is to the right and below the third boss portion P5113c (and the first boss portion P5113a);
Moreover, it is provided above the second boss portion P5113b.

The character object control arm P5114 shown in FIGS.
It is for moving 110 smoothly. The accessory control arm P5114 is provided behind the rear cover P5113. The accessory control arm P5114 has a rotation shaft hole P5114
a, a control hole P5114b and a boss P5114c.

The rotation shaft hole P5114a shown in FIGS.
114 is provided on the left side. The rotation shaft hole P5114a is formed so as to pass through the accessory control arm P5114 in the front-rear direction. The third boss portion P5113c of the rear cover P5113 is inserted through the rotation shaft hole P5114a (see FIG. 200).

The control hole P5114b shown in FIGS. 199, 200 and 202 is formed in an arc shape (partially circular shape) centering on the rotation shaft hole P5114a when viewed from the rear. The control hole P5114b is formed so as to pass through the accessory control arm P5114 in the front-rear direction. Control hole P5114
b is provided on the right side of the rotation shaft hole P5114a. A fourth boss portion P5113d of the rear cover P5113 is inserted through the control hole P5114b (see FIGS. 200 and 202).

A boss portion P5114c shown in FIGS.
5130 is inserted through the second control hole P5132. The boss portion P5114c is formed to protrude rearward from the right portion of the accessory control arm P5114. Boss P5114c
is provided to the right and below the rotation shaft hole P5114a and the control hole P5114b.

In this way, the accessory control arm P5114 is rotatably provided with respect to the rear cover P5113 about the axis of the third boss portion P5113c inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a.

Link arm P512 shown in FIGS. 194, 195, 197-199 and 202
0 transmits the driving force to the lower accessory P5110. The link arm P5120 is
It is provided so that its longitudinal direction is oriented substantially in the vertical direction. The link arm P5120 is the lower part P51
10 is provided behind the left part. The link arm P5120 has a pivot shaft P5121, a first elongated hole P5122 and a second elongated hole P5123.

The rotation axis P5121 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and 202 is connected to the link arm P512.
This is the part that becomes the rotation center of 0. The pivot shaft P5121 is formed to protrude rearward from the lower portion of the link arm P5120. The rotation shaft P5121 is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft P5121 has a through hole P5121a.

A through-hole P5121a shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 is through which a shaft P5133 provided in a base member P5130, which will be described later, is inserted. The through hole P5121a is formed so as to pass through the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction at the center of the rotation shaft P5121.

The first long hole P5122 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and 202 is the link arm P51.
It is an elongated hole extending vertically in the upper part of 20 . The first elongated hole P5122 is connected to the link arm P5.
It is formed so as to pass through 120 in the front-rear direction. In the first long hole P5122, the rear cover P
A first boss portion P5113a of 5113 is inserted (see FIGS. 198 and 202).

The second long hole P5123 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and 202 is through which a crank portion P5142 of a crank gear P5140, which will be described later, is inserted. The second long hole P5123 is
It is an elongated hole extending substantially vertically in the lower portion of the link arm P5120. More specifically, the second elongated hole P5123 is formed such that its upper portion is slightly tilted to the left. The second long hole P5123 is formed so as to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction. Second long hole P5123
is provided below the first long hole P5122.

The base member P5130 shown in FIGS. 194 to 196 and 198 is the lower accessory device P5.
It constitutes the rear part of 100. The base member P5130 is provided with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The base member P5130 has a first control hole P5131 and a second control hole P513.
2 and shaft P5133.

The first control hole P5131 shown in FIGS. 196, 198 and 202 is located on the base member P51.
30 is an elongated hole formed substantially in the center in the left-right direction. The first control hole P5131 is formed in a straight line with its longitudinal direction (stretching direction) oriented substantially in the left-right direction. More specifically, the first control hole P513
1 is formed so as to descend slightly to the right. The first control hole P5131 is located in the base member P5.
It is formed so as to pass through 130 in the front-rear direction. The rear cover P5 is connected to the first control hole P5131.
The first boss portion P5113a of 113 is inserted (see FIGS. 198 and 202).

The second control hole P5132 shown in FIGS. 196, 198, and 202 is formed in an arc shape sloping to the left when viewed from the back. The second control hole P5132 is formed such that its right end (upper end) is positioned to the right and above the first control hole P5131. The second control hole P5132 is
Its left end (lower end) is positioned below the first control hole P5131 and between the right and left ends of the first control hole P5131 in the horizontal direction. The second boss portion P5113b of the rear cover P5113 is inserted through the second control hole P5132. Also, the second control hole P
The boss portion P5114c of the accessory control arm P5114 is inserted through 5132 (see FIG. 196).
and FIG. 202).

A shaft P5133 shown in FIGS. 195 and 198 is formed in a cylindrical shape. Shaft P
5133 is provided with the axis directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft P5133 is attached to the base member P
It is fitted to the base member P5130 so as to protrude forward from 5130 . Shaft P51
33 is inserted through the through hole P5121a of the rotation shaft P5121 of the link arm P5120 (see FIG. 198).

In this manner, base member P5130 connects link arm P5120 to shaft P51.
It is supported so as to be able to swing left and right around the axis of 33 .

A crank gear P5140 shown in FIGS. 195, 197 to 199 and 202 transmits driving force to the link arm P5120. The crank gear P5140 is provided with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The crank gear P5140 has a gear portion P5141 and a crank portion P5142.

A gear portion P5141 shown in FIGS. 199 and 201 is a portion that meshes with a motor gear P5150 described later. The gear portion P5141 is formed in a substantially columnar shape and is formed so as to have teeth on its outer peripheral surface. The gear portion P5141 is provided on the right side of the crank gear P5140 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The gear portion P5141 has a through hole P5141a.

A through hole P5141a shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is through which a shaft portion P5173 of a cover member P5170, which will be described later, is inserted. The through hole P5141a is connected to the crank gear P514.
0 (center of gear portion P5141). The through hole P5141a is connected to the gear portion P5.
It is formed so as to pass through 141 in the front-rear direction.

The crank portion P5142 shown in FIG. 202 is formed to protrude rearward from the left portion of the crank gear P5140. The crank portion P5142 is provided below and to the left of the through hole P5141a. The crank portion P5142 is inserted through the second long hole P5123 of the link arm P5120.

Motor gear P5150 shown in FIGS.
140 to transmit the driving force. The motor gear P5150 is connected to the crank gear P514.
0 is provided with the axis oriented in the front-rear direction. The motor gear P5150 is provided so as to mesh with the gear portion P5141 of the crank gear P5140.

The rotary drive motor P5160 shown in FIGS. 193 to 195 and 198 has a motor gear P
5150 is rotated. The rotary drive motor P5160 is provided in front of the motor gear P5150 with the output shaft P5161 facing rearward. A motor gear P5150 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft P5161. The rotary drive motor P5160 is connected to a cover member P5, which will be described later.
fixed at 170.

Cover member P5170 shown in FIGS. 193-195, 197, 198 and 201
constitutes the front part of the lower accessory device P5100. The cover member P5170 is provided with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The cover member P5170 is connected to the base member P5130.
is provided so as to cover the lower part of from the front, and is fixed to the base member P5130. The cover member P5170 includes a cover body P5171, a bearing portion P5172, a shaft portion P5173, screw holes P5174 and ribs P5175.

The cover main body P5171 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 constitutes the main structure of the cover member P5170. The cover main body P5171 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right.

A bearing portion P5172 shown in FIG. 198 is a shaft P5 provided on a base member P5130.
133 bearing. The bearing portion P5172 is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding rearward from the cover main body P5171. The bearing portion P5172 is provided at a position corresponding to the shaft P5133 provided on the base member P5130, and the shaft P5172 is provided on the inner peripheral surface side of the bearing portion P5172.
5133 are fitted.

A shaft portion P5173 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 is formed in a cylindrical shape. Axle P5173
is provided with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P5173 is formed to protrude rearward from an inner bottom surface P5171a (see FIG. 201) of the cover body P5171. Axle P517
3 is molded integrally with the cover main body P5171. The shaft portion P5173 is connected to the crank gear P
5140 is inserted through the through hole P5141a. At this time, the crank gear P5140 is inserted through the shaft portion P5173 such that the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140 is positioned forward of the top portion (rear end portion) of the shaft portion P5173.

A screw hole P5174 shown in FIG. 201 is for inserting a screw P5180 described later. The screw hole P5174 is formed in the central portion of the shaft portion P5173 in rear view. Screw hole P5174
A female threaded portion is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the . The screw hole P5174 is formed so as to extend forward from the rear end portion of the shaft portion P5173. A part of the screw hole P5174 is formed in the cover main body P5171. More specifically, the screw hole P5174 is formed to extend from the rear end of the shaft portion P5173 to the front of the inner bottom surface P5171a of the cover body P5171 and to the rear of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover body P5171. . That is, the screw hole P5174
is formed from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover main body P5171.

A rib P5175 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 is formed to protrude rearward from the periphery of the shaft portion P5173. The rib P5175 is formed in an annular shape around the axis of the shaft portion P5173 when viewed from the rear. The height of the rib P5175 is formed to be lower than the height of the shaft portion P5173. The rib P5175 is provided so as to come into contact with the front surface of the gear portion P5141.

A screw P5180 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 fixes the crank gear P5140 to the cover member P5170 in a rotatable state. Screw P5180 is screw shaft P
5181 and screw head P5182.

An externally threaded portion is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the screw shaft portion P5181. The screw shaft portion P5181 is inserted into the screw hole P5174 and screwed into the screw hole P5174. The screw shaft portion P5181 is formed to have substantially the same length as the screw hole P5174.

As a result, the screw shaft portion P5181 is located at the shaft portion P5173 of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174.
and a portion (front portion) of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the cover main body P5171. That is, the screw shaft portion P51
81 (screw P5180) is provided so as to straddle both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171. Further, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 contacts the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174 (see FIG. 201).

The screw head P5182 is formed so that its diameter is larger than the diameter of the shaft P5173. The screw head P5182 is provided so as to contact the tip (rear end) of the shaft P5173. At this time, a gap is provided between the screw head P5174a and the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140.

The cover member P5170 and the screw P5180 formed in this way are connected to the crank gear P5.
140 is rotatably supported (fixed) around the shaft portion P5173.

[Right accessory device P5200]
The right accessory device P5200 shown in FIG. 192 is provided on the right side of the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction directed vertically. The configuration of the right accessory device P5200 is generally similar to that of the lower accessory device P5.
Since it is the same as 100, the explanation is omitted.

[Upper left accessory device P5300]
The upper left accessory device P5300 shown in FIG. 192 is provided in the upper left part of the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction directed substantially vertically. Since the configuration of the upper left accessory device P5300 is generally the same as that of the lower accessory device P5100, description thereof will be omitted.

[Operation of Lower Accessory Device P5100 During Production]
202 to 204, the operation of the lower accessory device P5100 during production will be described below.

The lower role product P5110 of the lower role product device P5100 can be displaced between a state before the performance (see FIG. 202) and a state during the performance (see FIG. 204). Below, the positions of the lower accessory P5110, the link arm P5120, and the crank gear P5140 in the state before the performance (see FIG. 202) are referred to as "accessory standby position,""arm standby position," and "gear standby position," respectively. called. In addition, the lower accessory P5110 in the state of performing production (see FIG. 204)
, the positions of the link arm P5120 and the crank gear P5140 will be referred to as the "accessory effect position," the "arm effect position," and the "gear effect position," respectively.

At the role standby position shown in FIG. 202, most of the lower role P5110 is located behind the game board P1100, and only a portion of it is visible to the player.

When performing production, first, the rotary drive motor P5160 (see FIG. 198, etc.) is driven. As a result, the motor gear P fixed to the output shaft P5161 of the rotary drive motor P5160
5150 rotates. Then, the crank gear P5140 meshing with the motor gear P5150
(Crank gear P5140 at the gear standby position) passes through hole P5141a (cover member P
5170 rotates around the axis of the shaft P5173) counterclockwise in rear view.

Then, the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140 moves substantially upward inside the second elongated hole P5123 of the link arm P5120 at the arm standby position. Crank part P5
142 presses the inner peripheral surface of the second elongated hole P5123, so that the link arm P5120 rotates counterclockwise in rear view about the axis of the rotation shaft P5121 (the shaft P5133 provided in the base member P5130). (See Figure 203).

Then, the rear cover P51 inserted into the first elongated hole P5122 of the link arm P5120
13 of the first boss portion P5113a is pressed substantially to the right. In this way, the link arm P
5120 transfers the driving force of the rotary drive motor P5160 to the lower accessory P5110 (rear cover P51
13), the first boss portion P5113a of the lower accessory P5110 moves along the extending direction of the first control hole P5131 (downward to the right) inside the first control hole P5131.
Moving. In addition, the second boss portion P5113b of the lower accessory P5110 has a second control hole P513
2 along the extending direction of the second control hole P5132 (upper right). By doing so, the lower role product P5110 in the role product standby position moves to the upper right while changing the inclination so that the height of the right part of the lower role product P5110 increases (see FIG. 203).

Furthermore, when the lower role object P5110 moves to the upper right while changing the inclination, the role object control arm P
5114 is the third boss portion P5 of the rear cover P5113 inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a.
It rotates counterclockwise in rear view with respect to the rear cover P5113 about the axis of 113c. By rotating the accessory control arm P5114 with respect to the rear cover P5113, smooth movement of the lower accessory P5110 becomes possible. Relative movement of the accessory control arm P5114 with respect to the rear cover P5113 is regulated by the control hole P5114b and the fourth boss portion P5113d of the rear cover P5113.

In this way, the crank gear P5140 moves to the gear rendering position shown in FIG. 204, and the link arm P5120 moves to the arm rendering position shown in FIG. Can be moved to position. Lower Accessory P5
Most of 110 can be visually recognized by the player at the performance position shown in FIG. 204 .

When the production ends, the lower role product P5110, the link arm P5120, and the crank gear P5140 are respectively in the standby positions (the role product standby position, the arm standby position, and the gear standby position).
to the production position (character production position, arm production position and gear production position). As a result, the lower role product P5110 moves from the role product performance position shown in FIG. 204 to the role product waiting position shown in FIG.

As described above, the link arm P5120 is displaced between the arm standby position (see FIG. 202) and the arm performance position (see FIG. 204) each time the performance is executed and ended. Repeated rocking around P5173 many times. Then, a large force is applied to the shaft portion P5173 due to the swinging of the link arm P5120.

Here, in this embodiment, the screw P5180 connects the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P517.
1 (straddling both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171) to fix the crank gear P5140. Therefore, the force applied to the base of the shaft portion P5173 can be received by the screw P5180. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the force applied to the shaft portion P5173, thereby preventing the shaft portion P5173 from breaking from its base. It should be noted that the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171 may be configured as separate members and fixed together. Further, the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171 may be configured to be fixed to separate members.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of game machines such as pachinko machines is well known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 201
9-180975.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2019-180975 discloses a game machine in which a movable body can rotate with respect to a predetermined member by inserting a shaft provided on the movable body into a bearing provided on the predetermined member. ing.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of the players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
crank gear P5140 (movable body);
a cover member P5170 (base portion) to which the crank gear P5140 can be attached;
A shaft portion P provided on the cover member P5170 to which the crank gear P5140 can be attached
5173 (receiving part);
a screw P5180 (fixing means) capable of fixing the crank gear P5140 to the cover member P5170 in an operable state;
is provided.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
Further, in this embodiment, the crank gear P5140 is fixed so as to be rotatable with respect to the shaft portion P5173. By rotating the crank gear P5140, the lower accessory P5110 can be moved to a position (performance position) visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the performance content.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 is a shaft portion P5173 erected from the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171),
The crank gear P5140 is supported by the shaft portion P5173,
The screw P5180 abuts on both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover member P5170 to fix the crank gear P5140.

According to such a configuration, by dispersing the force applied to the shaft portion P5173, the shaft portion P517
3 damage can be suppressed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the screw shaft portion P5181 is a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided in the shaft portion P5173, and a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided in the cover main body P5.
It abuts both of the parts provided at 171 . As a result, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be dispersed, thereby preventing the shaft portion P5173 from breaking from its base.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 is integrally molded with the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of parts.
Further, in this embodiment, the screw hole P5174 extends from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5.
170 (cover body P5171). Therefore, the shaft portion P517
3 is integrally formed with the cover member P5170, the positional deviation between the portion of the screw hole P5174 on the side of the cover body P5171 and the portion of the screw hole P5174 on the side of the shaft portion P5173 is suppressed. Damage to the portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 has a screw hole P5174 (hole portion) into which the screw P5180 can be inserted,
The crank gear P5140 is fixed to the cover member P5170 by inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174.

With such a configuration, the crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed to the cover member P5170.
Further, in this embodiment, the screw hole P5174 extends from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5.
170 (cover body P5171). By inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174 thus formed, the screw P5180 is inserted into the screw hole P5174.
The crank gear P5140 is in contact with both the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the crank gear P5173 provided on the shaft portion P5173 and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the cover main body P5171.
can be made easier to fix.

Further, the hole is a screw hole P5174,
The screw P5180 is a screw inserted into the screw hole P5174, and the screw P5
The crank gear P5140 is fixed by a 180 screw head P5182.

According to such a configuration, the crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed to the cover member P5170 by the screw head P5182 of the screw P5180.
Further, in this embodiment, the crank gear P5140 is inserted through the shaft portion P5173 such that the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140 is located forward of the top (rear end) of the shaft portion P5173. Therefore, the screw head P5182 abuts on the top (rear end) of the shaft P5173, so that the crank gear P5140 can be fixed in a rotatable state rather than in an inoperable state.
Further, in this embodiment, the rib P5175 is provided so as to be able to abut against the front surface of the gear portion P5141. Therefore, the screw head P5182 and the rib P5175 can restrict the longitudinal position of the crank gear P5140. Further, by receiving the force from the crank gear P5140 by the rib P5175, the force (burden) applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be reduced.

Further, the screw hole P5174 extends from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (
It is formed over the cover main body P5171).

According to such a configuration, by inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174, the screw P
5180 can be easily brought into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171.
Further, in the present embodiment, the screw shaft portion P5181 is a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided in the shaft portion P5173, and a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided in the cover main body P5.
171, and the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided so as to contact the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174. As a result, the screw hole P51
74 can be filled, and the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be received by both the outer peripheral surface and the bottom surface of the screw shaft portion P5181. Therefore, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, the crank gear P5140 is provided with a crank portion P5142 (crank portion) capable of moving between a gear waiting position (first position) shown in FIG. 202 and a gear performance position (second position) shown in FIG. It is a rotating gear.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the crank portion P
5142 allows other members to operate.
Further, in this embodiment, the motor gear P5150 is driven by the rotation drive motor P5160.
By rotating , the crank gear P5140 can be displaced between the gear standby position (first position) and the gear effect position (second position).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can be adjusted by contacting the crank portion P5142, as shown in FIG.
02 and an arm performance position (fourth position) shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the crank portion P
5142 allows movement of link arm P5120.
Further, in this embodiment, by displacing the crank gear P5140 between the gear standby position (first position) and the gear effect position (second position), the link arm P5120 is moved to the arm standby position (third position). and the arm effect position (fourth position).

In addition, the link arm P5120 contacts the link arm P5120, so that the character object standby position (fifth position) shown in FIG. 202 and the character object production position shown in FIG. (Sixth position) and a operable lower accessory P5110 (third movable body).

According to such a configuration, the lower accessory P5110 can be operated by operating the link arm P5120.
Further, in this embodiment, the first control hole P5131 of the base member P5130 is formed linearly, and the second control hole P5132 is formed circularly. And the lower part P511
0 of the first boss portion P5113a is inserted into the first control hole P5131, and the second boss portion P5113
b and the boss portion P5114c are inserted into the second control hole P5132. By controlling the motion of the lower role P5110 by the linear hole and the arc hole in this way, the lower role P5110 moves to a position visible to the player while changing the inclination. therefore,
It is possible to improve the amusement of production.
In this embodiment, the lower accessory P5110 is provided with an accessory control arm P5114 that is rotatable with respect to the rear cover P5113. It is supported in the second control hole P5132 of the base member P5130 by (the boss portion P5114c of) the arm P5114. This makes it possible to smoothly move the lower accessory P5110 along the second control hole P5132.
In addition, the lower accessory P5110 is supported at a plurality of points (first boss P5113a, second boss P5113b, and boss P5114c) with respect to the first control hole P5131 and the second control hole P5132. , the stability of the posture of the lower accessory P5110 can be improved.

Further, the link arm P5120 is a swinging member that swings.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the crank portion P
5142 allows the link arm P5120 to swing.
Further, in this embodiment, when the link arm P5120 moves from the arm standby position (see FIG. 202) to the arm production position (see FIG. 204), the lower accessory P5110 at the accessory standby position (see FIG. 202) side (a position that generally overlaps with the lower accessory P5110 in rear view). Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a new space for swinging the link arm P5120, space can be saved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations.
Various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 is the screw hole P51.
74, the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided on the shaft portion P5173 of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174, and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 is provided on the cover main body P5171. (shaft portion P5173 and cover main body P
5171), as shown in FIG.
It does not have to be in contact with the bottom surface of 5174 .

Further, in this embodiment, the screw hole P51 of the shaft portion P5173 of the cover member P5170
74 is formed to extend forward from the inner bottom surface P5171a of the cover body P5171 and to extend rearward from the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover body P5171.
As shown in FIG. 206, the cover main body P5171 is penetrated (the cover main body P5171
) may be formed so as to extend to the outer bottom surface P5171b. This facilitates machining of the screw holes P5174.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 206, the screw P5180 may be provided so as to penetrate forward beyond the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover body P5171. As a result, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be easily received by the screw P5180. Alternatively, the screw hole P
Even if the screw 5174 penetrates the cover main body P5171, the screw P5180 extends further forward than the inner bottom surface P5171a of the cover main body P5171 and further than the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5171, as shown in FIG. It may be provided so as to extend to the rear.

As described above, in another example of the present embodiment, the screw holes P5174 are provided through the cover member P5170.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate machining of the screw holes P5174.
In the example shown in FIG. 206, the screw P5180 is attached to the outer bottom surface P of the cover main body P5171.
It is provided so as to penetrate to the front of 5171b. As a result, the shaft portion P517
3 can be easily received by the screw P5180, and damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the fixing means (the screw P5180) according to the present invention fixes the movable body (the crank gear P5140) in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft (the shaft P5173). , The movable body to be fixed by the fixing means is not limited to a rotatable body, and may be capable of any movement (for example, linear movement). For example, the fixing means according to the present invention can be applied to fix the link arm P5120 and the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140. Also, the fixing means according to the present invention can be applied to fixing the base member P5130 and the lower accessory P5110.

[Production device P6000]
192 and 208 to 233, the effect device P6000 according to this embodiment will be described below.

In the drawings (for example, FIG. 213, etc.) used in the following description, the members may be appropriately colored for convenience in order to clarify the outline of each member.

The production device P6000 operates at an appropriate timing to give the player a visual impression (
impact). The effect device P6000 is installed on the game board P1100 as shown in FIG. More specifically, the effect device P6000 is installed above the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The effect device P6000 is an opening/closing accessory P6300, which will be described later.
And by controlling the movement of the decoration accessory P6600, a visual impression is given to the player. As shown in FIGS. 208 to 213, the effect device P6000 includes a base portion P6100, opening/closing control means P6200, opening/closing role P6300, bullet control means P6400, and bullet role P6500.
, a decoration accessory P6600 and a fixed decoration part P6700.

The base portion P6100 shown in FIGS. 208 to 214 includes opening/closing control means P6200, opening/closing accessories P6300, bullet control means P6400, bullet accessories P6500, and decorative accessories P6600.
And a fixed decoration part P6700 is provided. A detailed description of the opening/closing control means P6200, the opening/closing accessory P6300, the bullet control means P6400, and the bullet accessory P6500 will be given later. The base portion P6100 includes a first base portion P6110 and a second base portion P6.
120 and a third base portion P6130.

The first base portion P6110 shown in FIGS. 210, 211, 213 and 214 constitutes the front portion of the base portion P6100 (see FIG. 213). Also, the first base portion P
6110 is provided with a part of the bullet control means P6400 (a drive transmission gear P6420 and a guide gear P6430, which will be described later) and an opening/closing accessory P6300 (a right logo accessory P6310 and a left logo accessory P6320, which will be described later) (see FIG. 211). . The first base portion P6110 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The first base portion P6110 is elongated in the left-right direction. The first base portion P6110 includes a bearing opening P6111, a right shaft bearing portion P6112 and a left shaft bearing portion P6113.

A bearing opening P6111 shown in FIG. 214 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The bearing opening P6111 is located substantially in the center in the horizontal direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the first base portion P6110. The bearing opening P6111 is a guide gear P643, which will be described later.
0 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The right shaft bearing portion P6112 shown in FIG. 211 passes through the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The right shaft bearing portion P6112 is connected to the first base portion P6110.
located at the top of the right part of the The right shaft bearing portion P6112 pivotally supports a right crankshaft P6312 (main shaft P6312a) of a right logo accessory P6310, which will be described later.

The left shaft bearing portion P6113 passes through the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The left shaft bearing portion P6113 is located at the upper portion of the left portion of the first base portion P6110. The left shaft bearing portion P6113 is attached to the left logo accessory P632, which will be described later.
0 left crankshaft P6322 (main shaft P6322a).

The second base portion P6120 shown in FIGS. 210, 213 and 214 covers the rear side of the first base portion P6110 and accommodates the bullet accessory P6500. The second base portion P6120 includes a cover portion P6121 and a holder portion P6122.

The cover portion P6121 covers the opening on the rear side of the first base portion P6110. The cover portion P6121 has a plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the front-rear direction. Cover part P61
21 is elongated in the left-right direction. The cover portion P6121 is attached to the first base portion P
It is fixed to the rear of 6110.

The holder part P6122 accommodates the bullet accessory P6500. Holder part P6
122 has a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape that opens forward. The holder portion P6122 is formed to protrude rearward from the cover portion P6121. The holder portion P6122 is positioned approximately in the center in the horizontal direction and approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the cover portion P6121. Moreover, the holder part P61
22 is positioned so as to overlap the bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110 in a rear view. The holder part P6122 has a bottom part P6122a and a side part P6122c.

The bottom portion P6122a shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 constitutes the bottom wall of the holder portion P6122. The bottom portion P6122a is positioned at the rear end of the holder portion P6122. Bottom part P
6122a includes a bearing portion P6122b.

The bearing portion P6122b rotatably supports the bullet accessory P6500 (regulating portion P6530, which will be described later) about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The bearing portion P6122b is connected to the bottom portion P61
22a in the front-rear direction.

The side portion P6122c constitutes a side wall of the holder portion P6122. Side P61
22c has an opening P6122d.

The opening P6122d is a portion that opens at the side P6122c. Opening P61
22d has a shape obtained by notching the upper and lower portions of the side portion P6122c. The illustrated example shows an example in which the opening P6122d is provided in the vicinity of the bottom P6122a.

The third base portion P6130 shown in FIGS. 208 to 214 has opening/closing control means P620.
0 is provided. The third base portion P6130 has a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The third base portion P6130 is fixed to the rear portion of the first base portion P6110. The third base portion P6130 is the cover portion P61 of the second base portion P6120.
21 (see FIG. 213). The third base portion P6130 has an opening P61
31, a right guide pin through hole P6132 and a left guide pin through hole P6133.

The opening P6131 shown in FIGS. 212 and 214 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The opening P6131 is positioned approximately in the center in the horizontal direction and approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the third base portion P6130. The opening P6131 opens from the front to the holder P612.
2 is inserted (see FIG. 214). Further, as will be described later, a front-rear sensor P6450 provided on the right side of the holder portion P6122 in the cover portion P6121 is inserted through the opening portion P6131.

The right guide pin through hole P6132 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The right guide pin through-hole P6132 is located in the upper portion of the right portion of the third base portion P6130. The right guide pin through-hole P6132 is an elongated arc-shaped hole that slopes downward to the right when viewed from the rear. A right crank guide pin P6312c of a right crankshaft P6312, which will be described later, is inserted through the right guide pin through hole P6132.
The right guide pin through hole P6132 guides the movement of the right crank guide pin P6312c.

The left guide pin through hole P6133 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The left guide pin through hole P6133 is located in the upper part of the left portion of the third base portion P6130. The left guide pin through-hole P6133 is an elongated arc-shaped hole that is inclined to the lower right when viewed from the back. A left crank guide pin P6322c of a left crankshaft P6322, which will be described later, is inserted through the left guide pin through hole P6133.
The left guide pin through hole P6133 guides the movement of the left crank guide pin P6322c.

The opening/closing control means P6200 shown in FIGS.
08 and 209, and the open position shown in FIGS. 215 and 216. In addition, the opening/closing control means P6200 regulates the rotational movement of a bullet accessory P6500 (regulating portion P6530), which will be described later. A detailed description of the opening/closing accessory P6300 will be given later.

The opening/closing control means P6200 controls the movement of the opening/closing accessory P6300 according to a control signal from the effect device control circuit 338 (control means). The opening/closing control means P6200 controls the first motor P
6210, an output gear P6220, a guide portion P6230, a slide rack P6240 and a slide sensor P6250.

The first motor P6210 shown in FIG. 212 is a drive source for opening and closing the opening/closing accessory P6300. The first motor P6210 is provided on the front left portion of the third base portion P6130. The first motor P6210 is provided such that the output shaft passes through the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction and protrudes rearward.

The output gear P6220 takes out the driving force of the first motor P6210. The output gear P6220 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft of the first motor P6210. Output gear P
The driving force transmitted via 6220 slides the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction. A detailed description of the slide rack P6240 will be given later.

The guide portion P6230 shown in FIG. 212 guides the sliding of the slide rack P6240 in the horizontal direction. The guide part P6230 includes a right guide pin P6231 and a left guide pin P6232.

The right guide pin P6231 guides the right portion of the slide rack P6240. The right guide pin P6231 is inserted through a right guide hole P6242 of a slide rack P6240, which will be described later. The right guide pin P6231 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the third base portion P6130. The right guide pin P6231 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis extending in the front-rear direction. The right guide pin P6231 is provided at the top of the right portion of the third base portion P6130. A right guide hole P6 is provided at the rear end of the right guide pin P6231.
A washer is provided to prevent it from falling off from 242 .

The left guide pin P6232 guides the left portion of the slide rack P6240. The left guide pin P6232 is inserted through a left guide hole P6243 of a slide rack P6240, which will be described later. The left guide pin P6232 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the third base portion P6130. The left guide pin P6232 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis extending in the front-rear direction. The left guide pin P6232 is provided substantially in the vertical center of the left portion of the third base portion P6130. A washer is provided at the rear end of the left guide pin P6232 to prevent it from coming off the left guide hole P6243.

The slide rack P6240 shown in FIGS. 210, 212, 217 and 218 is
By sliding in the left-right direction with respect to the base portion P6130, it is possible to move the opening and closing accessory P6300 and to regulate the rotation of the bullet accessory P6500 (regulating portion P6530). The slide rack P6240 has a closed state located on the left side in the sliding direction shown in FIG. 212, an open/locked state located in the middle of the sliding direction shown in FIG. 217, and an open/unlocked state located on the right side in the sliding direction shown in FIG. state and can be slid into. A detailed description of the closed state, open/locked state, and open/unlocked state will be given later.

The slide rack P6240 has a plate-like shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The slide rack P6240 is arranged behind the third base portion P6130. The slide rack P6240 has a rack tooth portion P6241, a right guide hole P6242, and a left guide hole P62.
43, right crank guide hole P6244, left crank guide hole P6245, opening P6
246, a locking portion P6247 and a detected portion P6248.

The rack tooth portion P6241 meshes with the output gear P6220. Rack tooth P6
241 is located at the lower part of the left part of the slide rack P6240. Rack tooth P
The rotation (driving force) transmitted by the output gear P6220 is transmitted to 6241, so that the slide rack P6240 can move in the left-right direction.

The right guide hole P6242 is through which the right guide pin P6231 is inserted. The right guide hole P6242 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The right guide hole P6242 has an elongated hole shape elongated in the left-right direction. The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the right guide hole P6242 is smaller than the outer diameter of the washer of the right guide pin P6231. The right guide hole P6242 is located at the upper part of the right side of the slide rack P6240.

The left guide hole P6243 is through which the left guide pin P6232 is inserted. The left guide hole P6243 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The left guide hole P6243 has an elongated hole shape elongated in the left-right direction. The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the left guide hole P6243 is smaller than the outer diameter of the washer of the left guide pin P6232. The left guide hole P6243 is located on the left side of the slide rack P6240 so that the rack tooth portion P624
1 above.

A right crank guide pin P6312c of a right crankshaft P6312, which will be described later, is inserted through the right crank guide hole P6244. Right crank guide hole P62
44 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction.

The right crank guide hole P6244 is an elongated hole bent in a substantially S shape when viewed from the rear. More specifically, the right crank guide hole P6244 has a right portion that extends in the left-right direction, a center portion (inclined portion) that extends obliquely downward to the left, and a left portion that extends in the left-right direction. there is The right crank guide hole P6244 is for the slide rack P6.
240, located below the right guide hole P6242.

A left crank guide pin P6322c of a left crankshaft P6322, which will be described later, is inserted through the left crank guide hole P6245. Left crank guide hole P62
45 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction.

The left crank guide hole P6245 is an elongated hole bent in a substantially S shape when viewed from the rear. More specifically, the left crank guide hole P6245 has a right portion that extends in the left-right direction, a center portion (inclined portion) that extends obliquely downward to the left, and a left portion that extends in the left-right direction. there is The left crank guide hole P6245 is connected to the slide rack P6.
240, located above the left guide hole P6243.

The opening P6246 is through which the holder P6122 and a front-rear sensor P6450, which will be described later, are inserted. The opening P6246 penetrates the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The opening P6246 is elongated in the left-right direction. Also, the opening P6246
has a substantially circular shape in the rear view at the middle portion in the left-right direction. The opening P6246 is positioned approximately in the center in the horizontal direction and approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the slide rack P6240.

The lock part P6247 locks part of the motion of the bullet accessory P6500. A detailed description of the operation of the bullet accessory P6500 will be given later. The lock portion P6247 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the slide rack P6240. The lock portion P6247 has a shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the back. The lock portion P6247 is connected to the opening P6246.
A pair is provided above and below with the . The lock portion P6247 is positioned substantially in the center of the opening P6246 in the left-right direction.

A detected portion P6248 shown in FIG. 212 is a portion detected by a slide sensor P6250, which will be described later. The part to be detected P6248 is located at the bottom of the slide rack P6240,
protrude downward. The portion to be detected P6248 has a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The detected portion P6248 is positioned at the center of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction. The detected part P6248 includes a first detected part P6248a, a second detected part P6248b and a third detected part P6248b.
is provided with a detected portion P6248c.

The first detected portion P6248a constitutes the right portion of the detected portion P6248.

The second detected portion P6248b constitutes the central portion of the detected portion P6248 in the left-right direction.
A lower end portion of the second detected portion P6248b is located above the first detected portion P6248a.

The third detected portion P6248c constitutes the left portion of the detected portion P6248. A lower end portion of the third detected portion P6248c is located above the second detected portion P6248b.

The slide sensor P6250 is capable of detecting the detected portion P6248. The slide sensor P6250 is provided below the detected portion P6248. Slide sensor P625
0 comprises a first slide sensor P6251, a second slide sensor P6252 and a third slide sensor P6253.

The first slide sensor P6251 is capable of detecting the first detected portion P6248a. The first slide sensor P6251 is located near the first detected portion P6248a in a rear view.
, the first detected portion P6248a is detected. First slide sensor P6
251 denotes the first detected portion P62 of the closed slide rack P6240 shown in FIG.
It is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping with 48a. In this embodiment, the first slide sensor P6251 is connected to the first detected portion P624 of the closed slide rack P6240.
It is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of 8a. As a result, the first slide sensor P62
When the slide rack P6240 slides to the right from the closed state, 51 no longer overlaps with the first detectable portion P6248a (becomes undetectable).

The second slide sensor P6252 is capable of detecting the second detected portion P6248b. The second slide sensor P6252 is located at the second detected portion P6248b in a rear view.
, the second detected portion P6248b is detected. Second slide sensor P6
252 is the second detected portion P62 of the closed slide rack P6240 shown in FIG.
48b and is arranged at a position (detectable position). Also, the second slide sensor P
6252 is a position where the closed slide rack P6240 slides to the right and does not overlap with the second detectable part P6248b when it reaches the open/locked state shown in FIG. 217 (position where detection becomes impossible). placed in As a result, the second slide sensor P6252
The second detectable portion P6248b can be detected until immediately before the slide rack P6240 changes from the closed state to the open/locked state, and when the slide rack P6240 changes to the open/locked state, the second detectable portion P6248b cannot be detected. becomes.

The third slide sensor P6253 is capable of detecting the third detected portion P6248c. The third slide sensor P6253 is located at the third detected portion P6248c in rear view.
, the third detected portion P6248c is detected. Third slide sensor P6
253 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping the third detectable portion P6248c of the slide rack P6240 in the closed state shown in FIG. 212 and the open/locked state shown in FIG. Further, the third slide sensor P6253 detects the third detected part P6248c when the slide rack P6240 in the open/unlocked state slides to the right and reaches the open/unlocked state shown in FIG. It is placed at a position where it no longer overlaps (a position where it becomes undetectable). As a result, the third slide sensor P6253 can detect the third detected portion P6248c until immediately before the slide rack P6240 changes from the closed state to the open/unlocked state, and the slide rack P6240 enters the open/unlocked state. For example, the third detected part P
6248c becomes undetectable.

As the first slide sensor P6251, the second slide sensor P6252, and the third slide sensor P6253, various sensors capable of detecting the detected portion P6248, such as photosensors, can be employed.

The opening/closing accessory P6300 shown in FIGS. 208 to 213 can be moved between the closed position and the open position by movement control by the opening/closing control means P6200. The opening and closing accessory P6300 is
It has a right side logo P6310 and a left side logo P6320.

The right logo accessory P6310 constitutes the right part of the opening/closing accessory P6300. The right side logo accessory P6310 is connected to the right side portion of the first base portion P6110 so as to be rotatable about an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The right side logo accessory P6310 is the right side accessory body P6311
and a right crankshaft P6312.

The right accessory main body P6311 shown in FIG. 213 gives a visual impression to the player by rotating. The right side accessory main body P6311 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. A logo-like pattern is provided on the front surface of the right accessory main body P6311.

The right crankshaft P6312 shown in FIG. 211 transmits the lateral movement of the slide rack P6240 to the right accessory main body P6311. Right crankshaft P6
312 is rotatably supported by the first base portion P6110. Right crankshaft P
6312 comprises a main shaft P6312a, an arm P6312b and a right crank guide pin P6312c.

The main shaft P6312a is mounted on the right shaft bearing portion P6 of the first base portion P6110.
112 is inserted. The main shaft P6312a has a right shaft bearing portion P
6112 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Main shaft P631
2a has its front end fixed to the right accessory main body P6311.

The arm P6312b connects the main shaft P6312a and a right crank guide pin P6312c, which will be described later. The arm P6312b is connected to the main shaft P
It is formed to extend in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (leftward in FIG. 211) from the rear end of 6312a.

The right crank guide pin P6312c, as shown in FIG.
130 and the right crank guide hole P6244 of the slide rack P6240. The right crank guide pin P6312c is
It protrudes rearward from the tip of the arm P6312b (the end on the side opposite to the main shaft P6312a). The right crank guide pin P6312c has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis extending in the longitudinal direction.

A right crank guide hole P6244 is provided at the rear end of the right crank guide pin P6312c.
A washer is provided to prevent it from falling off. The outer diameter of the washer is larger than the width dimension of the right guide pin through hole P6132 and the right crank guide hole P6244 (the dimension orthogonal to the longitudinal direction in rear view).

The left logo accessory P6320 constitutes the left portion of the opening/closing accessory P6300. The left logo accessory P6320 is connected to the left portion of the first base portion P6110 so as to be rotatable about an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The left side logo accessory P6320 is the left side accessory main body P6321
and a left crankshaft P6322.

The left accessory main body P6321 shown in FIG. 213 gives a visual impression to the player by rotating. The left accessory main body P6321 has a substantially plate-like shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. A logo-like pattern is provided on the front surface of the left accessory main body P6321.

The left crankshaft P6322 shown in FIG. 211 transmits the lateral movement of the slide rack P6240 to the left accessories body P6321. Left crankshaft P6
322 is rotatably supported by the first base portion P6110. Left crankshaft P
6322 comprises a main shaft P6322a, an arm P6322b and a left crank guide pin P6322c.

The main shaft P6322a is connected to the left shaft bearing portion P6 of the first base portion P6110.
113 is inserted. The main shaft P6322a has a left shaft bearing portion P
6113 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Main shaft P632
2a has its front end fixed to the left accessory body P6321.

The arm P6322b connects the main shaft P6322a and a left crank guide pin P6322c, which will be described later. The arm P6322b is connected to the main shaft P
It is formed to extend in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (leftward in FIG. 211) from the rear end of 6322a.

The left crank guide pin P6322c is inserted through the left guide pin through hole P6133 of the third base portion P6130 and the left crank guide hole P6245 of the slide rack P6240. The left crank guide pin P6322c protrudes rearward from the tip of the arm P6322b (the end on the side opposite to the main shaft P6322a). The left crank guide pin P6322c has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis extending in the longitudinal direction.

A left crank guide hole P6245 is provided at the rear end of the left crank guide pin P6322c.
A washer is provided to prevent it from falling off. The outer diameter of the washer is larger than the width dimension of the left guide pin through hole P6133 and the left crank guide hole P6245 (the dimension perpendicular to the longitudinal direction in rear view).

Below, the closed position and open position of the opening/closing accessory P6300 as described above will be described.

In the closed position, as shown in FIGS. 208 and 209, the right side logo material P6310 and the left side logo material P6320 are positioned so that the central portion (bullet material P6500, which will be described later) of the front surface of the first base portion P6110 in the left-right direction is This position is covered when viewed from the front so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In the closed position, the logos on the front of the right side logo feature P6310 and the left side logo feature P6320 are combined to display a continuous logo (characters) to create a specific meaning.

In the open position, as shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the right side logo material P6310 and the left side logo material P6320 are positioned at the center of the front surface of the first base portion P6110 in the left-right direction (the portion where the bullet control means P6400 is located). is exposed when viewed from the front so as to be visible to the player.

The right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 rotate about the axes of the main shafts P6312a and P6322a as the slide rack P6240 of the opening/closing control means P6200 slides, thereby opening and closing positions. Moving.

The right side logo feature P6310 and the left side logo feature P6320 are in the closed position when the slide rack P6240 is in the closed state. Also, the right side logo material P6310 and the left side logo material P6320 are in the open position when the slide rack P6240 is in the open/lock state and the open/unlock state.

212, 217 and 218, the states of the presentation device P6000 with the slide rack P6240 in the closed state, open/locked state and open/unlocked state will be described, respectively.

In the closed state shown in FIG. 212, the slide rack P6240 is positioned on the left side in the sliding direction. In the closed state, the open/close feature P6300 (right side logo feature P6310 and left side logo feature P6320) is in the closed position.

In the closed state, the right guide pin P6231 and the left guide pin P6232 are positioned at the right ends of the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P6243. In the closed state, a right crank guide pin P6312c and a left crank guide pin P6322c are provided at the right ends of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.
is located.

In addition, in the closed state, the first detected portion P6248a of the detected portion P6248, the second
The detected portion P6248b and the third detected portion P6248c are located at positions detectable by the first slide sensor P6251, the second slide sensor P6252 and the third slide sensor P6253 of the slide sensor P6250.

In the unlocked/locked state shown in FIG. 217, the slide rack P6240 is positioned midway in the slide direction. In the unlocked/locked state, the opening/closing accessory P6300 (right side logo accessory P6
310 and the left logo accessory P6320) are in the open position.

In the open/locked state, the right guide pin P6231 and the left guide pin P6232 are positioned in the middle of the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P6243 in the left-right direction. In the unlocked/locked state, a right crank guide pin P6312 is provided at the left end of the inclined portions of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.
c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located.

In the open/locked state, the first detected portion P6248a and the second detected portion P6248b are connected to the first slide sensor P6251 and the second slide sensor P6252.
located in a position undetectable by Further, the third detected portion P6248c is located at a position detectable by the third slide sensor P6253.

In the open/unlocked state shown in FIG. 218, the slide rack P6240 is positioned on the right side in the slide direction. In the open/unlocked state, the opening and closing accessory P6300 (the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320) are in the open position.

In the open/unlocked state, the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P624
3, a right guide pin P6231 and a left guide pin P6232 are positioned. In the closed state, the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P
At the left end of 6245, a right crank guide pin P6312c and a left crank guide pin P6322c are located.

In the open/unlocked state, the first detected portion P62 of the detected portion P6248
48a, the second detected portion P6248b, and the third detected portion P6248c are connected to the first slide sensor P6251 and the second slide sensor P6 of the slide sensor P6250, respectively.
252 and the third slide sensor P6253.

The control means can determine the position of the slide rack P6240 based on the information regarding the detection of the detected portion P6248 by the slide sensor P6250.

The bullet control means P6400 shown in FIGS. 211, 214, and 225 to 227 places the bullet accessory P6500 in the standby position shown in FIGS.
As shown in 0, it controls the action of moving to the performance position moved forward from the standby position. A detailed description of the bullet accessory P6500 will be given later. bullet control means P
6400 responds to a control signal from the effect device control circuit 338 (control means), the bullet role P
Controls movement of 6500. The bullet control means P6400 includes a second motor P6410, a drive transmission gear P6420, a guide gear P6430, a rotation sensor P6440, and a forward/backward sensor P64.
50.

A second motor P6410 shown in FIG. 211 is a drive source for operating the bullet accessory P6500. The second motor P6410 is provided on the right side of the second base portion P6120 (not shown in FIG. 211). The second motor P6410 is provided such that the output shaft passes through the second base portion P6120 in the front-rear direction and protrudes forward.

The drive transmission gear P6420 extracts the driving force of the second motor P6410 and transmits the driving force to the guide gear P6430, which will be described later. Drive transmission gear P64
20 comprises an output gear P6421, a first gear P6422, a second gear P6423 and a third gear P6424.

The output gear P6421 takes out the driving force of the second motor P6410. The output gear P6421 is fixed to the front end of the output shaft of the second motor P6410.

The first gear P6422 is arranged substantially to the left of the output gear P6421, and the output gear P642
meshes with 1. The first gear P6422 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P6423 is arranged substantially to the upper left of the first gear P6422, and the first gear P6423
meshes with 6422. The second gear P6423 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The third gear P6424 is arranged substantially to the left and below the second gear P6423, and the second gear P6424
It meshes with 6423. The third gear P6424 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The guide gear P6430 shown in FIGS. 211, 214, and 225 to 227 transmits the drive force transmitted through the drive transmission gear P6420 to the bullet accessory P6500. The guide gear P6430 is attached to the bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110,
It is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The guide gear P6430 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The guide gear P6430 is arranged with the opening direction facing the front-rear direction. Behind the guide gear P6430, the cover portion P6121 of the second base portion P6120 is slidably provided (see FIG. 214). The guide gear P6430 includes a fitting portion P6431, a gear portion P6432, a projection portion P6433, and a detected portion P6434.

The fitting portion P6431 shown in FIGS. 225 to 227 is fitted into the bearing opening portion P6111 of the first base portion P6110 so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 214). . The fitting portion P6431 constitutes the front portion of the guide gear P6430.

The gear portion P6432 meshes with the third gear P6424. Gear part P6432
is provided on the outer surface of the rear portion of the guide gear P6430.

The protrusion P6433 protrudes from the inner surface of the guide gear P6430. A pair of protrusions P6433 are provided on the inner surface of the guide gear P6430. Projection P643
3 is provided on the inner surface of the fitting portion P6431.

The detected portion P6434 is detected by a rotation sensor P6440, which will be described later. The detected portion P6434 protrudes from the outer surface of the guide gear P6430. Detected part P6434
has a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The detected portion P6434 is provided on the outer surface of the rear portion of the guide gear P6430.

A rotation sensor P6440 shown in FIG. 211 detects a detected portion P6434.
The rotation sensor P6440 is mounted on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 to move the guide gear P64.
30 on the left side. The rotation sensor P6440 is arranged so as to be able to detect the detectable part P6434 in a state where the bullet accessory P6500 is positioned at a lockable position described later. As the rotation sensor P6440, various sensors capable of detecting the detected portion P6434, such as a photosensor, can be employed.

A front-rear sensor P6450 shown in FIG. 210 can detect the position of an outer spiral member P6510 of a bullet accessory P6500, which will be described later. The front/rear sensor P6450 has a lever portion (not shown) that detects a rearward pressure. As will be described later, when the bullet P6500 moves backward, the lever portion is pressed by the bullet P6500 (pressing portion P6513a), and the front-rear sensor P6450 detects that the bullet P6500 is at a predetermined front-rear position (which will be described later). It can be detected that it is in the standby position for The front/rear sensor P6450 is mounted on the second base portion P61.
20 is provided on the right side of the holder portion P6122 on the rear surface of the cover portion P6121.

The bullet role P6500 shown in FIGS. 214 and 221 to 229 includes bullet control means P6.
By movement control by 400, it is possible to move between a standby position and an effect position. The bullet accessory P6500 is elongated in the front-rear direction. The bullet accessory P6500 is capable of a rectilinear motion (front-back motion) of moving in the front-rear direction, and a rotational motion (rotational motion) of rotating about an axis facing the front-back direction. The bullet accessory P6500 includes an outer spiral member P6510,
It comprises an inner spiral member P6520, a restricting portion P6530 and a light emitting portion P6540.

The outer spiral member P6510, shown in FIGS. 225, 226, 228 and 229,
It constitutes the outer part of the bullet accessory P6500. The outer spiral member P6510 is elongated in the front-rear direction. The outer spiral member P6510 has a hollow shape. The outer spiral member P6510 includes an outer trunk portion P6511, a protrusion P6512,
It comprises a rear part P6513, a bullet part P6514 and a first spring P6515.

The outer trunk portion P6511 constitutes the trunk portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The outer trunk portion P6511 has a substantially cylindrical shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The outer trunk P6511 is
It is arranged inside the guide gear P6430. The outer trunk portion P6511 has an outer spiral groove portion P65
11a and front and rear grooves P6511b.

The outer spiral groove portion P6511a shown in FIGS. 226(a), 228 and 229 is a spiral groove formed on the outer surface of the outer trunk portion P6511. Outer spiral groove P65
11a is formed over substantially the entire front-rear direction on the outer surface of the outer trunk portion P6511.
In this embodiment, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is two parallel spiral grooves (double spiral grooves). Further, in this embodiment, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is replaced with the outer trunk portion P65.
The outer surface of 11 is made into the length which makes one round in general. The shape such as the length of the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is appropriately set according to the motion of the bullet accessory P6500. As shown in FIG. 226(a), the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is engaged with a pair of protrusions P6433 of the guide gear P6430.

The front-rear groove portion P6511b shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 is a linear groove formed on the outer surface of the outer trunk portion P6511. The front-rear groove portion P6511b is formed on the outer surface of the outer trunk portion P6511 from the front end portion of the outer trunk portion P6511 to an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. A pair of front and rear groove portions P6511b are provided on the outer surface of the outer trunk portion P6511. Front and rear groove P
6511b has a contact surface P6511c.

The contact surface P6511c is a surface facing forward in the front-rear groove portion P6511b. Contact surface P
6511c constitutes the rear end portion (terminal end portion) of the front-rear groove portion P6511b.

The protrusion P6512 shown in FIGS. 226(b) and 229 protrudes from the inner surface of the outer body P6511. A pair of protrusions P6512 are provided on the inner surface of the outer trunk portion P6511. The projecting portion P6512 is provided on the rear portion of the inner surface of the outer trunk portion P6511.

The rear part P6513 shown in FIG. 228 constitutes the rear part of the bullet accessory P6500. The rear portion P6513 has an annular shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The rear portion P6513 is fixed to the rear end portion of the outer trunk portion P6511. The rear portion P6513 has a pressing portion P6513a.

The pressing portion P6513a presses the lever portion of the front/rear sensor P6450. The pressing portion P6513a has a concave shape that opens toward the rear. The pressing part P6513a is
Located on the right side of the rear P6513. The pressing part P6513a presses the lever part of the front and rear sensor P6450 in a state where the bullet accessory P6500 is positioned at the standby position.

The bullet part P6514 constitutes the front part of the bullet accessory P6500. bullet part P
6514 is formed by a transmissive member capable of transmitting light. The bullet part P6514 is
It has a bullet body P6514a and a collar P6514b.

The bullet body P6514a constitutes most of the bullet P6514. The bullet main body P6514a has a shape that imitates a bullet (warhead). Specifically, the bullet main body P6514a has a rear portion that has a substantially cylindrical shape, and a front portion that tapers toward the front.

The collar portion P6514b constitutes the rear portion of the bullet portion P6514. Collar P65
14b has a substantially disk shape with a larger diameter than the rear part of the bullet main body P6514a. The outer diameter of the collar portion P6514b is larger than the outer diameter of the outer trunk portion P6511. The flange P6514b is
It is provided at the tip of the outer body P6511.

The first spring P6515 is a spring fitted to the outer trunk portion P6511. first spring P
6515 constitutes a compression coil spring. One end (front end) of the first spring P6515 is
It abuts on the collar portion P6514b.

The inner spiral member P6520 shown in FIGS. 226(b), 228 and 229 can be housed inside the outer spiral member P6510. inner spiral member P652
0 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The inner spiral member P6520 has a hollow shape.
The outer diameter of the inner spiral member P6520 is equal to the outer barrel portion P6 of the outer spiral member P6510.
smaller than the inner diameter of 511. The inner spiral member P6520 has an inner spiral groove portion P6521
Equipped with

The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is a spiral groove formed on the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520. The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is connected to the inner spiral member P652.
0, it is formed over substantially the entire front-rear direction. The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is
The outer spiral groove portion P6511a has a spiral direction opposite to that of the outer spiral groove portion P6511a. In this embodiment, the inner spiral groove portion P
6521 is two parallel helical grooves (double helical grooves). In this embodiment,
The inner spiral groove portion P6521 has a length that makes one turn around the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520. The shape such as the length of the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is appropriately set according to the motion of the bullet accessory P6500. As shown in FIG. 226(b), the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is engaged with a pair of protrusions P6512 of the outer trunk portion P6511.

212 to 214, the restriction portion P6530 shown in FIG.
Bullet accessory P6500 (inner spiral member P6
520) is rotatably supported, and the bullet accessory P6500 (inner spiral member P65
20) can be regulated. The regulating portion P6530 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The restricting portion P6530 has a circular upper and lower portion that are notched in a front view. The restricting portion P6530 is fixed to the rear end portion of the inner spiral member P6520. The restricting portion P6530 includes a shaft portion P6531, a restricting piece portion P6532, and an opening portion P6533.

The shaft portion P6531 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120 (see FIG. 214). The shaft portion P6531 has a substantially cylindrical shape with the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P6531 is attached to the bearing portion P6122 of the bottom portion P6122a of the holder portion P6122.
b is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. As a result, the inner spiral member P6520 is connected to the second base portion P612 via the shaft portion P6531 of the restricting portion P6530.
0 holder portion P6122 so as to be rotatable.

The restricting piece portion P6532 is a portion capable of restricting the rotational movement of the bullet accessory P6500. The restricting piece P6532 constitutes the upper end and the lower end of the restricting portion P6530. Regulating piece P653
2 is flat. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the regulation piece P6532
are exposed through the opening P6122d of the side portion P6122c of the holder portion P6122.
That is, the restricting piece P6532 overlaps the opening P6122d in plan view (bottom view). The restricting piece P6532 abuts on the pair of locks P6247, so that the restricting portion P
Rotation of 6530 (inner spiral member P6520) is restricted.

The opening P6533 shown in FIG. 228 penetrates the restricting portion P6530 in the front-rear direction. In the illustrated example, the opening P6533 has a vertically elongated shape.

The light-emitting portion P6540 shown in FIG. 228 causes the bullet portion P6514 to emit light. The light emitting part P6540 is located at the bottom part P6122a of the holder part P6122 of the second base part P6120.
provided in The light emitting portion P6540 emits light according to a control signal from the control means. The light emitting part P6540 comprises a substrate P6541 and an inner lens P6542.

The substrate P6541 is mounted with appropriate light emitting means.

The inner lens P6542 guides the light from the light emitting means forward. In the example,
The inner lens P6542 has a shape in which the central portion in the vertical and horizontal directions protrudes forward. The portion of the inner lens P6542 protruding forward is inserted through the opening P6533 of the restricting portion P6530.

221 to 225, the decorative accessory P6600 shown in FIG. 227 is the bullet accessory P650.
0 can be moved. The decorative accessory P6600 has a two-layer laminated structure (two independent members (a first decorative accessory P6610 and a second decorative accessory P662 described later) in the front-rear direction.
0) are arranged such that at least a portion thereof overlaps each other when viewed in the front-rear direction). The decorative accessory P6600 consists of a first decorative accessory P6610 and a second decorative accessory P662.
0.

The first decorative accessory P6610 constitutes the front side layer (first layer) of the decorative accessory P6600. The first decorative accessory P6610 is the outer body portion P of the outer spiral member P6510.
6511 is fitted. The first decorative accessory P6610 can move back and forth and rotate along with the motion of the bullet accessory P6500. The first decoration accessory P6610 comprises a first decoration base part P6611 and a first decoration part P6612.

The first decorative base portion P6611 shown in FIGS. 225 and 227(c) is fitted to the outer trunk portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The first decorative base part P6611 is
It has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The first decorative base part P6611 is
It has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. The first decorative base portion P6611 has an opening P66
11a, a protrusion P6611b, a spring receiving portion P6611c, a shaft portion P6611d and a second spring P6611f.

The opening P6611a penetrates the first decoration base P6611 in the front-rear direction. The inner diameter of the opening P6611a is equal to that of the outer trunk P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510.
larger than the outer diameter of In addition, the inner diameter of the opening P6611a is equal to that of the flange P6 of the bullet P6514.
smaller than the outer diameter of 514b. The outer trunk portion P6511 is inserted through the opening P6611a.

The protrusion P6611b protrudes from the inner surface of the opening P6611a. A pair of protrusions P6611b are provided on the inner surface of the opening P6611a. Projection P661
1b is the front-rear groove portion P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 (outer trunk portion P6511).
is engaged so as to be relatively movable in the front-rear direction in the front-rear groove portion P6511b (Fig. 230
reference). In addition, the projecting portion P6611b is connected to the front-rear groove portion P6511b by the outer spiral member P.
6510 are engaged so as to be immovable relative to each other in the circumferential direction.

The spring receiving portion P6611c receives the first spring P6515. Spring receiving part P
6611c is recessed rearward on the front surface of the first decorative base portion P6611. The spring receiving portion P6611c is provided around the opening P6611a. Spring receiving part P
6611c contacts the other end (rear end) of the first spring P6515.

The shaft portion P6611d protrudes rearward from the first decorative base portion P6611. The shaft portion P6611d has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis extending in the front-rear direction. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of the shaft portions P6611d are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer portion of the first decoration base portion P6611. A rear end portion of the shaft portion P6611d is provided with an enlarged diameter portion P6611e having a larger diameter than other portions.

The second spring P6611f is a spring fitted to the shaft portion P6611d. The second spring P6611f constitutes a compression coil spring. One end (front end) of the second spring P6611f contacts the rear surface of the first decorative base portion P6611.

The first decorative part P6612 shown in FIGS. 221 and 223 constitutes the decoration of the first decorative accessory P6610. The first decorative portion P6612 has a shape that imitates a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The first decoration part P6612 is provided on the front surface of the first decoration base part P6611. The first decoration part P6612 is the first decoration base part P6.
In the outer portion of 611, a plurality of them are provided circumferentially spaced apart from each other.

The second decorative accessory P6620 constitutes the rear side layer (second layer) of the decorative accessory P6600. The second decorative accessory P6620 is the outer body portion P of the outer spiral member P6510.
6511 is fitted. The second decorative accessory P6620 is arranged behind the first decorative accessory P6610. The second decorative accessory P6620 is arranged so that at least a part of it overlaps with the first decorative accessory P6610 when viewed from the front. The second decorative accessory P6620 can move back and forth and rotate along with the motion of the first decorative accessory P6610. The second decoration accessory P6620 comprises a second decoration base part P6621 and a second decoration part P6622.

The second decorative base portion P6621 shown in FIGS. 225 and 227(d) is supported on the outer trunk portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510, and the first decorative base portion P
6611 is connected. The second ornamental base portion P6621 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The second decorative base portion P6621 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. The outer diameter of the second decorative base portion P6621 is equal to that of the first decorative base portion P6
It is larger than the outer diameter of 611. The second decorative base portion P6621 has an opening P6621a and a shaft receiving portion P6621b.

The opening P6621a penetrates the second decorative base P6621 in the front-rear direction. The inner diameter of the opening P6621a is equal to that of the outer trunk P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510.
larger than the outer diameter of The outer trunk portion P6511 is inserted through the opening P6621a.

The shaft receiving portion P6621b passes through the second decorative base portion P6621 in the front-rear direction. The shaft receiving portion P6621b has a shaft portion P6611d (expanded diameter portion P661
1e) is inserted. The shaft receiving portion P6621b is connected to the shaft portion P6611.
The number corresponding to d (three in this embodiment) is provided. The inner diameter of the shaft receiving portion P6621b is smaller than the outer diameter of the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.

As shown in FIG. 230, the second ornamental base portion P6621 is connected to the first ornamental base portion P6611 via the shaft portion P6611d. The other end (rear end) of the second spring P6611f abuts against the portion around the shaft receiving portion P6621b on the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621. In addition, the portion around the shaft receiving portion P6621b on the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 can abut on the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.

The second decorative part P6622 shown in FIGS. 221 and 223 constitutes the decoration of the second decorative accessory P6620. The second decorative portion P6622 has a shape that imitates a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The second decoration part P6622 is provided on the front surface of the second decoration base part P6621. The second decorative portion P6622 is formed from the second decorative base portion P6.
In the outer portion of 621, a plurality of them are provided circumferentially spaced apart from each other.

The fixed decorative portion P6700 shown in FIG. 209 is a decoration fixed to the front surface of the base portion P6100. The fixed decorative portion P6700 has a shape that imitates a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The fixed decorative portion P6700 is arranged outside the second decorative portion P6622 in a front view. A plurality of fixed decorative portions P6700 are provided at intervals.

Below, the states of the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 as described above at the standby position and the performance position will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, 213, 214, 221 and 222, the standby position is the rearmost side of the range in which the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can move in the longitudinal direction. is the position of At the standby position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6
600 is a right logo accessory P6310 (right accessory body P6311) and a left logo accessory P63.
20 (left accessory main body P6321). At the standby position, the bullet part P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P662.
0 are close to each other.

At the standby position, if the opening/closing accessory P6300 is in the closed position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are covered with the opening/closing accessory P6300 in a front view, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize them.

In the following, the position of the bullet accessory P6500 at the standby position is the bullet accessory standby position, the position of the first decorative accessory P6610 at the standby position is the first decorative accessory standby position, and the second decoration at the standby position The position of the accessory P6620 will be referred to as the second decorative accessory waiting position.

As shown in FIGS. 214, 221 and 230(a), the bullet accessory P6500 has the inner spiral member P6520 substantially entirely in the bullet accessory standby position.
6510 (outer trunk P6511).

As shown in FIGS. 214 and 230(a), the first decorative accessory P6610 is pushed backward by the urging force of the first spring P6515 to be positioned at the first decorative accessory waiting position. More specifically, the first decorative accessory P6610 is pressed by the flange P6514b of the bullet P6514 via the first spring P6515 to be positioned at the first decorative accessory standby position. At this time, the rear surface of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base portion P6611)
Further rearward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is restricted by abutting the second decorative accessory P6620 on the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621. At the first decorative accessory standby position, the first spring P6515 is accommodated in the spring receiving portion P6611c.

The second decorative accessory P6620 is pushed backward by the biasing force of the second spring P6611f, and is positioned at the second decorative accessory standby position. More specifically, the second decorative accessory P6
620 is positioned at the second decorative accessory standby position by being pressed by the first decorative base portion P6611 via the second spring P6611f. At this time, the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620 contacts the front surface of the first base portion P6110, thereby further moving the second decorative accessory P6620 backward. Regulated.

219, 220, 223 and 224, the effect position is bullet role P6
500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are at the frontmost position within the movable range in the front-rear direction. In the production position, the bullet part P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500 is the logo accessory P631 on the right side.
0 (right accessory main body P6311) and left logo accessory P6320 (left accessory main body P6321)
positioned anteriorly. Also, in the production position, the bullet part P65 of the bullet accessory P6500
14. The first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 are separated from each other.

At the performance position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 move forward, thereby giving a visual impression (impact) to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the standby position shown in FIG.
The front ends of 2) generally coincide in front and rear positions. Also, at the standby position, the first decorative accessory P66
10 and the front end of the second decorative accessory P6620 are located behind the front end of the fixed decorative part P6700. In addition, at the production position shown in FIG. 219, the first decorative accessory P6610
is positioned forward of the front end of the second decorative accessory P6620, and the second decorative accessory P
The front end of 6620 is positioned forward of the front end of the fixed ornament P6700. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 jump forward greatly, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Below, the position of the bullet accessory P6500 at the production position is the bullet accessory production position, the position of the first decorative accessory P6610 at the production position is the first decorative accessory production position, and the second decorative accessory at the production position The position of P6620 will be referred to as the second decorative accessory performance position.

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 231(b), the bullet accessory P6500 has a portion other than the front portion of the inner spiral member P6520, which is outside the outer spiral member P6510 (outer body portion P6511) at the bullet accessory production position. Located in

As shown in FIG. 231(b), the first decorative accessory P6610 includes the inner spiral member P6
520, and is pushed backward by the biasing force of the first spring P6515, it is positioned at the first decorative accessory production position. More specifically, the first decorative accessory P6610 is pressed by the flange P6514b of the bullet P6514 via the first spring P6515, and is positioned at the first decorative accessory rendering position. At this time, the first decorative accessory P66
10 (first decorative base portion P6611) protruding portion P6611b is the outer spiral member P
Further rearward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is restricted by contacting the contact surface P6511c of the front-rear groove P6511b of the 6510 (outer body P6511).

The second decorative accessory P6620 moves forward with respect to the inner spiral member P6520 and is pushed backward by the biasing force of the second spring P6611f, thereby being positioned at the second decorative accessory rendering position. More specifically, the second decorative accessory P6620 is the second spring P
By being pressed by the first decoration base part P6611 via 6611f, it is positioned at the second decoration accessory production position. At this time, the second decorative base portion P66 of the second decorative accessory P6620
21 is the enlarged diameter portion P6611 of the shaft portion P6611d of the first decorative accessory P6610.
Further rearward movement of the second decorative accessory P6620 is regulated by coming into contact with e.

The operation of the rendering device P6000 configured as described above will be described below. That is, the operation of the opening/closing accessory P6300 under the operation control of the opening/closing control means P6200 and the operation of the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 under the operation control of the bullet control means P6400 will be described.

First, the opening and closing accessory P6300 at the closed position is set to the open position, and the bullet accessory P at the standby position
The operation of moving the 6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 to the performance position will be described.

In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 212, the restricting portion P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is positioned between the pair of locking portions P6247. In this state, the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 is restricted by the restricting piece portion P6532 coming into contact with the pair of locking portions P6247. This restricts the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520.

Driving the first motor P6210 rotates the output gear P6220 shown in FIG. As a result, the driving force of the first motor P6210 is transmitted through the rack tooth portion P6241 meshing with the output gear P6220, and the slide rack P6240 moves rightward. The first motor P6210 is driven according to a control signal from the control means.

When the slide rack P6240 moves to the right, the right crank guide pin P6312c of the right logo accessory P6310 and the left crank guide pin P of the left logo accessory P6320
6322c is guided along the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245 of the slide rack P6240.

At this time, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 217, the right crank guide pin P6312
c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are guided by the inclined portions (portions extending obliquely downward to the left) of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245,
Move down. Along with this, the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 are
It rotates counterclockwise in a front view about the axis of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a.

By moving the slide rack P6240 to the right, the control means moves the slide rack P62
40 is in the open/lock state shown in FIG. 217, the driving of the first motor P6210 is stopped. In this state, the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 are in the open position, and the forward and backward movement of the bullet accessory P6500 is possible.

In the open/locked state, a portion (right end) of the restricting portion P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located between the pair of locking portions P6247. In this state, the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 (inner spiral member P6520) is restricted, as in the case of the closed position.

When the second motor P6410 is driven, the output gear P6421 shown in FIG. 211 rotates. The rotation of the output gear P6421 is transmitted to the guide gear P6430 via the first gear P6422, the second gear P6423 and the third gear P6424. the second motor P
6410 is driven according to the control signal of the control means.

Here, as shown in FIG. 226(a), the protrusion P6433 of the guide gear P6430 is
It is engaged with the outer spiral groove portion P6511a of the outer spiral member P6510. Rotation of the guide gear P6430 is converted into linear motion of the outer spiral member P6510 by relative movement of the protrusion P6433 in the outer spiral groove P6511a. As a result, the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward as the guide gear P6430 rotates.

Here, when the slide rack P6240 is in the open/locked state, the regulating portion P653
Rotation of 0 is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520. That is, with the inner spiral member P6520 fixed, the outer spiral member P
6510 moves forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 226(b), the protrusion P651 of the outer spiral member P6510
2 is engaged with the inner spiral groove portion P6521 of the inner spiral member P6520. Accordingly, as the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward, the inner spiral groove portion P6521
, and rotates about a rotation axis facing the front-rear direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the front and rear groove portions P6 of the outer spiral member P6510
In 511b, the protrusion P of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base P6611)
6611b are engaged so as not to move relative to each other in the circumferential direction. Rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610 via the protrusion P6611b.

In addition, the first decorative accessory P6610 is connected to the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621) via the shaft portion P6611d. The shaft portion P66
11d, the rotation of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620.

As described above, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 rotate according to the operation of the outer spiral member P6510.

Further, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward, the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f expand as shown in FIG. 230(b). First decorative accessory P6
610 moves forward as the second spring P6611f expands. At this time, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base P6611)
511b relatively. Further, when the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward, the shaft portion P6611d moves the second decorative accessory P6620 (the second decorative base portion P66
21) relatively moves forward in the shaft receiving portion P6621b.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward by a predetermined distance, as shown in FIG. 231(a), the contact surface P6511c of the front-rear groove P6511b contacts the protrusion P6611b.
Further, the enlarged diameter portion P6611e of the shaft receiving portion P6621b is the second decorative base portion P66.
21.

In this state, as the outer spiral member P6510 moves further forward, the protrusion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c. As a result, the first decorative accessory P661
0, the forward motion of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted, and the first decorative part P66
10 moves forward. Also, in this state, as the first decorative accessory P6610 moves further forward, the second decorative base portion P6621 is pressed against the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.
As a result, the forward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620, and the second decorative accessory P6620 moves forward.

In the above description, for the sake of convenience, an example in which the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend at approximately the same timing was given, but the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend. The timing is not limited to the above example. As for the timing at which each spring expands, various aspects can be adopted according to the spring constant of each spring.

As shown in FIG. 231(b), if the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward until the projection P6512 is positioned at the front end of the inner spiral groove P6521, the bullet P6500
And the decorative accessory P6600 becomes the production position. In this state, the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are at the bullet accessory production position and the first
, and the second decorative accessory production position.

As shown in FIG. 232, the longitudinal moving distance L1 of the bullet accessory P6500 is greater than the longitudinal moving distance L2 of the first decorative accessory P6610. Also, the first decorative accessory P66
The moving distance L2 of 10 in the front-rear direction is greater than the moving distance L3 in the front-rear direction of the second decorative accessory P6620.

With the above configuration, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 are spaced apart from each other in the front-rear direction at the presentation position, enabling a three-dimensional presentation, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

The control means controls the bullet control means P6400 so as to move the bullet accessory P6500 to the performance position.
so that the slide rack P6240 is in the open/unlocked state after controlling the operation of
The first motor P6210 is driven again. This causes the slide rack P6240 to move rightward.

Further, the control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is moved to the right and the slide rack P6240 is opened/unlocked.

In the unlocked/unlocked state, as shown in FIG.
530 is positioned to the left of the lock portion P6247. In this state, the regulation portion P6530
The restriction of rotation by the lock portion P6247 of is released. This allows rotation of the inner spiral member P6520.

When the second motor P6410 is driven in the unlocked/unlocked state, the outer spiral member P65 is driven through the projection P6512 located at the front end of the inner spiral groove P6521.
Ten rotations are transmitted to the inner spiral member P6520. As a result, the inner spiral member P6520 rotates as the outer spiral member P6510 rotates.

With the above configuration, the outer spiral member P6510, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 can be rotated at the performance position. i.e.
When the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted, the outer spiral member P651
Further rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is disabled in the effect position where the 0 protrusion P6512 is positioned at the front end of the inner spiral groove P6521. On the other hand, if the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is allowed, the inner spiral member P6520 rotates with the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510, so that the outer spiral member P6510 at the production position
, the first decorative object P6610 and the second decorative object P6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 at the production position to the standby position and moving the open/close accessory P6300 at the open position to the closed position will be described.

First, the control means stops driving the second motor P6410 so that the rotational position of the bullet accessory P6500 stops at the lockable position. 212 and 218, the lockable position is a rotational position of the bullet accessory P6500 in which the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 can be restricted by the slide rack P6240 in the open/locked state and closed state. . At the lockable position, the upper and lower surfaces of the upper and lower restricting pieces P6532 of the restricting portion P6530 are
facing upwards and downwards respectively. When the bullet accessory P6500 reaches the lockable position, the rotation sensor P6440 detects the detected part P6434. As a result, the control means controls the bullet role P6
500 can be detected to be in the lockable position.

If the first motor P6210 is driven so as to rotate in the opposite direction to the movement control described above, the output gear P6220 shown in FIG. 218 rotates in the opposite direction. This allows the slide rack P6240
moves to the left.

By moving the slide rack P6240 to the left, the control means moves the slide rack P62
40 is in the open/locked state, the driving of the first motor P6210 is stopped.

In the unlocked/unlocked state, if the second motor P6410 is driven to rotate in a direction opposite to the movement control described above, the outer spiral member P6510 will move rearward as the guide gear P6430 rotates.

Here, in the unlocked/unlocked state, as shown in FIG. 217, the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520. As a result, the outer spiral member P6510 moves toward the inner spiral groove portion P6521 as it moves rearward.
, and rotates about a rotation axis facing the front-rear direction.

At this time, according to the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 also rotate.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves backward, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the first decorative accessory P6610 is pushed backward via the contracting first spring P6515. Thereby, the rearward movement of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610. At this time, the first decorative accessory P6610 (the first decorative base part P661
1) The protrusion P6611b relatively moves in the front-rear groove P6511b.

Further, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves backward, the second decorative accessory P66
20 is pushed rearward via a second spring P6611f that contracts. This allows the second
The rearward movement of the first decorative element P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative element P6620. At this time, the shaft portion P6611d of the first decorative accessory P6610 is connected to the second decorative accessory P6620.
It relatively moves rearward within the shaft receiving portion P6621b of the (second ornamental base portion P6621).

In the above description, for the sake of convenience, an example was given in which the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f contract at substantially the same timing, but the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f contract. The timing is not limited to the above example. As for the timing at which each spring contracts, various aspects can be adopted according to the spring constant of each spring.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward until the protrusion P6512 is located at the rear end of the inner spiral groove P6521, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are in the standby position. In this state, the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are at the bullet accessory standby position, the first decorative accessory standby position, and the second decorative accessory standby position, respectively. Located in

When the bullet accessory P6500 is in the standby position, the lever portion of the front/rear sensor P6450 is pressed by the pressing portion P6513a. Thereby, the control means can detect that the bullet accessory P6500 has reached the standby position.

The control means stops driving the second motor P6410 when the bullet accessory P6500 reaches the standby position. In addition, the control means drives the first motor P6210 so that the slide rack P
Move 6240 to the left.

At this time, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P63
22c moves upward while being guided by the inclined portions (portions extending obliquely downward to the left) of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245. Along with this, the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 rotate clockwise in a front view about the axes of the main shafts P6312a and P6322a.

By moving the slide rack P6240 to the left, the control means moves the slide rack P62
40 is closed, it stops driving the first motor P6210. In this state, the right side logo feature P6310 and the left side logo feature P6320 are in the closed position.

According to the effect device P6000 as described above, it is possible to diversify the effect modes and improve the interest of the game. In other words, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can be operated in a plurality of motion modes of linear motion and rotational motion.

Further, the bullet control means P6400 according to this embodiment includes a single motor (the second motor P6
410) enables the bullet accessory P6500 to move straight forward and rotate. Thereby, simplification of a mechanism can be achieved. Further, since the decorative accessory P6600 (the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620) is operated in accordance with the movement of the bullet accessory P6500, the mechanism can be further simplified. can be done.

Further, the bullet control means P6400 according to this embodiment can be switched between a state of restricting rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 (open/locked state) and a state of allowing rotation (open/unlocked state). As a result, the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted, and the outer spiral member P6510 is rotated while moving in the front-rear direction;
and rotating the outer spiral member P6510 without moving it forward or backward.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are well known. For example, JP 2016-5
9498 publication.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-59498 discloses a game machine provided with a movable effect accessory that performs a predetermined movable effect by rotating.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
Equipped with a first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) and a second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is operable from a first position (bullet accessory standby position) to a second position (bullet accessory production position),
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is similar to the first movable body (bullet accessory P6
500), the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is brought into contact with the first movable body to operate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the movement of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) are characterized in that their operating distances are different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is
When the first movable body (bullet role P6500) moves from the first position (bullet role standby position) to the second position (bullet role production position), the first movable body ( Bullet Accessory P6
500) operates by contacting the first portion (contact surface P6511c),
When the first movable body (bullet role P6500) moves from the second position (bullet role production position) to the first position (bullet role standby position), the first movable body ( Bullet Accessory P6
500) is operated by coming into contact with the second portion (first spring P6515).

With such a configuration, it is possible to operate the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) by utilizing the motion of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).

In addition, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
It is possible to operate in a plurality of different motion modes (straight forward motion and rotary motion) when moving from the first position (bullet role waiting position) to the second position (bullet role object production position). It is characterized.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the movement of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) is
The first movable body (bullet accessory P65) of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610)
00), the biasing means (the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6613
It is in the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) due to the biasing force of f), and the first movable body (
The bullet accessory P6500) moves from the first position (the bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (the bullet accessory production position) and moves to the third position (the second decorative accessory standby position). position) to the fourth
position (second decorative accessory production position).

With such a configuration, it is possible to operate the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) by utilizing the motion of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).

In addition, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is
When operating from the third position (second decorative role object standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative role object production position), in a plurality of different operation modes (back and forth operation and rotation operation) It is characterized by being operable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the movement of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) is
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) moves from the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative accessory presentation position). In this case, it is characterized in that it can be operated in a plurality of different motion modes (forward and backward motion and rotational motion).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the movement of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) are characterized in that they have a laminated structure.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When moving from the first position (bullet role waiting position) to the second position (bullet role object production position), it is possible to operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of operation modes are characterized by including at least straight movement.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When moving from the first position (bullet role waiting position) to the second position (bullet role object production position), it is possible to operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of operation modes are characterized by straight movement and rotational movement.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (bullet role P6500) is characterized in that when it is positioned at the second position (bullet role object presentation position), it performs a rotating motion but does not perform a linear motion (back and forth motion). and

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first spiral groove (outer spiral groove P6511a) is provided on the outer surface of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500),
The first groove portion (outer spiral groove portion P6511a) is aligned with the first movable body (bullet accessory P65
00) of the guide gear P6430 provided on the outside of the motor P6430, and a rotational driving force is transmitted from the driving means (second motor P6410) to the guide gear P6430. It is characterized in that the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves straight.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various effects using the rotational driving force of the driving means.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
An internal spiral member (inner spiral member P6520) accommodated inside the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) and provided with a second spiral groove portion (inner spiral groove portion P6521) on the outer surface thereof (inner spiral member P6520) prepared,
A second projection (projection P6512
) is provided,
The second protrusion (protrusion P6512) corresponds to the second groove (inner spiral groove P6521).
The first movable body (bullet role P6500) rotates as the first movable body (bullet role P6500) moves straight while in contact with the .

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various effects using the rotational driving force of the driving means (second motor P6410).

The bullet accessory P6500 is one form of the first movable body.
Further, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is one form of the first groove portion.
Also, the first spring P6515 is one form of biasing means.
Also, the inner spiral member P6520 is one form of an inner spiral member.
In addition, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is one form of the second groove portion.
Also, the first decorative accessory P6610 is one form of the second movable body.
Also, the second spring P6613f is one form of biasing means.
Also, the second decorative accessory P6620 is one form of the third movable body.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are well known. For example, JP 2016-5
9498 publication.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-59498 discloses a game machine provided with a movable effect accessory that performs a predetermined movable effect by rotating.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) and a second movable body (inner spiral member P6520),
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is positioned between the first position (standby position) and the second position.
position (rendering position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P65
10) is operable and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is inoperable,
When the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (rendering position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) and the second movable body (
and the inner spiral member P6520) are operable together.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Locking means (
Equipped with a slide rack P6240),
In a state where the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is between the first position (standby position) and the second position (performance position), the lock means (slide rack P6240) is moved to the first position. 3 (open/locked state), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is operable and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is operable.
) becomes inoperable and
When the lock means is in the fourth position (open/unlocked state) while the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (performance position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) body (outer spiral member P6510) and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6510)
520) can operate together.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch the operation of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) using the lock means (slide rack P6240).

Further, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is
It is characterized by being able to execute a first motion (rotating motion) and a second motion (straight forward motion) different from the first motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is capable of executing the first operation (rotating operation),
The first movement (rotational movement) is applied to the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520).
A regulating member (regulating portion P6530) is provided to regulate the
The locking means (slide rack P6240) is in the third position (open/locked state).
The first movement (rotational movement) of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is locked by coming into contact with the regulation member (regulation portion P6530).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
With the lock means (slide rack P6240) locking the first movement (rotational movement) of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520), the first movable body (
The outer spiral member P6510) is characterized by being capable of the second movement (straight movement).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first motion is a rotating motion, and the second motion is a rectilinear motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) has a first spiral groove (
An outer spiral groove portion P6511a) is provided,
While in contact with the first groove portion (outer spiral groove portion P6511a), the rotational driving force from the drive means (second motor P6410) is transmitted to the first movable body (outer spiral member P6410).
510) is provided with a guide gear P6430 that moves straight.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various effects using the rotational driving force of the driving means (second motor P6410).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is provided with a protrusion P6611b,
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) has a second spiral groove (
An inner spiral groove portion P6521) is provided,
With the protrusion P6611b and the second groove (inner spiral groove P6521) in contact, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is moved relative to the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520). , the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) can rotate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) can be moved to the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) while the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is at the first position (standby position). The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is accommodated inside the spiral member P6510), and the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (performance position).
It is characterized by being located outside the outer spiral member P6510).

With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve compactness at the first position (standby position).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (
It is characterized by having an opening and closing accessory P6300).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The fourth movable body (decorative accessory P.
6600).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is
capable of executing a first operation (rotational operation) and a second operation (straight forward operation) different from the first operation;
The fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) is characterized by being capable of executing the first action and the second action.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode of presentation more diverse.

In addition, the fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) is
As the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (performance position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510)
6510), and
The biasing means (
It is characterized by being urged to the first position (standby position) by the urging forces of the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6613f).

With such a configuration, the operation of the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) can be used to operate the fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600).

Note that the outer spiral member P6510 is one form of the first movable body.
Further, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is one form of the first groove portion.
Also, the first spring P6515 is one form of biasing means.
Also, the inner spiral member P6520 is one form of the second movable body.
In addition, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is one form of the second groove portion.
Also, the restricting portion P6530 is one form of a restricting member.
Also, the slide rack P6240 is one form of locking means.
Also, the opening/closing accessory P6300 is one form of the third movable body.
Also, the decoration accessory P6600 is one form of the fourth movable body.
Also, the second spring P6613f is one form of biasing means.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, when moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 from the standby position to the production position, the first decorative accessory P6610 first moves the second spring P6611f.
When the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward by a predetermined distance, the projecting portion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c and moves forward. Not limited. For example, the first decorative accessory P6610 may be configured to move forward over the entire range from the standby position to the production position when the projection P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative accessory P6600 (the first decorative accessory P6
610 and the second decorative part P6620) are connected to the first spring P6515 and the second spring P66.
11f, it is configured to be pushed rearward, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, at the standby position, the bullet accessory P6500 may directly push the first decorative accessory P6610 backward without the biasing member. Further, at the standby position, the first
The second decorative accessory P6610 may directly push the second decorative accessory P6620 backward.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the straight motion of the bullet accessory P6500 is the motion in the front-rear direction.
It is not limited to such a mode. Various directions can be adopted for straight movement of the bullet accessory P6500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first movable body is modeled after a bullet, but the shape of the first movable body is not limited to such a form, and various shapes can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative accessory P6600 imitates a vortex, but the decorative accessory P6600
The shape of 600 is not limited to such an aspect, and various shapes can be adopted.

Below, the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Components identical or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same names or the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment has the first to third
It differs greatly from the pachinko game machine according to the embodiment. The rendering device P7000 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 234 to 272. FIG.

The production device P7000 operates at an appropriate timing to give the player a visual impression (
impact). The effect device P7000 is provided on the game board P1100 as shown in FIG. The effect device P7000 is fitted in the opening region 1d of the game board P1100 with its front portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game board P1100. The effect device P7000 is configured such that a game ball rolling in the game area P1120 can be introduced inside, and the game ball can be placed on the side of a specific area P7911 or a non-specific area P7, which will be described later, for example.
It can be distributed to the 912 side. The effect device P7000 has decorations that imitate the wall surface of a tower in various places that can be visually recognized by the player. It should be noted that illustration of decorations is omitted as appropriate in the examples.

The effect device P7000 includes a front cover part P7100, a rear cover part P7200, a driving unit P7300, a tower P7400, and a specific area unit P7900.

First, the configuration of the front cover portion P7100 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

The front cover portion P7100 shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 is a driving unit P7 described later.
300, the tower P7400 and the specific area unit P7900 are covered from the front.
The front cover portion P7100 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The front cover portion P7100 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the front cover portion P7100 is formed such that the width dimension (horizontal dimension) of the upper portion is small. The front cover portion P7100 includes a front wall portion P7110, a side wall portion P7120, and an external discharge passage P7.
130 and a garnish P7140.

The front wall portion P7110 constitutes the front wall of the front cover portion P7100. Front wall P7
110 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front wall portion P7110 is
It has an upper window portion P7111 and a lower window portion P7112.

The upper window portion P7111 shown in FIG. 236 is a window portion provided in the upper portion of the front wall portion P7110. The upper window portion P7111 is made of a transparent material. The player can open the upper window part P7111
, a driving unit P7300, which will be described later, can be visually recognized. 234 and 235, illustration of the upper window portion P7111 is omitted.

A lower window portion P7112 shown in FIG. 236 is a window portion provided below the upper window portion P7111. The lower window portion P7112 is made of a transparent material. The player can visually recognize a tower object P7400, which will be described later, through the lower window portion P7112. 234 and 235
, illustration of the lower window portion P7112 is omitted.

The side wall portions P7120 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 constitute the upper, lower, left, and right side walls of the front cover portion P7100. The side wall portion P7120 includes a supply portion P7121 and a discharge portion P7122.
and a recovery unit P7123.

The supply part P7121 serves as an entrance for game balls rolling in the game area P1120.
Game balls are supplied (introduced) into the effect device P7000 via the supply unit P7121.
The supply portion P7121 is formed in the shape of a passage penetrating the side wall portion P7120 in the thickness direction. The supply portion P7121 is provided in the upper portion of the side wall portion P7120. The supply unit P7121
A pair is provided so as to be positioned on both the left and right sides of the side wall portion P7120.

The discharge part P7122 is an outlet for discharging a part of the game balls supplied to the interior of the effect device P7000 to the outside. The discharge part P7122 is provided below the supply part P7121. The discharge portions P7122 are provided on both left and right sides of the side wall portion P7120. right ejection port P712
2 is formed including a portion penetrating the right side of the side wall portion P7120 in the left-right direction and a passage-like portion extending generally in the front-rear direction. The ejection part P7122 on the right side is the game board P1100
The game ball is discharged to the back side (rear surface) of the. In addition, the left discharge portion P7122 (not shown) is formed including a portion penetrating the left side of the side wall portion P7120 in the left-right direction, and discharges game balls into the game area P1.
Drain to 120. It should be noted that the right ejection portion P7122 is similar to the left ejection portion P7122,
It is good also as composition which discharges a game sphere to game field P1120.

The collecting part P7123 collects game balls rolling in the game area P1120. Specifically, the collecting part P7123 collects game balls that have finished rolling in the left and right areas of the game area P1120. In this way, the collection part P7123 has a role as a so-called outlet. A pair of collecting portions P7123 are provided so as to be positioned on both left and right sides of the lower portion of the side wall portion P7120. In this way, if the game ball rolling in the game area P1120 does not win any of the winning openings or the like, it is
000 is recovered.

The external discharge passage P7130 shown in FIG. 234 is a passage for discharging the game balls collected from the collecting portion P7123 and the game balls that have passed through the non-specific area P7912 of the specific area unit P7900 described later to the back side of the game board P1100. . The external discharge passage P7130 extends from the front wall portion P71.
10 is located on the rear side (rear side) and is provided so as to be invisible to the player.

The decorative portion P7140 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 covers the sides of the tower P7400. The decorative portion P7140 is provided behind the side wall portion P7120. Decorative part P7140
is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction directed in the left-right direction.

Next, the configuration of the rear cover portion P7200 of the effect device P7000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. FIG.

The rear cover part P7200 covers the driving unit P7300, the tower P7400 and the specific area unit P7900 from behind. The rear cover portion P7200 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens forward. The rear cover portion P7200 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front (rear view).

Next, the configuration of the driving unit P7300 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

The driving unit P7300 shown in FIGS. 236, 241 to 245 and 250 operates the tower P7400 and sorts the game balls supplied to the effect device P7000. The driving unit P7300 is arranged behind the upper part of the front cover part P7100. The drive unit P7300 includes a front cover portion P7100 and a rear cover portion P72.
00 upper part. The drive unit P7300 includes an upper cover portion P7310, a crew member P7320, a drive base portion P7330, an ejection guide portion P7340, and a drive portion P735.
0, a distribution part P7360, a drive gear P7370 and a disk part P7380.

The upper cover portion P7310 shown in FIGS. 235, 241, and 242 covers from above the rune portion P7320, the drive base portion P7330, and the like, which will be described later. Upper cover part P731
0 is formed in the shape of a lid that is open forward and downward. The upper cover part P7310 is arranged on the top of the drive unit P7300. The upper cover portion P7310 has a sensor portion P731.
1.

The sensor portion P7311 detects passage of game balls supplied via the supply portion P7121 of the front cover portion P7100. That is, the sensor part P7311 is the game area P11
20 to the interior of the effect device P7000 is detected. The sensor portion P7311 is arranged inside (downstream side) of the pair of supply portions P7121 of the front cover portion P7100.

241, 242, 246, 247 and 250, game balls supplied via the supply unit P7121 roll. That is, the crew part P7320 distributes the game balls supplied from the game area P1120 to the inside of the effect device P7000. The crew part P7320 is the crew body P7321
, a supply passage portion P7322 and a crew support portion P7323.

The croon main body P7321 is a portion where the game ball rolls. The croon main body P7321 is formed in a substantially dish shape that opens upward. In addition, the Kroon body P7321 is
It is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view. The upper surface of the croon main body P7321 is formed such that the height gradually decreases from the outer portion toward the central portion. Creon body P732
1 comprises a hole P7321a.

The hole P7321a is a hole vertically penetrating the crew body P7321. The game ball that rolls the Krun main body P7321 falls downward through the hole P7321a. hole P
7321a is formed substantially in the center of the crewon main body P7321 in plan view. Hole P732
Three 1a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three holes P73
One hole P7321a of 21a is formed in the left-right direction central part of the crew body P7321. The other two holes P7321a are formed in front of the hole P7321a formed in the center in the left-right direction (positions shifted left and right from the center in the left-right direction of the crew body P7321). In this way, the game ball that rolls the Krun main body P7321 falls from any of the three holes P7321a (distributed to any of the holes P7321a).

The supply passage portion P7322 is a passage that guides the game ball supplied via the supply portion P7121 to the crew main body P7321. The upstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is the supply portion P712
1 (not shown). The downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is the crew main body P7321
connected to In addition, the downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is a plane view, the crew main body P73
The outer portion of 21 is open in the direction along the circumferential direction. Thus, the supply passage portion P7
The game ball guided from 322 to the Kroon main body P7321 is first moved to the Kroon main body P732
The outer portion of 1 rolls in the circumferential direction. The supply passage portion P7322 is connected to a pair of sensor portions P7311.
A pair is provided on both the left and right sides of the croon main body P7321 so that the game ball that has passed through can be guided.

The crew support part P7323 supports the crew body P7321 and the supply passage part P7322. The crew support part P7323 is provided below the crew body P7321 and the supply passage part P7322. The crew support portion P7323 is fixed to the upper portion of the drive base portion P7330, which will be described later.

Drive base P7330 shown in FIGS. 241, 242, 246, 247 and 250
are fixed to the upper portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The drive base portion P7330 includes a drive base body portion P7331, a support portion P7332, and a swing sensor P7333.

The driving base body portion P7331 constitutes the upper portion of the driving base portion P7330. The drive base main body portion P7331 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. The drive base main body portion P7331 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. A crew support portion P7323 is fixed to the upper portion of the drive base main body portion P7331. The bottom of the drive base body P7331 is a crew body P732 supported by a crew support P7323.
1 (more specifically, the three holes P7321a). As a result, the game ball that has passed through the hole P7321a of the crew main body P7321 falls to the bottom of the driving base main body P7331. The bottom portion of the driving base main body portion P7331 is inclined so that the center portion in the left-right direction is lower. On both left and right sides of the front portion of the bottom of the driving base main body portion P7331, convex portions that are formed in an upwardly convex shape are provided. Drive base body P733
1 is provided with a relay board for relaying signals relating to the control of the effect device P7000. The drive base body portion P7331 includes a rolling guide portion P7331a.

The rolling guide portion P7331a guides the game ball to roll forward at the bottom portion of the driving base main body portion P7331. The rolling guide portion P7331a is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction between the left and right convex portions. The rolling guide portion P7331a and the left and right convex portions are formed so as to be positioned forward of the three holes P7321a of the crew main body P7321 in plan view. The rolling guide portion P7331a is connected to the driving base main body portion P7.
331 in the center in the left-right direction. The rolling guide portion P7331a is inclined so that the height of the front end portion is lower than that of the rear end portion.

In this way, the driving base main body portion P7331 is connected to the hole P7321 of the crew main body P7321.
The game ball that has fallen from a is pushed to the bottom of the drive base main body P7331 (more specifically,
Of the bottom portion, the portion rearward of the rolling guide portion P7331a is received and rolled on the bottom portion. Then, the game ball rolling on the bottom portion of the driving base main body portion P7331 rolls on the rolling guide portion P7331a of the bottom portion toward the front end portion side. The game ball rolling on the rolling guide portion P7331a toward the front end portion falls downward when reaching the front end portion.

The support portion P7332 supports an ejection guide portion P7340, which will be described later. The support portion P7332 constitutes the lower portion of the driving base portion P7330. A pair of support portions P7332 are provided on the left and right sides of the front portion of the drive base main body portion P7331 so as to protrude to both sides in the left and right direction. The support portion P7332 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens downward. The support portion P7332 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view.

Also, the left and right support portions P7332 are separated from each other in the left-right direction. Here, as described above, the driving base body portion P7331 is arranged on the upper side between the left and right support portions P7332. Further, an ejection guide portion P7340, which will be described later, is arranged on the lower side between the left and right support portions P7332. In this way, between the left and right support portions P7332, a substantially rectangular opening P7332a elongated in the left-right direction is formed when viewed from the front.

The swing sensor P7333 is capable of detecting a detected portion P7363a of the distributing portion P7360, which will be described later. The swing sensor P7333 is provided below the drive base body portion P7331. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 269, the swing sensor P7333
60 is provided at a position where the detected part P7363a can be detected in a state where the part P7363a faces leftward.

The ejection guide portion P7340 receives a portion of the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide portion P7331a of the driving base portion P7330 and guides it to be ejected to the outside of the front cover portion P7100. The ejection guide portion P7340 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the ejection guide portion P7340 is formed in a substantially plate shape. Further, the upper surface of the ejection guide portion P7340 is formed so as to incline obliquely downward from the central portion in the left-right direction to both end portions in the left-right direction in a front view. The ejection guide portion P7340 is fixed to the front end portions of the pair of support portions P7332 of the driving base portion P7330. The ejection guide portion P7340 is provided so as to be located below the rolling guide portion P7331a of the driving base portion P7330 via the opening portion P7332a in a front view. The right end of the ejection guide portion P7340 communicates with the right ejection portion P7122 of the front cover portion P7100. The left end of the ejection guide portion P7340 communicates with the left ejection portion P7122 (not shown) of the front cover portion P7100. The ejection guide portion P7340 includes a sensor portion P7341.

The sensor part P7341 rolls on the discharge guide part P7340 (the left and right discharge parts P7122
It detects the passage of a game ball that is discharged through. The sensor portions P7341 are provided (a pair) at the left and right end portions of the discharge guide portion P7340.

In this way, the ejection guide portion P7340 is connected to the rolling guide portion P73 of the drive base portion P7330.
31a, the game ball is ejected from the discharge guide part P7340.
, to the right and left direction both ends. Then, the game ball rolling to the left end side of the ejection guide portion P7340 is ejected again to the game area P1120 via the left ejection portion P7122 (not shown) of the front cover portion P7100. In addition, the game ball rolling to the right end side of the ejection guide portion P7340 passes through the ejection portion P7122 on the right side of the front cover portion P7100, and the game board P1100.
is discharged to the back side (rear surface) of the

The driving part P7350 shown in FIGS.
400 and the distribution unit P7360. As shown in FIG. 241, the driving portion P7350 is fixed to the lower portion of the driving base portion P7330 (the driving base main body portion P7331).
That is, the driving portion P7350 is connected to the front cover portion P710 via the driving base portion P7330.
0 and the upper part of the rear cover part P7200. The drive portion P7350 includes a drive frame P7351, a spring portion P7352, a first motor P7353, an output gear P7354 and a swing shaft portion P7355.

The drive frame P7351 is fixed to the drive base body portion P7331. The drive frame P7351 is formed in a substantially annular shape in plan view. Drive frame P73
51 includes a locking portion P7351a.

The locking portion P7351a locks a spring portion P7352, which will be described later. Locking portion P7
351a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the drive frame P7351. The locking portion P7351a is provided on the right rear portion of the upper surface of the drive frame P7351.

The spring portion P7352 urges the distributing portion P7360, which will be described later, rightward. One end of the spring portion P7352 is locked to the locking portion P7351a of the drive frame P7351, and the other end is locked to the locking portion P7362a of the distributing portion P7360, which will be described later. Spring part P735
2 constitutes a tension spring.

The first motor P7353 is a driving source for the tower P7400 and the sorting section P7360. The first motor P7353 is provided on the left rear portion of the upper surface of the drive frame P7351. The first motor P7353 is provided such that its output shaft vertically penetrates the drive frame P7351 and protrudes downward.

The output gear P7354 shown in FIG. 245 extracts the driving force of the first motor P7353. The output gear P7354 is fixed to the lower end of the output shaft of the first motor P7353.

A swing shaft portion P7355 shown in FIGS. 243, 244, and 251 is a shaft that is the center of swing of the distribution portion P7360. The swing shaft portion P7355 is formed in an elongated shape and arranged with the axial direction directed in the up-down direction. The swing shaft portion P7355 is provided inside the drive frame P7351 (a position separated from the drive frame P7351) in plan view. Specifically, the swing shaft portion P7355 is provided so as to be positioned at the rear portion inside the drive frame P7351. The upper end of the swing shaft portion P7355 is fixed to the lower portion of the drive base main body portion P7331.
The swing shaft portion P7355 is provided to extend downward from the drive base body portion P7331.

235, 241, 243, 244 and 250 receives a part of the game ball falling from the rolling guide portion P7331a of the driving base portion P7330 at a predetermined timing and will be described later. It guides to the side of the specific area P7911 (part where a prize can be won). The distribution portion P7360 is provided so as to be able to swing left and right around the swing shaft portion P7355 (see FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271). In this way, the distribution part P7360 constitutes a movable prize-winning slot (see FIG. 250). The distribution unit P7360 is
Most of the drive base portion P7330 except for the front portion is provided below the drive base main body portion P7331. A front portion of the distribution portion P7360 is positioned forward of the drive base body portion P7331 and positioned above the discharge guide portion P7340.

Further, the distribution portion P7360 is connected to the driving base portion P7330 (
It is provided so as to be suspended from the drive base main body portion P7331). In addition, distribution part P7360
271 is changed from a position where the front end portion (front end portion) of the distributing portion P7360 faces diagonally forward left shown in FIG. 269 to a position diagonally forward right shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be able to swing in a range of up to. In the following, the shape and the like of the distribution portion P7360 will be described with reference to the position where the tip portion of the distribution portion P7360 faces forward shown in FIG. The sorting portion P7360 includes a sorting body portion P7361, a plate portion P7362, a decorative portion P7363, and an inclined portion P7364.

The sorting main body P7361 is the main structure of the sorting part P7360. Sorting body part P73
61 is elongated in the front-rear direction. The distribution main body portion P7361 has a bearing portion P7361
a, a passage portion P7361b, a hole portion P7361c, and a guide groove portion P7361d.

The bearing portion P7361a is a portion through which the swing shaft portion P7355 is inserted. Bearing P736
1a is formed so as to penetrate vertically at the rear end portion of the sorting main body portion P7361.

The passage portion P7361b receives the game ball dropped from the rolling guide portion P7331a and guides it so that it rolls toward the tower object P7400. The passage portion P7361b is
It is formed in a groove shape that opens upward and extends in the front-rear direction. Passage P73
61b is formed over substantially the entire front-rear direction of the distribution main body portion P7361. Passage P73
The bottom of 61b is slanted so that the rear end is lower in height than the front end. As a result, the game ball positioned in the passage portion P7361b rolls toward the rear end portion of the passage portion P7361b. A tip (front end) of the passage portion P7361b protrudes forward through an opening P7332a between the left and right support portions P7332 (see FIGS. 244 and 246). thus,
The tip of the passage portion P7361b is positioned forward of the drive base body portion P7331 and positioned above the discharge guide portion P7340.

A hole portion P7361c shown in FIG. 244 is a hole penetrating vertically at the rear end portion of the bottom portion of the passage portion P7361b. A game ball rolling in the passage portion P7361b passes through the hole portion P7361c and falls downward.

A guide groove portion P7361d shown in FIG.
7413e, and the drive is transmitted via the swing transmission portion P7413e. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed below the passage portion P7361b at a position that substantially overlaps the passage portion P7361b in plan view. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed in a groove shape that opens downward and extends in the front-rear direction. The guide groove portion P7361d is the distribution main body portion P7361
is formed in the middle of the front-rear direction of the .

The plate portions P7362 shown in FIGS. 243 and 244 protrude outward in the left-right direction on both sides in the left-right direction of the rear portion of the distribution main body portion P7361. The plate portion P7362 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. The plate portion P7362 has a locking portion P7362
a.

The locking portion P7362a locks the spring portion P7352. Locking portion P7362a
projects upward from the upper surface of the right plate portion P7362 of the left and right plate portions P7362. The locking portion P7362a locks the other end of the spring portion P7352 (the end opposite to the side locked by the locking portion P7351a). By locking the spring portion P7352 to the locking portion P7362a, the distribution portion P7360 is biased rightward by the spring portion P7352.

The decorative portion P7363 protrudes outward in the left-right direction on both sides in the left-right direction of the front portion of the sorting main body portion P7361. The decorative portion P7363 is similar to the swing shaft portion P in a plan view.
It is formed in an arc shape with 7355 as the center. The front of the decorative part P7363 is decorated to resemble the wall of a tower. The decoration part P7363 can prevent the rear part of the distribution part P7360 from being visually recognized by the player even when the distribution part P7360 swings left and right. The decorative portion P7363 includes a detected portion P7363a.

The detected portion P7363a is a portion detected by the swing sensor P7333. The detected part P7363a protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the left decorative part P7363 of the left and right decorative parts P7363. As shown in FIG. 269, the detected part P7363a
When 60 faces left (in a position facing obliquely forward left), the swing sensor P7
333.

The inclined portion P7364 guides the game ball dropped from the rolling guide portion P7331a so as to roll toward the discharge guide portion P7340. The inclined portions P7364 protrude outward in the left-right direction on both sides in the left-right direction of the front end portion of the distribution main body portion P7361. The inclined portion P7364 is provided at a position overlapping the discharge guide portion P7340 in plan view.
The inclined portion P7364 has an upper surface that is inclined such that the height of the leading end portion in the projecting direction is low. As a result, the game ball positioned on the inclined portion P7364 rolls toward the leading end of the inclined portion P7364 in the projecting direction. In addition, the game ball rolling on the inclined portion P7364
, and drops downward (toward the discharge guide portion P7340) from the leading end of the projecting direction.

Here, the distributing portion P7360 is provided so as to be able to swing left and right around the swing shaft portion P7355 as described above. That is, the drive base body portion P733 of the distribution portion P7360
1 (the portion located above the ejection guide portion P7340), specifically, the front end portion (front end portion) of the passage portion P7361b and the left and right inclined portions P7364. The relative positional relationship with the motion guide portion P7331a is constantly changing. In other words, the rolling guide portion P7331a is moved by the lateral swing of the distribution portion P7360
A state in which the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 is positioned in front of the distribution portion P7360 without being displaced in the left-right direction (a state in which a game ball falling from the rolling guide portion P7331a can enter the passage portion P7361b), and a state in which the passage portion P7361b is displaced. A state (a state in which a game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide portion P7331a cannot enter the passage portion P7361b), and a rolling guide portion P7331a and a distribution portion P73
60 (passage portion P7361b) is constantly changing.

In this way, the distributing portion P7360 is connected to the rolling guide portion P7331a of the driving base portion P7330.
When the game ball that has fallen from is received by the passage portion P7361b, the passage portion P7361b
And through the hole P7361c, it is guided to the side of the tower P7400 (the side of the specific region P7911 or the side of the non-specific region P7912, which will be described later). In addition, the distribution portion P7360 is the rolling guide portion P7
331a can not be received by the passage portion P7361b and is received by the inclined portion P7364, through the inclined portion P7364, the discharge guide portion P7340 side (effect device P70
00).

The driving gear P7370 shown in FIGS. 243 and 245 is the output gear P7 of the driving portion P7350.
The driving force from 354 is transmitted. The drive gear P7370 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The drive gear P7370 is attached to the lower portion of the drive frame P7351 so as to be rotatable relative to the drive frame P7351. The drive gear P7370 has a gear portion P737
1 and an opening P7372.

The gear portion P7371 is a portion that meshes with the output gear P7354. The gear portion P7371 is formed on the outer circumference of the driving gear P7370.

The opening P7372 is an opening that vertically penetrates the drive gear P7370. Opening P73
72 is formed in a circular shape in plan view. The opening P7372 is formed at a position eccentric to the center of the drive gear P7370 in plan view. Specifically, the opening P73
72 is provided at a position shifted forward with respect to the center position of the driving gear P7370.

The disc portion P7380 shown in FIGS. 238, 243, and 245 is provided inside the opening portion P7372 of the driving gear P7370. The disc portion P7380 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The outer diameter of the disk portion P7380 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the opening P7372 of the driving gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is the opening portion P7 of the drive gear P7370.
372 and rotatable relative to the drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is the upper end portion P7413 (body portion P741
3a) is fixed to the upper surface. The disc portion P7380 has an opening portion P7381 and a wall portion P7382.

The opening P7381 is an opening that vertically penetrates the disk portion P7380. Opening P738
1 is formed in an elliptical shape elongated in the front-rear direction in plan view. A fitting portion P7413b of a tower article P7400, which will be described later, is fitted into the opening P7381. The opening P7381 is
Even if the distribution portion P7360 swings left and right, the distribution portion P736
0 hole P7361c.

The wall portion P7382 is a wall projecting upward from the rear portion of the opening portion P7381 in the disk portion P7380. The wall portion P7382 is formed in an arc shape corresponding to the rear portion of the opening portion P7381 in plan view.

Next, the structure of the tower P7400 of the effect device P7000 will be described.

237 to 240, the tower P7400 shown in FIG.
It can operate with a driving force of 00. As shown in FIG. 237, the tower P7400 is formed in a substantially truncated cone shape elongated in the vertical direction. The tower P7400 has an appearance imitating a tower. As for the tower P7400, the lower end of the plane view (bottom view) approximately central part is
It is rotatably pivotally supported by a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later, and its upper end is capable of rotating in a circular motion (turning motion, swinging motion) (see FIG. 268).

The tower object P7400 sends the game ball from the drive unit P7300 to the tower object P7400.
A first stage section P7500 and a second stage section P7 located in the upper, middle and lower stages of
600 and the third stage portion P7700 in order, and lead to the later-described specific area unit P7900. Note that the first stage portion P7500 and the second stage portion P760
A detailed description of the 0 and 3rd stage portions P7700 will be provided later. The tower P7400 comprises a rear frame P7410, a front frame P7420, a first stage portion P7500, a second stage portion P7600, a third stage portion P7700 and a cover portion P7800.

First, the configuration of the rear frame P7410 of the tower P7400 will be described.

The rear frame P7410 shown in FIGS. 239, 240 and 248 constitutes the rear portion of the tower P7400 and is relatively operably connected to the drive unit P7300. The rear frame P7410 includes a frame cover portion P7411 and a rear strut portion P7412.
and an upper end P7413.

The frame cover portion P7411 is a cover-like member having an outline similar to that of the rear half of a substantially truncated cone. The frame cover portion P7411 is open forward and downward. The frame cover portion P7411 includes a first stage portion P7500 and a second stage portion P, which will be described later.
7600 and the third stage portion P7700 are covered from behind. Frame cover part P7411
is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Thus, as shown in FIG. 248, a plate portion P7514 of the first stage base portion P7510 and a part of the first drive transmission portion P7540 are exposed to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening. ing. As shown in FIG. 248, a plate portion P76 of a second stage base portion P7610, which will be described later,
13 and a part of the second drive transmission part P7640 are connected to the frame cover part P74 through the opening.
11 are exposed to the outside. The frame cover portion P7411 includes a swing shaft portion P7411a.

The swing shaft portion P7411a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is the first stage portion P7 described later.
500 (the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530) is the pivot center of the swing motion. The swing shaft portion P7411a is formed in an elongated shape and arranged with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The swing shaft portion P7411a is provided on the front surface of the frame cover portion P7411 so as to protrude forward.

The rear strut portion P7412 shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 constitutes the strut of the rear frame P7410. The rear strut portions P7412 are provided (a pair) on both sides in the left-right direction of the frame cover portion P7411. The rear strut portion P7412 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the rear strut portion P7412 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The pair of rear struts P7412 are provided inclined so as to approach each other toward the upper end side.

The upper end portion P7413 shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, 250 and 251 constitutes the upper end portion of the rear frame P7410. 239 and 240
, the frame cover portion P7411 and the rear strut portion P7412 are formed as separate members. The upper end portion P7413 is fixed to the upper end portion (substantially semi-disk-shaped portion) of the frame cover portion P7411. The upper end portion P7413 includes a body portion P7413a and a fitting portion P7413.
b, a hole portion P7413c, a sensor portion P7413d, and a swing transmission portion P7413e.

The body portion P7413a shown in FIG. 237 is the main structure of the upper end portion P7413. The body portion P7413a is formed in a substantially disc shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. Body part P
As shown in FIG. 238, the disk portion P73 of the drive unit P7300 is mounted on the upper surface of the drive unit P7300.
80 is fixed.

The fitting portion P7413b is a portion that fits into the opening P7381 of the disk portion P7380.
The fitting portion P7413b is formed in the shape of a wall projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a. The fitting portion P7413b is formed in an arc shape that forms an elliptical wall corresponding to the shape of the opening P7381 together with the wall portion P7382 of the disk portion P7380 in plan view.

On the upper surface of the body portion P7413a, the wall portion P7382 of the disk portion P7380 and the fitting portion P7
413b and the inner part of the elliptical wall surrounded by the hole P73 of the distribution part P7360.
A game ball that has passed through 61c and dropped downward rolls.

The hole portion P7413c is a hole vertically penetrating the main body portion P7413a. Hole P7413
c is formed in the inner portion of the elliptical wall surrounded by the wall portion P7382 of the disk portion P7380 and the fitting portion P7413b. A game ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a passes through the hole portion P7413c and falls downward.

The sensor portion P7413d shown in FIGS. 250 and 251 detects passage of a game ball that has fallen through the hole portion P7413c. The sensor portion P7413d is provided below the hole portion P7413c.

The swing transmission portion P7413e shown in FIGS. 237, 245, 250 and 251 transmits the rotational motion of the tower P7400 to the distribution portion P7360. Swing transmission part P741
3e is formed so as to protrude upward on the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a. The swing transmission portion P7413e is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its axis directed vertically. The swing transmission portion P7413e is provided forward of the fitting portion P7413b. Swing transmission part P7413e
is received in the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360.

Next, the configuration of the front frame P7420 of the tower P7400 will be described.

The front frame P7420 shown in FIGS. 239, 240 and 249 constitutes the front part of the tower P7400. The front frame P7420 includes a front post portion P7421, a first guide portion P7422, a second guide portion P7423 and a third guide portion P7424.

The front strut portion P7421 shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 constitutes the strut of the front frame P7420. The front strut portion P7421 is connected to the pair of rear strut portions P7 of the rear frame P7410.
Each (a pair) is provided in front of 412 . The front strut portion P7421 is, in a front view,
It is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear strut portion P7412. The front strut portion P7421 is the discharge passage P7
421a, a first sensor portion P7421b and a second sensor portion P7421c.

240, 249, 259 and 267 is a passage for leading game balls to a specific area unit P7900 (non-specific area P7912) side described later. The discharge passage P7421a is formed substantially over the entire front strut portion P7421. The discharge passage P7421a has a rearwardly opened portion that extends from the rear strut portion P7412 of the rear frame P7410.
, and is generally formed in the shape of a passage extending in the vertical direction as a whole. thus,
The discharge passage P7421a is formed in the interior of the front strut portion P7421 so as to communicate from the upper end portion to the lower end portion.

The first sensor portion P7421b shown in FIGS. 249 and 258 is provided at a position between the first stage portion P7500 and the second stage portion P7600 in the discharge passage P7421a, and the passage of the game ball at the position is provided. is detected.

The second sensor portion P7421c shown in FIGS. 249 and 266 is provided at a position between the second stage portion P7600 and the third stage portion P7700 in the discharge passage P7421a, and the passage of the game ball at the position is provided. is detected.

The first guide portion P7422 shown in FIGS. 240 and 252 to 255 guides the game ball rolling on the first stage portion P7500 to the second stage portion P7600 side or the discharge passage P7.
421a side. The first guide portion P7422 is the first stage portion P
It is provided so as to cover the 7500 from the front to the bottom. The first guide part P7422 is
A second stage side guide portion P7422a and a discharge path side guide portion P7422b are provided.

The second stage side guide portion P7422a shown in FIGS. 240, 252 and 253 is
Part of the game ball rolling on the first stage portion P7500 (the first stage main body P7 described later)
530 first wall portion P7532), and roll the game ball to the second stage portion P7600 side (passage portion P7512 of the first stage base portion P7510 described later) It guides you to Second stage side guide portion P7
422a is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction. Second stage side guide portion P
The bottom of 7422a is sloped so that the height of the rear end is reduced. As a result, the game ball positioned in the second stage side guide portion P7422a rolls toward the rear end side of the second stage side guide portion P7422a.

The discharge passage side guide portion P7422b shown in FIGS.
7500 (game balls dropped from the second wall P7533 of the first stage main body P7530 described later) are received, and the game balls are discharged to the discharge passage P742.
It guides so that it rolls to the 1a side. The discharge passage side guide portions P7422b are provided (a pair) on both left and right sides of the second stage portion side guide portions P7422a. As shown in FIG. 240, the pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7422b communicate with the upper end portions of the pair of discharge passages P7421a.

The second guide portion P7423 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258 and 259 has a second
While covering the stage portion P7600 from the front to the bottom, the second stage portion P7
It guides the game ball that rolls 600 to the discharge passage P7421a side. The second guide portion P7423 includes a cover portion P7423a and a discharge passage side guide portion P7423b.

The cover portion P7423a covers the central portion of the second stage portion P7600 in the left-right direction from the front to the bottom.

The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b guides the game ball rolling on the second stage portion P7600 to the discharge passage P7421a side. The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is
It is formed in a groove shape with an open top. The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is formed in a generally arcuate shape that protrudes outward in a plan view. A pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7423b are provided so as to be positioned on both left and right sides of the cover portion P7423a. The downstream side of the pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7423b (the side opposite to the second stage portion P7600) communicates with the vertical middle portion of the pair of discharge passages P7421a.

The third guide portion P7424 shown in FIGS. 263, 264, 266 and 267 has a third
A game ball that rolls on the stage portion P7700 is guided to a specific area P7911 side or a non-specific area P7912 side, which will be described later. The third guide portion P7424 is provided so as to cover the third stage portion P7700 from the front. The third guide portion P7424 includes a specific region side guide portion P7424a and a non-specific region side guide portion P7424b.

The specific area side guide portion P7424a guides the game ball rolling on the third stage portion P7700 to the specific area P7911 side described later. Specific area side guide part P7424
a is formed in a box shape that is open vertically and rearwardly. Specific area side guide part P7424
a is provided at the central portion in the left-right direction of the third guide portion P7424. Specific area side guide part P
7424a is the central portion in the left-right direction of the third stage portion P7700 and the specific region P7 described later.
911 and .

The non-specific area side guide part P7424b guides the game ball rolling on the third stage part P7700 to the non-specific area P7912 side. Non-specific area side guide part P7424b
extends generally in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion is formed so as to curve inward in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 263). In addition, the lower end of the discharge passage P7421a is connected to the middle portion of the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b in the extending direction (see FIG. 240). The non-specific area side guide portions P7424b are provided (a pair) on both left and right sides of the specific area side guide portions P7424a. The non-specific area side guide portion P7424b communicates the right portion of the third stage portion P7700 with the right non-specific area P7912. In addition, the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b communicates the left portion of the third stage portion P7700 and the left non-specific area P7912 (
See Figure 263).

Next, the configuration of the first stage portion P7500 of the tower P7400 will be described.

The first stage portion P7500 shown in FIGS. 252 to 256 includes the rear frame P741
The game ball that has passed through the 0 hole portion P7413c rolls, and the game ball is distributed to the second stage portion P7600 side or the discharge passage P7421a side. The first stage part P7500 is provided on the upper part of the tower P7400. First stage part P7500
is a first stage base portion P7510, a support portion P7520, a first stage main body P75
30 and a first drive transmission part P7540.

The first stage base portion P7510 shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is the rear frame P74.
10 frame cover portion P7411, and is provided with a support portion P7520, a first stage body P7530, and a first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later.
The first stage base portion P7510 includes a fixed portion P7511, a passage portion P7512, a swing shaft portion P7513, and a plate portion P7514.

The fixed portion P7511 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed portion P7511 constitutes the rear end portion of the first stage base portion P7510. By fixing the fixing portion P7511 to the frame cover portion P7411, the first stage base portion P7510 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The passage portion P7512 is connected to the second stage portion side guide portion P74 of the first guide portion P7422.
It guides the game ball rolling on 22a so that it rolls toward the second stage portion P7600. The passage portion P7512 is provided in front of the fixed portion P7511. Further, the passage portion P7512 is provided so as to be positioned behind the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a so as to communicate with the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a. Passage P751
2 is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction. The bottom of the passage portion P7512 is inclined so that the height of the rear end is lower than that of the front end. As a result, the game ball positioned in the passage portion P7512 rolls toward the rear end portion of the passage portion P7512. The passage portion P7512 has a hole portion P7512a.

The hole portion P7512a is a hole penetrating vertically at the rear end portion of the bottom portion of the passage portion P7512. A game ball rolling in the passage portion P7512 passes through the hole portion P7512a and falls downward.

The swing shaft portion P7513 includes a support portion P7520 and a first stage main body P7530, which will be described later.
This is the axis that is the center of the rocking motion of the rocking motion. The swing shaft portion P7513 is provided above the passage portion P7512 so as to protrude rearward. The swing shaft portion P7513 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The axis of the swing shaft portion P7513 is provided so as to overlap the swing shaft portion P7411a of the rear frame P7410 in the front-rear direction.

A plate portion P7514 shown in FIGS. 248, 249, 255, and 256 constitutes the left portion of the first stage base portion P7510, and also serves as a first drive transmission portion P7540 described later.
is provided. The plate portion P7514 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. The plate portion P7514, as shown in FIG.
It protrudes to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through an opening formed in the frame cover portion P7411. The plate portion P7514 is formed with a hole through which an upper portion of a first shaft P7541 of a first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, is inserted. The plate portion P7514 is a rotation sensor P7514.
a.

A rotation sensor P7514a shown in FIG. 249 can detect a detected portion P7541a of a first shaft P7541, which will be described later. The rotation sensor P7514a is connected to the plate portion P7514
is provided at the bottom of the

A support portion P7520 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 256, and 272 is provided on the first stage base portion P7510 and supports a first stage main body P7530, which will be described later. The support portion P7520 includes a swing bearing portion P7521, a fixed portion P7522 and an engaging portion P7523.

The swing bearing portion P7521 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the swing shaft portion P7411a of the rear frame P7410 and the swing shaft portion P7513 of the first stage base portion P7510. The swing bearing portion P7521 is formed so as to open in the front-rear direction. A pair of rocking bearing portions P7521 are provided in front and rear. The swing shaft portion P7411a and the swing shaft portion P7513 are respectively inserted into the pair of swing bearing portions P7521, and the swing shaft portion P741 is connected to the swing shaft portion P741 via a predetermined bearing member, screw, or the like.
1a and the swing shaft portion P7513 are connected so as to be relatively rotatable.

The fixing portion P7522 is a portion to which a first stage main body P7530, which will be described later, is fixed. The fixed portion P7522 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. Fixed part P7
522 is formed integrally with the upper portion of the swing bearing portion P7521.

The engagement portion P7523 shown in FIGS. 256, 257, and 272 is a portion with which the swing transmission portion P7543 of the first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, is relatively movably engaged. The engaging portion P7523 is formed in a groove shape that opens toward the rear. The engaging portion P7523 is provided on the lower surface of the fixed portion P7522 to the left of the swing bearing portion P7521 (that is, a position shifted to the left from the swing center of the first stage main body P7530). engagement part P
7523 is integrally formed with the fixing portion P7522.

As shown in FIG. 272, the supporting portion P7520 is configured to move the swing shaft portion P7411a and It rocks so as to alternately and repeatedly tilt left and right around the rocking shaft portion P7513 (not shown in FIG. 272). A detailed description of the swing motion of the support portion P7520 via the first drive transmission portion P7540 will be given later.

A first stage main body P7530 shown in FIGS.
While being supported by, the game ball which passed through the hole P7413c of the rear frame P7410 rolls on the upper surface. The first stage main body P7530 is fixed portion P of the support portion P7520.
7522 and fixed. The first stage main body P7530 includes a support portion P7
520 swings integrally with the support portion P7520.

The first stage main body P7530 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view. The upper surface of the first stage body P7530 is inclined so that the central portion in the left-right direction is lower,
It is inclined so that the height of the front end is lower than that of the rear end. As a result, the game ball positioned on the first stage main body P7530 rolls toward the central portion in the left-right direction of the first stage main body P7530, and also rolls toward the front end portion. In addition, the first stage main body P7530 is
It comprises a passing portion P7531, a first wall portion P7532 and a second wall portion P7533.

The passage part P7531 passes the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 to the first stage body P7530.
This is a portion of the guide portion P7422 to pass through to the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a side. The passing portion P7531 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The passing portion P7531 is
It is opened vertically so that game balls can pass downward. The passing portion P7531 is provided in a state of protruding forward at the front end portion (central portion in the left-right direction) of the first stage main body P7530. The passage portion P7531 is located near the second stage portion side guide portion P of the first guide portion P7422 in plan view.
It is formed so as to overlap the front end of 7422a. Passing portion P7531 is sensor portion P
7531a.

The sensor portion P7531a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 detects a game ball passing through the passing portion P7531. The sensor portion P7531a is provided below the passing portion P7531.

The first wall portion P7532 shown in FIGS. 254 and 255 is the first stage main body P7530.
It guides the game ball rolling on the passing part P7531 side. First wall portion P75
32 is the first stage main body P75 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530.
It is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction from the front end portion of 30 to the middle portion in the front-rear direction. A pair of first wall portions P7532 are formed with an interval in the left-right direction. A pair of first wall portions P753
2 is positioned at the center in the left-right direction of the first stage main body P7530. A pair of first walls P
7532 forms a passage communicating with the passing portion P7531 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530.

The second wall portion P7533 shown in FIGS. 254 and 255 is the first stage main body P7530.
It partitions a part of the upper surface of the front and rear. The second wall portion P7533 is provided behind the first wall portion P7532 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530. A pair of the second wall portions P7533 are provided with an interval left and right. The pair of second walls P7533 are
The left-right direction outer end portion is provided at a position corresponding to the left-right direction outer portion of the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b of the first guide portion P7422. The pair of second wall portions P7533 are formed in an arcuate shape that protrudes obliquely rearward in plan view. The pair of second walls P7533 are
On the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530, a passage communicating with the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b is formed between the pair of first wall portions P7532.

The first drive transmission portion P7540 shown in FIGS. 249, 255 and 256 is a second
The driving force of the motor P7741 is transmitted to the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530. The first drive transmission portion P7540 is connected to the first stage base portion P751.
0 plate portion P7514. The first drive transmission part P7540 is connected to the first shaft P7
541, a first stage gear portion P7542 and a swing transmission portion P7543.

The first shaft P7541 is a portion to which the driving force of the second motor P7741 is transmitted via a second drive transmission portion P7640 which will be described later. The first shaft P7541 is formed in a vertically elongated cylindrical shape. The upper portion of the first shaft P7541 is the plate portion P7.
It is inserted through the hole of 514 and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The first shaft P7541 has a detected portion P7541a.

A detected portion P7541a shown in FIG. 249 is a portion detected by a rotation sensor P7514a. The part to be detected P7541a is the plate part P751 in the first shaft P7541.
It is fixed so as to be located below 4. The detected part P7541a is the first shaft P75
It protrudes in a predetermined direction along the radial direction of 41 . The detected portion P7541a is the first shaft P
7541 is detected by the rotation sensor P7514a when it reaches the predetermined rotation position.

The first stage gear portion P7542 is fixed to the upper end portion of the first shaft P7541. As the first shaft P7541 rotates, the first stage gear portion P7542 rotates integrally with the first shaft P7541 about the vertical axis.

The swing transmission portion P7543 shown in FIGS. 255 to 257 and 272 transmits the driving force transmitted from the first stage gear portion P7542 to the support portion P7520. The swing transmission portion P7543 is arranged in front of the first stage gear portion P7542. The swing transmission portion P7543 is supported on the upper surface of the plate portion P7514 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The swing transmission portion P7543 includes a body portion P7543a, a gear portion P7543b and a spiral portion P7543c.

The body portion P7543a is the main structural body of the swing transmission portion P7543. Body part P754
3a is formed in a substantially disc shape with the thickness direction oriented in the vertical direction.

The gear portion P7543b meshes with the first stage gear portion P7542. The gear portion P7543b is fixed to the lower portion of the main body portion P7543a.

The spiral portion P7543c shown in FIGS. 256, 257 and 272 is the
0 engaging portion P7523 for relatively operable engagement. Spiral part P754
3c is formed integrally with the main body portion P7543a, and is provided so as to protrude radially outward from the radial outer peripheral surface of the main body portion P7543a. The spiral portion P7543c is shown in FIG.
6 and FIG. 257, the height of the front end portion is higher than the height of the rear end portion, and the shape is formed by combining a pair of semi-arc-shaped spirals symmetrical to each other. Spiral part P
7543c, as shown in FIG. 256, is received in a groove formed in the engaging portion P7523 of the support portion P7520 and slidably engages with the engaging portion P7523.

Next, the configuration of the second stage portion P7600 of the tower P7400 will be described.

The second stage portion P7600 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258 and 259 rolls the game ball that has passed through the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500, and moves the game ball to the third It distributes to the stage part P7700 side or the discharge path P7421a side. The second stage portion P7600 is provided in the middle portion of the tower P7400. second
The stage portion P7600 includes a second stage base portion P7610 and a second stage main body P
7620, a second stage rotation part P7630, a second drive transmission part P7640, and a rotation cover part P7650.

The second stage base portion P7610 shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is the rear frame P74.
10 frame cover portion P7411 and a second stage main body P to be described later.
7620, a second stage rotation part P7630 and a second drive transmission part P7640 are provided. The second stage base portion P7610 includes a fixed portion P7611 and a passage portion P76.
12 and a plate portion P7613.

The fixing portion P7611 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed portion P7611 constitutes the rear end portion of the second stage base portion P7610. By fixing the fixing portion P7611 to the frame cover portion P7411, the second stage base portion P7610 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The passage portion P7612 guides a game ball that has passed through a passing portion P7621 of a second stage main body P7620, which will be described later, so as to roll toward the third stage portion P7700. The passage portion P7612 is provided in front of the fixed portion P7611. The passage portion P7612 is formed in a groove shape extending from the upper end portion (front end portion) while curving rearward and downward. Passage P76
The front end of 12 is open upward. The bottom of the passage portion P7612 is inclined so that the height of the rear end is lower than that of the front end. As a result, the game ball positioned in the passage portion P7612 rolls toward the rear end portion of the passage portion P7612. The passage portion P7612 is connected to the hole portion P76
12a.

The hole portion P7612a is formed at the rear end portion of the bottom portion of the passage portion P7612.
2 is a hole penetrating vertically. The game ball that rolls in the passage P7612 passes through the hole P7612a
pass through and fall downwards.

A plate portion P7613 shown in FIG. 259 constitutes the left portion of the second stage base portion P7610, and is a portion provided with a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later. Plate P7
613 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. The plate portion P7613 is
As shown in FIG. 248, it protrudes outside the frame cover portion P7411 through an opening formed in the frame cover portion P7411. In the plate portion P7613, a hole portion through which the lower end portion of the first shaft P7541 of the first drive transmission portion P7540 is inserted, and an upper portion of the second shaft P7641 of the second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later, are inserted. and a hole to be formed.

The second stage main body P7620 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258 and 259 is
This is the portion where the game ball that has passed through the hole portion P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 rolls on the upper surface. The second stage main body P7620 is fixed to the top of the second stage base portion P7610. The second stage main body P7620 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view. Further, the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 is formed in a substantially dish shape with the central side inclined downward. The upper surface (more specifically, the rear portion of the upper surface) of the second stage main body P7620 is formed so as to overlap the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 in plan view. Also, the second stage body P7620 is a pair of second stages of the front frame P7420.
The guide portion P7423 of the . More specifically, the right front end and left front end of the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 communicate with the upstream sides of the left and right discharge passage side guide portions P7423b provided on the front frame P7420, respectively. The second stage main body P7620 has a passing portion P7621.

The passing portion P7621 is a hole vertically penetrating the second stage main body P7620. The passing portion P7621 is formed substantially in the center of the second stage main body P7620 in plan view.
The passing portion P7621 constitutes a passage through which a game ball can pass downward. The passing portion P7621 is
A sensor part P7621a is provided. The passing portion P7621 is a sensor portion P7621a described later.
It communicates with the upper end (front end) of the passage portion P7612 via the .

The sensor portion P7621a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 detects a game ball passing through the passing portion P7621. The sensor portion P7621a is provided below the passing portion P7621.

The second stage rotating portion P7630 shown in FIGS. 258 to 261 rotates around an axis extending in the vertical direction radially outward of the second stage main body P7620.
The second stage rotating part P7630 is formed in a substantially annular shape in plan view. The second stage rotating portion P7630 includes an opening portion P7631, a gear portion P7632, and a rolling inhibition portion P76.
33.

An opening P7631 shown in FIGS.
It is an opening penetrating 0 vertically. The inner diameter of the opening P7631 is equal to that of the second stage main body P76
It is formed larger than the outer diameter of 20 . The opening P7631 is the second stage main body P7
620 is relatively operably received.

A gear portion P7632 shown in FIGS. 249, 260, and 261 is a portion to which the driving force of a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later, is transmitted. The gear portion P7632 is formed on the radial outer peripheral surface of the second stage rotating portion P7630. As shown in FIG. 249, the gear portion P7632 meshes with a second stage gear portion P7642 (third gear P7642c) of a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later.

The rolling inhibition portion P7633 shown in FIGS. 260 to 262 is the second stage body P76
By coming into contact with a game ball rolling on 20, the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) rolling inhibition portions P7633 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. Note that FIG. 262 shows the one located in the front part among the plurality of rolling inhibition parts P7633. The rolling inhibition portion P7633 includes a vertical portion P7633a and a projecting portion P7633c.

The vertical portion P7633a is a portion that protrudes upward from the upper portion of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The vertical portion P7633a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. In addition, the vertical portion P7633a is the second stage rotating portion P
When viewed in the radial direction of 7630, it is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape. The vertical portion P7633a is the hole P763
3b.

The hole portion P7633b is a hole penetrating the vertical portion P7633a in the thickness direction. hole P76
33b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the thickness direction of the vertical portion P7633a. Hole P7633
The upper end of b is located above the second stage main body P7620.

The projecting portion P7633c extends from the upper end of the vertical portion P7633a to the second stage rotating portion P7.
It protrudes radially inward of 630 . The projecting portion P7633c overlaps the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620 in plan view. The projecting portion P7633c is located slightly above the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620. The protruding portion P7633c is formed in a substantially triangular shape in plan view. The projecting portion P7633c is the second stage main body P76.
By contacting the game ball rolling on 20, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced. The protrusion P7633c has a notch P7633d.

The notch portion P7633d is obtained by notching the upper portion of the tip portion of the projecting portion P7633c in the projecting direction.

The second stage rotating part P7630 as described above is fitted to the second stage main body P7620 so as to receive the second stage main body P7620 through the opening P7631. In addition, the second stage rotating part P7630 is provided rotatably about the vertical axis with respect to the second stage main body P7620. That is, the second stage main body P
Immediately above the outer portion of 7620, four protrusions P7633c can be moved circumferentially.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 can collide with the projecting portion P7633c moving in the circumferential direction of the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620. In addition, since the hole P7633b is formed in the vertical portion P7633a, even if the game ball is positioned behind the rolling inhibition portion P7633, the game ball is visible to the player through the hole P7633b. can be made That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize how the rolling inhibition portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) contacts the game ball and reduces the rolling speed of the game ball.

The second drive transmission portion P7640 shown in FIGS. 249 and 259 is a second motor P
7741 is transferred to the second stage rotation part P7630 and the first drive transmission part P7540.
It is transmitted to The second drive transmission portion P7640 is connected to the second stage base portion P76.
10 is provided on the plate portion P7613. The second drive transmission part P7640 is connected to the second shaft P
7641 and a second stage gear portion P7642.

The second shaft P7641 is a portion to which the driving force of the second motor P7741 is transmitted via a third drive transmission portion P7740 which will be described later. The second shaft P7641 is formed in a vertically elongated cylindrical shape. The upper part of the second shaft P7641 is the plate part P7.
It is inserted through the hole of 613 and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The second stage gear portion P7642 transmits the driving force of the second shaft P7641 to the second stage rotating portion P7630. The second stage gear portion P7642 is the first
gear P7642a, second gear P7642b and third gear P7642c.

The first gear P7642a is fixed to the upper end of the second shaft P7641. As the second shaft P7641 rotates, the first gear P7642a rotates integrally with the second shaft P7641 about the vertical axis.

The second gear P7642b is arranged behind the first gear P7642a.
The second gear P7642b consists of a first gear P7642a and a third gear P7642 described later.
A two-stage gear meshing with c is constructed. The second gear P7642b is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the plate portion P7613 about an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The third gear P7642c is fixed to the lower portion of the first shaft P7541. The third gear P7642c meshes with the second gear P7642b. Also, the third gear P7642c meshes with the gear portion P7632 of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The third gear P7642c rotates integrally with the first shaft P7541.

The rotation cover portion P7650 shown in FIGS. 252, 253 and 260 covers the second stage rotation portion P7630 from the front. The rotating cover portion P7650 is provided with a rolling inhibiting portion P7.
It is formed so as to cover the front side portion (first half portion) of the second stage rotating portion P7630 except for 633 . The rotary cover part P7650 is fixed to the front part of the second stage main body P7620.

Next, the configuration of the third stage portion P7700 of the tower P7400 will be described.

A third stage portion P7700 shown in FIGS.
The game ball passing through the hole P7612a of the 7600 rolls, and the game ball is sorted to the specific area P7911 side or the non-specific area P7912 side of the specific area unit P7900 described later. The third stage portion P7700 is provided in the lower portion of the tower P7400. The third stage portion P7700 includes a third stage base portion P7710, a third stage main body P7720, a third stage rotation portion P7730, a third drive transmission portion P7740.
and a rotating cover part P7750.

The third stage base portion P7710 shown in FIGS.
It is fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of 7410, and is provided with a third stage main body P7720, a third stage rotating portion P7730, and a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later. The third stage base P7710 constitutes the bottom of the tower P7400. The third stage base portion P7710 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction directed vertically. The third stage base portion P7710 includes a fixed portion P7711, a gear holding portion P7712, a connecting portion P7713, and a rotation restricting shaft portion P7714.

A fixed portion P7711 shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed portion P7711 constitutes the rear end portion of the third stage base portion P7710. By fixing the fixing portion P7711 to the frame cover portion P7411, the third stage base portion P7710 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The gear holding portion P7712 shown in FIG. 267 constitutes the left portion of the third stage base portion P7710, and is a portion provided with a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later. A hole through which the lower end of the second shaft P7641 is inserted is formed in the gear holding portion P7712.

A connecting portion P7713 shown in FIGS.
This is the part that is connected to the ball shaft portion P7921 of the support portion P7920 provided on the 900 .
The connecting portion P7713 vertically penetrates the third stage base portion P7710. Connection part P7
713 is provided substantially in the center of the third stage portion P7700 of the tower P7400 in plan view.

The rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 shown in FIGS. 237 and 268 is a ball shaft portion P792 described later.
1 (supporting portion P7920) in the circumferential direction of the tower P7400 (in other words,
It regulates the rotation of the tower object P7400 in plan view). Rotation restriction shaft P771
4 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the third stage base portion P7710. Rotation restricting shaft P7
714 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its axis directed vertically. Rotation restriction shaft P771
4, the lower end portion is larger in diameter than the other portions. The rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 is connected to the connecting portion P
It is provided so as to be located on the right rear of 7713.

The third stage body P7720 shown in FIGS. 263, 264, 266 and 267 is
This is the portion where the game ball that has passed through the hole portion P7612a of the second stage portion P7600 rolls on the upper surface. The third stage main body P7720 is fixed to the top of the third stage base portion P7710. The third stage main body P7720 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view. The upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 is formed such that the front end portion is inclined forward and downward. The upper surface (more specifically, the rear portion of the upper surface) of the third stage main body P7720 is formed so as to overlap the rear end portion (hole portion P7612a) of the passage portion P7612 of the second stage portion P7600 in plan view. It is The third stage main body P7720 is the front frame P742.
0 of the third guide portion P7424. More specifically, the third stage body P772
0 communicates with the upper end of the specific area side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424. Also, the right front end and the left front end of the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 communicate with the upper ends of the left and right non-specific area side guide portions P7424b of the third guide portion P7424, respectively. The third stage main body P7720 has a protrusion P7721.

The protrusion P7721 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720. A plurality of projections P7721 (10 in the illustrated example) are provided. Also, in the example,
An example is shown in which the protrusion P7721 is not provided in the central portion of the third stage main body P7720 when viewed from the front. According to the protrusion P7721, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720.

The third stage rotating portion P7730 shown in FIGS. 260, 261, 266, and 267 rotates about an axis extending in the vertical direction radially outward of the third stage main body P7720. The third stage rotating part P7730 is formed in a substantially annular shape in plan view. The third stage rotating portion P7730 includes an opening portion P7731, a gear portion P7732, and a rolling inhibition portion P7733.

The opening P7731 shown in FIGS. 260 and 261 is an opening that vertically penetrates the third stage rotating portion P7730. The inner diameter of the opening P7731 is equal to that of the third stage main body P7720
formed larger than the outer diameter of the The opening P7731 is the third stage main body P772.
0 is relatively operationally acceptable.

The gear portion P7732 is a portion to which the driving force of a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later, is transmitted. The gear portion P7732 is formed on the radial outer peripheral surface of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The gear portion P7732 meshes with a third stage gear portion P7743 of a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later.

The rolling inhibition portion P7733 reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720. A plurality of (seven in this embodiment) rolling inhibition portions P7733 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The rolling inhibition portion P7733 consists of a vertical portion P7733a and a projecting portion P7733.
b.

The vertical portion P7733a is a portion that protrudes upward from the upper portion of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The vertical portion P7733a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730. In addition, the vertical portion P7733a is the third stage rotating portion P
When viewed in the radial direction of 7730, it is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape.

The projecting portion P7733b extends from the upper end of the vertical portion P7733a to the third stage rotating portion P7.
It protrudes radially inward of 730 . The projecting portion P7733b overlaps the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720 in plan view. The projecting portion P7733b is located slightly above the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720. The protruding portion P7733b is formed in a substantially triangular shape in plan view. The projecting portion P7733b is the third stage body P77.
By contacting the game ball rolling on 20, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced.

The third stage rotating part P7730 as described above is fitted to the third stage main body P7720 so as to receive the third stage main body P7720 through the opening P7731. In addition, the third stage rotating part P7730 is provided rotatably about the vertical axis with respect to the third stage main body P7720. That is, the third stage main body P
Immediately above the outer portion of 7720, a plurality of protrusions P7733b can be moved circumferentially. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 is moved in the circumferential direction of the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720.
can collide with

The third drive transmission portion P7740 shown in FIGS. 249 and 267 is a second motor P
7741 is transferred to the third stage rotation portion P7730 and the second drive transmission portion P7640.
It is transmitted to The third drive transmission portion P7740 is connected to the third stage base portion P77.
10 gear holding portion P7712. The third drive transmission portion P7740 includes a second motor P7741, an output gear P7742 and a third stage gear portion P7743.

The second motor P7741 is a drive source for the first stage main body P7530 (supporting portion P7520), the second stage rotating portion P7630, and the third stage rotating portion P7730. The second motor P7741 is provided at the rear portion of the lower surface of the gear holding portion P7712. The second motor P7741 is provided such that the output shaft vertically penetrates the gear holding portion P7712 and protrudes upward.

The output gear P7742 takes out the driving force of the second motor P7741. The output gear P7742 is fixed to the upper end of the output shaft of the second motor P7741.

The third stage gear portion P7743 transmits the driving force of the output gear P7742 to the third stage rotating portion P7730. The third stage gear portion P7743 meshes with the gear portion P7732 of the third stage rotating portion P7730. Third stage gear part P7743
is fixed to the lower part of the second shaft P7641. Also, the third stage gear portion P
As the 7743 rotates, the second shaft P7641 rotates around the vertical axis.

The rotation cover portion P7750 shown in FIGS. 260, 263 and 264 covers the third stage rotation portion P7730 from the front. The rotating cover portion P7750 is configured so that the rolling inhibition portion P7
It is formed so as to cover the front side portion (first half portion) of the third stage rotating portion P7730 excluding 733 . The rotary cover part P7750 is fixed to the front part of the third stage main body P7720.

Next, the configuration of the cover portion P7800 of the tower P7400 will be described.

The cover part P7800 shown in FIG. 237 includes a rear frame P7410 and a front frame P742.
It is a decoration that covers 0. The cover portion P7800 includes a rear cover portion P7810 and a left cover portion P78.
20 and a right cover part P7830.

The rear cover portion P7810 covers the entire rear frame P7410. The rear cover part P7810 is decorated to imitate the appearance of a tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the rear cover portion P7810.

The left cover portion P7820 covers the left portion of the front frame P7420. The left cover part P7820 is decorated to resemble the appearance of a tower. In the left cover part P7820,
A plurality of apertures are formed.

The right cover portion P7830 covers the right side portion of the front frame P7420. The right cover part P7830 is decorated to imitate the appearance of a tower. In the right cover part P7830,
A plurality of apertures are formed.

Next, the configuration of the specific area unit P7900 of the rendering device P7000 will be described.

The specific region unit P7900 shown in FIGS. 263 to 267 includes a specific region P7911
and a non-specific area P7912, and supports the tower P7400 from below. The specific area unit P7900 includes a base portion P7910 and a support portion P7920.

The base portion P7910 constitutes the lower portion of the rendering device P7000. The base portion P7910 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. In addition, the base portion P7910 is
It is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The base portion P7910 is fixed to the lower portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200 (see FIG. 236). That is, the base portion P7910 (and thus the specific area unit P7900) is relatively inoperable with respect to the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The base part P7910 comprises a specified area P7911, a non-specified area P7912 and a discharge passage P7913.

The specific area P7911 is for detecting the passage of a game ball relating to a V prize that can shift to a game state advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state. The specific area P7911 opens vertically. The specific region P7911 is positioned below the specific region side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424. In addition, the upper portion of the specific region P7911 communicates with the specific region side guide portion P7424a. In addition, the specific region P7911 communicates with a discharge passage P7913, which will be described later, at its lower portion. The specific area P7911 includes a sensor portion P7911a.

The sensor part P7911a detects a game ball passing through the specific area P7911. The sensor part P7911a is provided below the specific area P7911.

The non-specific area P7912 is for detecting passage of a game ball that does not result in a V prize. The non-specific region P7912 opens vertically. The non-specific region P7912 is the specific region P79
11 are provided on both sides in the left-right direction (a pair). The upper portion of the non-specific area P7912 communicates with a pair of non-specific area side guide portions P7424b (see FIG. 263). That is, the lower end (downstream end) of the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b is arranged above the non-specific area P7912. In addition, the non-specific area P7912 communicates at its lower side with an external discharge passage P7130 provided in the front cover portion P7100 shown in FIG. Non-specific area P7
912 comprises a sensor portion P7912a.

The sensor part P7912a detects a game ball passing through the non-specific area P7912. The sensor part P7912a is provided below the non-specific area P7912.

A discharge passage P7913 shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is a passage for discharging the game ball that has passed through the specific area P7911 to the outside of the specific area unit P7900. Exhaust passage P7913
is formed in the shape of a curved passage from the upper end toward the rear and downward. The game balls ejected through the ejection path P7913 are ejected to the outside of the game board P1100 through an appropriate path.

The support part P7920 shown in FIGS. 264 and 265 supports the tower P7400. The support portion P7920 is provided on top of the base portion P7910. Support part P7920
has a ball shaft portion P7921, a bearing portion P7922 and a rotation restricting bearing portion P7923.

The ball shaft portion P7921 is a portion that is connected to the tower object P7400 and serves as the axis of the turning motion (swinging motion) of the tower object P7400. The ball shaft portion P7921 is connected to the ball portion P7
921a, a lower shaft portion P7921b and an upper shaft portion P7921c.

The ball portion P7921a is a portion formed in a spherical shape. The ball portion P7921a is
It constitutes the lower part of the ball shaft portion P7921.

The lower shaft portion P7921b is a portion that protrudes downward from the ball shaft portion P7921. The lower shaft portion P7921b is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its axis directed substantially vertically.

The upper shaft portion P7921c is a portion that protrudes upward from the ball shaft portion P7921. The upper shaft portion P7921c is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its axis directed substantially vertically. The upper shaft portion P7921c is inserted into the connecting portion P7713 of the tower P7400 and connected to the connecting portion P7713.
713 is fixed. Thus, by fixing the upper shaft portion P7921c to the connecting portion P7713, the specific area unit P7900 and the tower P74 are connected via the ball shaft portion P7921.
00 are concatenated with each other.

The bearing portion P7922 shown in FIG. 265 rotates the ball shaft portion P7921 (swinging motion).
This is the part that can be accepted. The bearing portion P7922 includes a lower bearing portion P7922a and an upper bearing portion P7922b.

The lower bearing portion P7922a constitutes the lower portion of the bearing portion P7922. The lower bearing portion P7922a is formed with a recess that is recessed upward. Lower bearing P7922
The concave portion a is formed in a shape corresponding to the lower portion (lower half of the sphere) of the ball portion P7921a. Further, the lower shaft portion P7921b is inserted through the lower bearing portion P7922a,
A hole is formed to allow the rotational movement of the ball shaft portion P7921.

The upper bearing portion P7922b constitutes the upper portion of the bearing portion P7922. The upper bearing portion P7922b is formed with a recess that is recessed downward. Upper bearing part P7922
The concave portion b is formed in a shape corresponding to the upper portion (upper half of the sphere) of the ball portion P7921a. In addition, the upper shaft portion P7921c is inserted through the upper bearing portion P7922b,
A hole is formed to allow the rotational movement of the ball shaft portion P7921.

As shown in FIG. 265, in a state in which the ball shaft portion P7921 is received in the bearing portion P7922, the ball shaft portion P7921 is held so as to be capable of rotating with respect to the bearing portion P7922 via the upper shaft portion P7921c. That is, by connecting (fixing) the upper shaft portion P7921c of the ball shaft portion P7921 to the connecting portion P7713 of the tower object P7400, the tower object P7400 is held so as to be capable of rotating with respect to the specific area unit P7900. .

The rotation restricting bearing portion P7923 shown in FIGS. 237 and 268 receives the rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 of the tower P7400. The rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed in a concave shape in which the upper surface of the specific area unit P7900 (more specifically, the support portion P7920) is concaved downward. The rotation restricting bearing portion P7923 is formed so as to be located on the right rear side of the ball shaft portion P7921. That is, the rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is similar to the tower P7 in plan view.
It is formed at a position away from the center of the turning motion of 400 .

The rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed to allow the tower object P7400 to turn while receiving the rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower object P7400. Further, in a state in which the rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 is received in the rotation restricting bearing portion P7923, the rotation restricting bearing portion P
The rotational regulating shaft portion P7714 abuts on the inside of the opening of 7923, thereby regulating the circumferential rotation (rotation) of the tower object P7400 about the support portion P7920. As a result, the tower object P7400 can be rotated while the front side (the side of the front frame P7420) of the tower object P7400 always faces forward (toward the player).

The operation of the rendering device P7000 configured as described above will be described below.

In the effect device P7000, various members are configured to be able to execute respective actions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 268, the tower object P7400 performs a motion (swinging motion) in which the upper end portion turns in a circle. Further, as shown in FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271, the distribution portion P7360 of the drive unit P7300 swings in the horizontal direction around the swing shaft portion P7355. Further, each stage of the tower P7400 (first stage portion P7500, second stage portion P7600, and third stage portion P7700) swings (see FIG. 272) or rotates (FIGS. 259 and 259). 267) the action is performed. Below, each operation|movement mentioned above is demonstrated.

First, the turning motion (swinging motion) of the tower object P7400 will be described.

When the first motor P7353 shown in FIG. 245 etc. provided in the drive unit P7300 is driven, the output gear P7354 rotates. As a result, the drive gear P7370 meshing with the output gear P7354 rotates. The first motor P7353 is driven according to a control signal from a predetermined control means.

As shown in FIG. 245 and the like, a disk portion P7380 is provided in an opening P7372 provided at a position eccentric to the center of the driving gear P7370. As the driving gear P7370 rotates, the disk portion P7380 provided in the opening portion P7372 slides on the opening portion P7372 as shown in FIGS.
It moves so as to draw a circular trajectory in plan view around the center of 370 . In the illustrated example, the disk portion P73
It shows an example in which 80 is moved clockwise in plan view.

Thus, when the disk portion P7380 moves, the upper end portion P7413 (see FIG. 238, etc.) of the tower P7400 (rear frame P7410) fixed to the disk portion P7380 moves around the center of the driving gear P7370 together with the disk portion P7380. is moved to draw a circular trajectory in plan view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265 and the like, the lower end portion (third stage portion P7700) of the tower P7400 is specified via the ball shaft portion P7921 (that is, around the approximate center of the lower end portion). It is held by the supporting portion P7920 of the area unit P7900 so as to be able to turn. As a result, when the upper end portion P7413 of the tower object P7400 moves around the center of the driving gear P7370, the tower object P7400 moves toward the supporting portion P7 of the specific area unit P7900.
Centered on 920, as shown in FIG.
with its longitudinal axis inclined with respect to the vertical).

Also, at this time, the rotation restricting shaft portion P7714 of the tower P7400 is connected to the rotation restricting bearing portion P7.
By contacting the inside of the opening of 923, the tower object P7400 with the support part P7920 as the axis center
rotation (rotation) in the circumferential direction is regulated. As a result, the tower object P7400 turns with the front side (the side of the front frame P7420) always facing forward (toward the player).

By executing the turning motion (swing motion) of the tower object P7400, the tower object P7400
The first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600 and the third stage portion P7 of
The movement of the game ball rolling on the 700 can be varied, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the swing operation of the distribution portion P7360 of the drive unit P7300 will be described.

As the tower object P7400 rotates, the swing transmission portion P7413e provided at the upper end portion P7413 of the tower object P7400 rotates.
7355 as a center, it swings to the left and right. 244 and 269 to 27
1, the operation of the sorting part P7360 when the tower object P7400 turns clockwise in plan view will be described.

FIG. 244 shows a state in which the tower P7400 is tilted forward (a state in which the upper end P7413 is positioned forward). In this state, the swing transmission portion P7413e is positioned at the front end portion of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. Also, in this state, the distribution unit P7360
It will be facing forward. Here, the distribution portion P7360 is biased rightward by the spring portion P7352. In addition, rightward movement of the distribution portion P7360 due to the biasing force of the spring portion P7352 is restricted because the rightward-facing surface of the guide groove portion P7361d is in contact with the swing transmission portion P7413e.

As shown in FIG. 269, when the tower P7400 tilts to the left (the upper end portion P7413 is positioned to the left), the swing transmission portion P7413e moves toward the rear end portion in the guide groove portion P7361d. While relatively moving (sliding) toward it, it presses the inside of the guide groove portion P7361d to the left against the biasing force of the spring portion P7352. In the state shown in FIG. 269, the rocking motion transmission portion P7413e is positioned in the front-rear direction middle portion of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. In addition, the rocking motion transmitting portion P7413e is positioned to the left of the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distributing portion P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction. In this way, the distributing portion P7360 swings to face left by being pressed by the operation of the swing motion transmitting portion P7413e.

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, when the tower P7400 tilts backward (the upper end portion P7413 is positioned rearward), the swing transmission portion P7413e moves toward the guide groove portion P736.
It relatively moves (slides) within 1d toward the rear end side. In the state shown in FIG. 270, the swing transmission portion P7413e is positioned at the rear end portion of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. In addition, the rocking motion transmitting portion P7413e is located at the same position as shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution portion P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction. In this way, the rocking motion transmitting portion P7413e moves rearward as shown in FIG. 270 from the position shown in FIG. 269, thereby allowing the rightward movement of the distribution portion P7360. As a result, the distribution unit P7360
Due to the biasing force of the spring portion P7352, it swings forward.

As shown in FIG. 271, when the tower P7400 tilts to the right (the upper end portion P7413 is positioned on the right side), the swing transmission portion P7413e moves toward the guide groove portion P736.
It relatively moves (sliding) within 1d toward the front end side. In the state shown in FIG. 271, the rocking motion transmitting portion P7413e is positioned in the front-rear direction middle portion of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360. In addition, the rocking motion transmission portion P7413e is positioned to the right of the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution portion P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction. In this way, the rocking motion transmitting portion P7413e moves forward as shown in FIG. 271 from the position shown in FIG. 270, thereby allowing further rightward movement of the distribution portion P7360. As a result, the distribution portion P7360 swings rightward by the biasing force of the spring portion P7352.

In this embodiment, the distribution portion P7360 is biased rightward by the spring portion P7352 shown in FIG.
It can always be brought into contact with e. As a result, for example, when the direction in which the swing transmission portion P7413e presses the inside of the guide groove portion P7361d is changed, it is possible to prevent backlash from occurring in the operation of the distribution portion P7360. Distribution part P736
0 can be smoothly transmitted.

Next, the operation of each stage (the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700) of the tower P7400 will be described.

Third drive transmission portion P77 of third stage portion P7700 shown in FIGS. 249, 267, etc.
When the second motor P7741 provided in 40 is driven, the output gear P7742 rotates. The second motor P7741 is driven according to a control signal from a predetermined control means.

The rotation of the output gear P7742 is transmitted to the third stage rotating part P7730 via the third stage gear part P7743. Thereby, the third stage rotating part P7730 rotates with respect to the third stage main body P7720. That is, the third stage rotation part P77
30 rolling inhibiting portion P7733 (protruding portion P7733b) is the third stage main body P7720
Circumferentially move (rotate) the outer portion of the

When the rolling inhibition portion P7733 (protruding portion P7733b) of the third stage rotating portion P7730 rotating as described above hits the game ball on the third stage main body P7720, the motion of the game ball changes. can be given, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the rotation of the third stage gear portion P7743 is transmitted to the second drive transmission portion P764 of the second stage portion P7600 shown in FIGS. 249 and 259 via the second shaft P7641.
0. That is, the second drive transmission portion P7640 (the second stage gear portion P76
42) rotates as the second shaft P7641 rotates.
The rotation of the first gear P7642a rotates the second gear P7642b and the third gear P7642c.
to the second stage rotating part P7630. Thereby, the second stage rotating part P7630 rotates with respect to the second stage main body P7620. That is, the second
The rolling inhibition portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) of the stage rotating portion P7630 moves (rotates) in the circumferential direction on the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620.

When the rolling inhibition portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) of the second stage rotating portion P7630 rotating as described above hits the game ball on the second stage main body P7620, the movement of the game ball changes. can be given, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

25 through the first shaft P7541.
5 and the first drive transmission portion P7540 of the first stage portion P7500 shown in FIG. That is, the first stage gear portion P7542 of the first drive transmission portion P7540 is
It rotates as the first shaft P7541 rotates. The rotation of the first stage gear portion P7542 is transmitted to the swing transmission portion P7543. As a result, the swing transmission portion P7543 rotates about the vertical axis.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 256, 257 and 272, the engagement portion P of the support portion P7520
7523 is engaged with the spiral portion P7543c of the swing transmission portion P7543. By rotating the swing transmission portion P7543, the spiral portion P7543c slides with respect to the engaging portion P7523 while being engaged with the engaging portion P7523. At this time, the spiral portion P75
Since 43c is formed in a spiral shape, the height position of the portion where the spiral portion P7543c and the engaging portion P7523 engage with the rotation of the swing transmission portion P7543 (that is, the height of the engaging portion P7523 position) changes. Here, the engaging portion P7523 is provided at a position displaced leftward from the position of the swing center of the first stage main body P7530. Therefore, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 swing around the swing shaft portion P7411a and the swing shaft portion P7513 shown in FIG. 253 as the height position of the engaging portion P7523 changes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272(a), when the engagement portion P7523 is at the highest position, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 tilt to the right (the right side moves downward). do). Further, as shown in FIG. 272(b), the engaging portion P752
3 is the lowest position, the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P753
0 swings to tilt to the left (the left side moves downward). In this way, the support portion P75
20 and the first stage main body P7530 each time the swing transmission part P7543 makes a half turn,
Rocks to lean to the right and lean to the left. As a result, the first stage main body P75
The movement of the game ball on 30 can be varied, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this way, in the effect device P7000 that executes various actions, as described above, the game ball that rolls in the game area P1120 can be introduced into the interior, and the game ball can be placed on the side of the specific area P7911 or the non-specific area. It can be distributed to the P7912 side or the like. Below, the mode of rolling of the game ball introduced into the effect device P7000 will be described.

First, of the effect device P7000, the manner of rolling of the game ball in the drive unit P7300 will be described.

A game ball rolling in the game area P1120 is introduced into the effect device P7000 from the supply portion P7121 shown in FIG. 235 and the like. Then, as shown in FIG.
The game ball introduced from 1 is first guided to the crew part P7320. Specifically, the game ball introduced from the supply portion P7121 is supplied to the supply passage portion P7322 of the crew portion P7320.
It is guided to the Kroon main body P7321.

Here, the downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is opened in the direction along the circumferential direction in the outer portion of the crew main body P7321 in plan view. Therefore, the game ball guided from the supply passage portion P7322 to the Kroon main body P7321 rolls so as to rotate the Kroon main body P7321 (around the three holes P7321a) in the circumferential direction. Then, as the rolling momentum of the game ball decreases, the game ball is placed on the center side of the croon main body P7321 (three holes P73
21a side), and finally falls downward from any of the three holes P7321a.

The game ball falling from the crew main body P7321 (three holes P7321a) is then guided to the driving base portion P7330. Specifically, game balls falling from the three holes P7321a are received at the bottom of the driving base main body P7331 of the driving base P7330, and roll on the bottom.

Here, at the bottom of the driving base main body P7331, there is a rolling guide portion P7331a in front of the place where the game ball falling from the three holes P7321a is received (that is, in the direction in which the received game ball rolls). And (on the left and right of the rolling guide portion P7331a) convex portions are formed.
Therefore, the game ball rolling on the driving base main body portion P7331 moves forward on the rolling guide portion P7331a while colliding with, for example, the left and right convex portions.

In the present embodiment, among the three holes P7321a of the crew body P7321, the game ball dropped from the hole P7321a in the central portion in the left-right direction is relatively difficult to collide with the convex portion,
It is easy to move the rolling guide portion P7331a forward smoothly (relatively straight). On the other hand, the game balls that have fallen from the other two holes P7321a are relatively likely to collide with the convex portions, so it is difficult to smoothly move the rolling guide portion P7331a forward. Thus, the game ball rolled to the front end of the rolling guide portion P7331a falls from the front end of the rolling guide portion P7331a.

Here, below the front end portion of the rolling guide portion P7331a, the front end portion of the distribution portion P7360 (
More specifically, the front end portion of the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 and the left and right inclined portions P
7364) are arranged. A discharge guide portion P7340 is arranged below the front end portion of the distribution portion P7360. The distribution portion P7360 swings left and right. Therefore, the destination of the game ball falling from the front end of the rolling guide portion P7331a is changed according to the timing (the position where the game ball falls and the position of the distribution portion P7360 when it falls).

Specifically, when the game ball falls, if the passage portion P7361b of the distribution portion P7360 is located at the position where the game ball has fallen, the game ball that has fallen passes the passage portion P7361b (distribution portion P7360) can be received. On the other hand, when the game ball falls, if the passage part P7361b of the distribution part P7360 is not located at the position where the game ball falls (displaced left and right) (see FIGS. 269 and 271) , The fallen game ball is not received by the passage portion P7361b, collides with the edge portion (side plate) of the passage portion P7361b and the left and right inclined portions P7364, and is guided to the discharge guide portion P7340. Thus, the destination of the game ball falling from the rolling guide portion P7331a is changed (divided) according to the timing.

In addition, among the game balls guided to the ejection guide portion P7340, the ejection guide portion P7340
The game ball rolling to the left end side of the front cover portion P7100 is discharged from the left discharge portion P71 (not shown) of the front cover portion P7100.
22 to the game area P1120 again. Also, the game ball rolling toward the right end of the ejection guide portion P7340 is ejected to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100 via the ejection portion P7122 on the right side of the front cover portion P7100.

In addition, the game ball received in the passage portion P7361b (distribution portion P7360) is the passage portion P
It rolls to the rear end side of 7361b. When the game ball reaches the rear end of the passage P7361b, it passes through the hole P7361c and falls downward. Distribution part P7360 (hole part P73
61c) is then guided to the upper end P7413 of the tower P7400 through the opening P7381 of the disk P7380. That is, the distribution part P7360 (hole P
7361c) is ejected from the drive unit P7300 and then introduced into the tower P7400.

Next, of the effect device P7000, the manner of rolling of the game ball in the tower object P7400 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 250, the game ball guided to the upper end P7413 of the tower P7400 rolls on the upper surface of the main body P7413a of the upper end P7413, and then passes through the hole P7413c and falls downward. .

The game ball falling from the upper end portion P7413 (hole portion P7413c) is then guided to the first stage portion P7500. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole P7413c is the first
is received by the first stage main body P7530 of the stage portion P7500, and rolls on the first stage main body P7530.

Here, as shown in FIG. 252, a hole P7413 is provided in the first stage main body P7530.
A first wall portion P7532 and a second wall portion P7533 are formed in front of the place where the game ball falling from c is received (that is, the direction in which the received game ball rolls). Also, the tower P7400 and the first stage part P7500 perform different motions (swivel motion and rocking motion). Therefore, the game ball moving forward on the first stage main body P7530 is affected by the action of the tower P7400 and the first stage P7500, and is affected by the first wall P7532 and the second wall P7533. Moves forward while colliding (gradually while moving in an irregular direction).

The game ball rolling to the front end portion of the left-right center of the first stage main body P7530 falls downward from the passing portion P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. On the other hand, the game ball that rolls from the left-right center of the first stage body P7530 to the left-right shifted front end falls downward from the left-right shifted position of the passing portion P7531 (not the passing portion P7531). do.

Here, the second stage side guide portion P7422a of the first guide portion P7422 is arranged below the passing portion P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. thus,
The game ball dropped from the passing portion P7531 is received by the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a, and rolls backward on the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a. The game ball rolling backward on the second stage side guide portion P7422a is guided by the passage portion P7512, passes through the hole portion P7512a and falls.

On the other hand, the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b of the first guide portion P7422 is arranged below the position shifted to the left and right of the passage portion P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. In this way, the game ball dropped from the position shifted to the left and right of the passage portion P7531 is received by the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b, and is received by the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b (Fig. 2
40 etc.) is guided to the discharge passage P7421a of the front strut portion P7421. in this way,
The destination of the game ball guided to the first stage portion P7500 is changed (distributed) according to the place where it falls from the first stage main body P7530. In addition, the discharge passage P74
The game ball guided to 21a is guided to the non-specific area side guide portion P7 of the third stage portion P7700.
424b to the non-specific region P7912 of the specific region unit P7900.

The game ball falling from the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 is then guided to the second stage portion P7600. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole portion P7512a is received by the second stage main body P7620 of the second stage portion P7600,
rolls on the stage main body P7620.

Here, the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 is formed in a substantially dish shape with the central side inclined downward. In addition, four protruding portions P7633c of the rolling inhibition portion P7633 are moved in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620. In addition, tower officials P
7400 is performing a pivoting motion. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620 is affected by the action of the tower object P7400, and the second stage main body P7
Depending on the inclination of 620, it rolls toward the center or collides with the moving protrusion P7633c, thereby moving in an irregular direction. In this way, the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620 finally passes through the passing portion P7621 and falls downward, or is discharged from the right front end and left front end of the second stage main body P7620. It falls to the side guide portion P7423b.

In this way, the game ball that has fallen from the passage portion P7621 is moved to the second stage base portion P761
0, and rolls backward on the passage P7612. Passage P
The game ball rolling backward on 7612 passes through the hole P7612a and falls downward. On the other hand, the game ball that has moved to the discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is moved to the discharge passage P742 of the front strut portion P7421 (shown in FIG. 240 etc.) by the discharge passage side guide portion P7423b.
It is guided to 1a. Thus, the game ball guided to the second stage portion P7600 is
The destination is changed (distributed) according to the place where it falls from the second stage main body P7620.

As shown in FIGS. 252 and 263, the hole portion P7612a of the second stage portion P7600
The game ball that falls from is then guided to the third stage portion P7700. in particular,
A game ball falling from the hole portion P7612a is received by the third stage body P7720 of the third stage portion P7700, and rolls on the third stage body P7720.

Here, as shown in FIG. 263, the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 has a front end inclined forward and downward, and a plurality of protrusions P7721 are formed. In addition, a plurality of protruding portions P7733b of the rolling inhibition portion P7733 are moved in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720. Also, the tower object P7400 is executing a turning motion. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720 is affected by the action of the tower P7400, and while rolling forward according to the inclination of the third stage main body P7720, the protrusion P7721 and the It moves in random directions by colliding with the moving protrusion P7733b. Thus, the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720 falls from the front end of the third stage main body P7720 to the specific area side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424, or the third stage It falls from the right front end and left front end of the main body P7720 to the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b of the third guide portion P7424.

Thus, the game ball that has fallen to the specific area side guide portion P7424a is guided to the specific area P7911 of the specific area unit P7900 by the specific area side guide portion P7424a. On the other hand, the game ball that fell to the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b is the non-specific area P of the specific area unit P7900 by the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b.
It is guided to 7912. Thus, the destination of the game ball guided to the third stage portion P7700 is changed (distributed) according to the place where it falls from the third stage main body P7720.

In this way, in the production device P7000, while various members are configured to be able to execute their respective actions, the game balls introduced inside can be distributed in multiple stages to the specific area P7911 side and the non-specific area P7912 side. . As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498
(see publication).

The above publication discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
The first movable body (driving gear P7370), the second movable body (tower object P7400), and the third
and a movable body (distribution part P7360),
The first movable body (driving gear P7370) is driven by a first driving source (first motor P7353
) can be operated by the driving force from
The second movable body (tower P7400) is connected to the first movable body (driving gear P7370).
and can operate with the operation of the first movable body (drive gear P7370),
The third movable body (distribution part P7360) is in contact with the second movable body (tower object P7400), and can move in accordance with the movement of the second movable body (tower object P7400). can be,
The second movable body (tower P7400) and the third movable body (distribution part P7360) operate in different operation modes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the second movable body (tower object P7400) can operate with a predetermined portion (front portion) always facing the player side.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first movable body (driving gear P7370) and the second movable body (tower P74
00) and are in sliding contact with each other.

With such a configuration, it is possible to operate the second movable body (tower object P7400) by utilizing the operation of the first movable body (driving gear P7370).

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) and the third movable body (distribution part P736
0) and are in sliding contact with each other.

With such a configuration, it is possible to operate the third movable body (dividing part P7360) by utilizing the motion of the second movable body (tower object P7400).

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) is the second movable body (tower object P740
0) provided with a flow path for the game ball supplied to
The third movable body (distribution part P7360) moves the game ball to the second movable body (tower object P74).
00) is equipped with a guideway (passage P7361b).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the action mode of the second movable body (tower object P7400) is a rotating action or a swinging action.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the operation mode of the third movable body (dividing portion P7360) is a swinging operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the third movable body (distribution part P7360) is connected to the third movable body (distribution part P736
0), the game ball that arrives at a predetermined timing according to the operation of the guideway (passage part P736
1b) to the second movable body (tower P7400).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, a winning device (specific area unit P7900) capable of detecting winning of a game ball passing through the flow path of the second movable body (tower object P7400) is provided,
The second movable body (tower object P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a second flow path (a non-specific area P7912 a flow path communicating with the
The winning device (specific area unit P7900) is connected to the first channel (specific area P791
1) to detect the winning of the game ball passing through (the specific area P791
1) and a second detection section (non-specific area P7912) for detecting the winning of the game ball passing through the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912).

With such a configuration, game balls can be sorted.

In addition, a winning device (specific area unit P7900) capable of detecting winning of a game ball passing through the flow path of the second movable body (tower object P7400) is provided,
The second movable body (tower P7400) is in contact with the first movable body (driving gear P7370) in the upper part, and the winning device (specific area unit P7900) in the lower part.
).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to win a game ball that has passed through the second movable body (tower object P7400).

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) includes a first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and a second drive source (
It can be operated by the driving force from the second motor P7741), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower P7400) is connected to the first flow path (specific area P7911). path) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912). Be prepared.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) includes a first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is provided with a different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower object P7400) is passed through the first flow path ( Flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) Distributing parts (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600 and 3 stage part P7700),
A plurality of distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) includes a first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is provided with a different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower object P7400) is passed through the first flow path ( Flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) Distributing parts (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600 and 3 stage part P7700),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) is provided in plurality in the vertical direction,
The plurality of distribution sections (the first stage section P7500, the second stage section P7600, and the third stage section P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) includes a first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is provided with a different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower object P7400) is passed through the first flow path ( Flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) Distributing parts (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600 and 3 stage part P7700),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) is provided in plurality in the vertical direction,
The plurality of distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of motion modes include at least rotational motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second movable body (tower object P7400) includes a first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is provided with a different second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower object P7400) is passed through the first flow path ( Flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) Distributing parts (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600 and 3 stage part P7700),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) is provided in plurality in the vertical direction,
The plurality of distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of motion modes include at least rocking motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

As shown in parentheses above,
The drive gear P7370 is one form of the first movable body.
Also, the tower object P7400 is one form of the second movable body.
Also, the distribution part P7360 is one form of the third movable body.
Also, the passage portion P7361b is a form of a guideway.
Also, the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700 are one form of the sorting portion.
Also, the specific area unit P7900 is one form of a winning device.
Further, the specific region P7911 is one form of the first detection section.
Also, the non-specific region P7912 is one form of the second detection section.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first part (tower P7400), the second part (distribution part P7360), and the base part (
A specific area unit P7900) and a gaming machine having a structural unit comprising:
The first part (tower P7400) has a flow path for a game ball supplied to the first part (tower P7400),
The second part (distribution part P7360) distributes the game ball to the first part (tower P7400).
) with a guideway (passage part P7361b),
The base part (specific area unit P7900) is connected to the first part (tower object P7400
) has a detection means (sensor part P7911a) capable of detecting the winning of a game ball that has passed through the flow path,
At least one of the first portion (tower P7400) and the second portion (dividing portion P7360) is movable with respect to the base portion (specific area unit P7900).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Both the first part (tower P7400) and the second part (dividing part P7360) are movable with respect to the base part (specific area unit P7900).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second portion (distribution portion P7360) corresponds to the base portion (specific area unit P7360).
900), and
A game ball that reaches the second part (distribution part P7360) at a predetermined timing is guided to the first part (tower P7400) through the guideway (passage part P7361b). .

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(channel communicating with the non-specific region P7912).

With such a configuration, game balls can be sorted.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(flow path communicating with non-specific area P7912), and the first part (tower P74
00) can be distributed to the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) (first
stage portion P7500, second stage portion P7600 and third stage portion P7700
).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(flow path communicating with non-specific area P7912), and the first part (tower P74
00) can be distributed to the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) with
A plurality of the distribution units are provided,
The first flow path (specific region P791
1) can be transferred to the distribution section on the downstream side.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(flow path communicating with non-specific area P7912), and the first part (tower P74
00) can be distributed to the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) (first
stage portion P7500, second stage portion P7600 and third stage portion P7700
),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) is a deceleration section (
It is provided with a rolling inhibition portion P7633).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(flow path communicating with non-specific area P7912), and the first part (tower P74
00) can be distributed to the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) (first
stage portion P7500, second stage portion P7600 and third stage portion P7700
),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) is a deceleration section (
rolling inhibition portion P7633, protrusion P7721, rolling inhibition portion P7733),
The deceleration portion (rolling inhibition portion P7633, projection portion P7721, rolling inhibition portion P7733) is
By contacting the rolling game ball with the distribution part, the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(flow path communicating with non-specific area P7912), and the first part (tower P74
00) can be distributed to the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) (Second
A stage portion P7600 and a third stage portion P7700) of
The distribution section (second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the distribution section (rolling inhibition section P7633, protrusion P7721 , rolling inhibition portion P7733),
The deceleration portion (rolling inhibition portion P7633, projection portion P7721, rolling inhibition portion P7733) is
It is formed in a protrusion shape protruding in one direction.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first portion (tower P7400) is different from the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). different second
(flow path communicating with non-specific area P7912), and the first part (tower P74
00) can be distributed to the first flow path (flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) or the second flow path (flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912) (Second
The stage part P7600) of
The distribution section (second stage section P7600) includes a deceleration section (rolling inhibition section P7633) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the distribution section,
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) distributes the game ball whose rolling speed is reduced by the deceleration section (rolling inhibition section P7633), It has a visual recognition portion (hole P7633b) that can be visually recognized by the player.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower P7400) and the second part (distribution part P7360)
and the base portion (specific area unit P7900) are separate members.

With such a configuration, the operable member and the inoperable member can be separate members.

As shown in parentheses above,
Tower P7400 is one form of the first part.
Also, the distribution part P7360 is one form of the second part.
Also, the passage portion P7361b is a form of a guideway.
Also, the first stage portion P7500, the second stage portion P7600, and the third stage portion P7700 are one form of the sorting portion.
Also, the rolling inhibition portion P7633, the protrusion P7721, and the rolling inhibition portion P7733 are one form of the deceleration portion.
Moreover, the hole P7633b is one form of the visual recognition part.
Also, the specific region unit P7900 is one form of the base portion.
Further, the specific region P7911 is one form of the first detection section.
Also, the non-specific region P7912 is one form of the second detection section.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example was shown in which both the tower object P7400 and the sorting part P7360 are operated with respect to the specific area unit P7900, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, one of the tower object P7400 and the distribution part P7360 can be transferred to the specific area unit P79
00 may be configured to operate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the tower object P7400 is configured to be capable of turning (swinging), but it is not limited to such a configuration. As the motion of the tower object P7400, various motions such as swinging motion, rotating motion, reciprocating motion, etc. that can distribute game balls can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution part P7360 is configured to be capable of swinging, but the configuration is not limited to this. As the motion of the distribution part P7360, for example, various motions capable of distributing game balls, such as turning motion, rotating motion, and reciprocating motion, can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second stage portion P76 is provided as an obstacle to the rolling of the game ball.
00, and the rolling inhibition portion P7733 and projection P7721 of the third stage portion P7700 are shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As an obstacle to the rolling of the game ball, for example, a plate-shaped member (for example, a shutter ), it is possible to adopt various configurations that can inhibit the rolling of the game ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing the hole P7633b in the rolling inhibition portion P7633 of the second stage portion P7600, the second stage main body P76 can be moved through the hole P7633b.
Although an example in which the game ball rolling on 20 can be visually recognized has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. As a configuration that enables visual recognition of the game ball on the stage (for example, the second stage portion P7600), for example, the entire or part of the rolling inhibition portion P7633 is formed of a transparent material, or a winning opening is provided. Various configurations can be adopted, such as forming the front side surface of various units such as units and attacker units arranged in the game area P1120 with a material having permeability.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable object (tower object P7400) is modeled after a tower, but the shape of the movable object is not limited to such a form, and various shapes can be adopted. is.

Further, in this embodiment, a display device 7 as shown in FIG. 4 can be provided in order to display effect images and decorative patterns. That is, the display device 7 displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol by variably displaying the decorative symbols, the effect image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the effect image during the jackpot game state, and the demonstration. It is possible to display a performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like.

In addition, the movable role object (tower object P7400) of the present embodiment is installed in a so-called two-type pachinko game machine instead of being installed in a pachinko game machine of a type 1 type or a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. can also

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball received at a predetermined timing
Although the configuration in which the sorting portion P7360 is a "movable prize winning opening" by guiding it to the 7911 side has been exemplified, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the passage portion P of the distribution portion P7360
The fact that the game ball was received at the tip of 7361b itself (that is, the passage part P by a predetermined sensor
Detection of receiving a game ball at the tip of 7361b) may be a prize. In that case, the winning in the sorting section P7360 may be the winning in the first or second start opening, or may be the winning in the specific area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the unit (specific area unit P7900) at the lower end of the effect device P7000 is illustrated as having a specific area in which a prize can be won, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the unit at the lower end of the effect device P7000 is the first
Or it is good also as a structure which has a 2nd starting port.

Below, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Components identical or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same names or the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment has the effect device C1000.
It differs greatly from the pachinko game machine according to the embodiment. The configuration of the rendering device C1000 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 273 to 288. FIG. In addition, in the above drawings, illustration of members is appropriately omitted for convenience of explanation. For example, in FIGS. 276-278,
Illustration of the logo accessory C1500 is omitted.

The effect device C1000 operates at an appropriate timing to give the player a visual impression (
impact). The effect device C1000 is installed above the game board P1100. The production device C1000 mainly includes a movable production accessory C1100 and a drive mechanism C120.
0, a holding mechanism C1300, a shock absorbing means C1400 and a logo accessory C1500.

The logo accessory C1500 shown in FIGS. 273 to 275 is appropriately decorated.
Specifically, the logo accessory C1500 is decorated to imitate a logo consisting of appropriate characters (for example, "ABC"). The logo accessory C1500 is arranged in front of the movable effect accessory C1100. The logo accessory C1500 and the movable effect accessory C1100 are configured to be movable relative to each other.

The movable production accessory C1100 shown in FIGS. 273 to 279 and the like performs production by moving. Specifically, the movable production accessory C1100 is provided so as to be movable up and down by a driving mechanism C1200, which will be described later. The movable effect accessory C1100 is provided with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The operation of the movable production accessory C1100 is controlled by the production operation control circuit 89. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the movable production accessory C1100 has a position before production (standby position shown in FIG. 289), and a position below the standby position during production (FIG. 291
), and a position below the intermediate position (Fig.
95) is movably provided. The movable effect accessory C1100 mainly includes a harpoon accessory C1120 and a support C1130.

The harpoon accessory C1120 shown in FIGS. 276 to 279 and the like is appropriately decorated, and performs an effect by moving. Specifically, the harpoon accessory C1120 is decorated to imitate a harpoon. The harpoon accessory C1120 is provided behind the logo accessory C1500. The harpoon accessory C1120 is mainly composed of a accessory decorative body C1121, a light guide plate C1122, and an accessory electrical board C
1123 and a base portion C1124.

The accessory decorative body C1121 shown in FIGS. 276, 278, and 279 is a portion that is appropriately decorated and that can be moved during production. The accessory decoration C1121 is formed in a shape imitating a harpoon. The accessory decorative body C1121 mainly includes a first decorative body C1121a, a second decorative body C1121b and a first decorative lens C1121c.

The first decorative body C1121a is formed in a shape imitating a harpoon. First decoration C1121
a is provided with its longitudinal direction directed vertically. The first decoration C1121a is the accessory decoration C1
121 in the center of the left and right. An opening penetrating through the first decoration C1121a in the front-rear direction is formed in the approximate center of the first decoration C1121a in a front view, and the second decoration lens C1121d made of a transparent material is formed in the opening. is provided. Second decorative lens C
1121d is formed in a substantially diamond shape when viewed from the front.

The second decorative body C1121b is shaped like a harpoon. Second decoration C1121
b is provided with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. The second decoration C1121b is the first decoration C1
121a are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. The second decoration C1121b is formed to be rotatable clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view about the upper part of the second decoration C1121b by a driving mechanism (not shown).

The first decorative lens C1121c is made of transparent material. First decorative lens C
1121c is provided between the first decoration C1121a and the left and right second decorations C1121b.

The light guide plate C1122 shown in FIG. 279 and the like diffuses light. The light guide plate C1122 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Light guide plate C112
2 is provided behind the accessory decoration C1121.

The accessory electrical decoration board C1123 shown in FIG. 279 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Accessory illumination board C
1123 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The accessory electrical board C1123 is provided behind the light guide plate C1122. Accessory illumination board C1123
On the front surface of the , there are a plurality of light emitting parts C1123 over substantially the entire left and right area of the accessory electrical board C1123
a is provided. The light emitting part C1123a is configured by an LED. The light emitting part C1123
By causing a to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light to the front of the accessory electrical decoration board C1123.

The base portion C1124 shown in FIG. 279 and the like supports the accessory decorative body C1121, the light guide plate C1122, and the accessory electrical decoration board C1123. The base portion C1124 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The base portion C1124 is provided with its longitudinal direction directed to the left and right. Base portion C1
124 is formed with a guided portion C1124a.

The guided portion C1124a shown in FIG. 279 (and FIG. 294) is an inclined guide portion C12 described later.
30 is the part guided. The guided portion C1124a is formed in a columnar shape with the axis directed to the left and right. The guided portion C1124a is provided at the left end of the base portion C1124.

In the harpoon accessory C1120 formed in this manner, the first decorative lens C1121c and the second decorative lens C1121d can be illuminated by irradiating light from the light-emitting portion C1123a of the accessory electrical board C1123.

A support C1130 shown in FIG. 278 and the like rotatably supports the harpoon accessory C1120. The support C1130 is provided behind the harpoon accessory C1120. The support C1130 mainly includes a base member C1131, a rotating shaft C1132 and a slider C1133.

The base member C1131 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The base member C1131 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Base member C1131
is provided behind the upper portion of the harpoon accessory C1120.

The rotation axis C1132 is a portion that becomes the rotation center of the harpoon accessory C1120. Rotating shaft C113
2 is inserted into the harpoon accessory C1120 with its axis directed to the left and right, and is attached to the base member C11
31 is rotatably provided. A pair of left and right rotation shafts C1132 are provided.

The slider C1133 is a portion guided by a shaft C1217 and a shaft C1227 which will be described later. The sliders C1133 are provided at the left end and right end of the base member C1131, respectively. A shaft C1217, which will be described later, is inserted through (the through hole of) the left slider C1133. A shaft C1227, which will be described later, is inserted through (the through hole of) the slider C1133 on the right side. The left slider C1133 is the right slider C1133
placed at a higher position than

The drive mechanism C1200 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278 and 280 to 286 drives the movable performance accessory C1100. The drive mechanism C1200 includes the left lifting mechanism C1.
210, a right lifting mechanism C1220 and an inclined guide portion C1230.

The left elevating mechanism C1210 shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, 280 and 281 constitutes the left part of the elevating mechanism for driving the movable production accessory C1100 up and down. The left elevating mechanism C1210 mainly includes a base portion C1211, an upper pulley C1212, a lower pulley C1213, a belt C1214, a transmission gear C1215, an elevating drive motor C1216, a shaft C1217, and a carriage C1218.

A base portion C1211 shown in FIGS.
210 supports various members. The base portion C1211 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The base portion C1211 is provided with its plate surface directed forward and backward and its longitudinal direction directed vertically. A pin C1211a is provided on the base portion C1211.

A pin C1211a shown in FIG. 286 is fixed to the front surface of the base portion C1211 and provided so as to protrude forward from the base portion C1211. Three pins C1211a are provided at positions corresponding to grooves C1333a described later, and two pins C1211a are provided at positions corresponding to grooves C1411 described later.

The upper pulley C1212 shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley C1212 is rotatably supported near the upper end of the front surface of the base portion C1211. A gear (not shown) is formed on the upper pulley C1212.

The lower pulley C1213 shown in FIGS. 281, 283 and 284 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley C1213 is rotatably supported near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion C1211 (below the upper pulley C1212).

A belt C1214 shown in FIGS. 278 and 280 to 284 is for vertically moving a carriage C1218, which will be described later. The belt C1214 is connected to the upper pulley C1
212 and the lower pulley C1213.

The transmission gear C1215 shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 transmits driving force to the upper pulley C1212. The transmission gear C1215 is a gear (
not shown).

The lifting drive motor C1216 shown in FIGS.
It is a driving source for raising 1100 . The up-and-down drive motor C1216 is driven by the base portion C1.
It is fixed to the upper part of 211 . A drive force from an output shaft (not shown) of the elevation drive motor C1216 is transmitted to the transmission gear C1215. When the transmission gear C1215 is rotated by the driving force of the elevation drive motor C1216, the upper pulley C12 is pulled up with the rotation of the transmission gear C1215.
12 rotates. This causes the belt C1214 to rotate between the upper pulley C1212 and the lower pulley C1213.

The shaft C1217 shown in FIGS. 278 and 280 to 284, etc.
It guides 100 up and down. A pair of left and right shafts C1217 are provided behind the base portion C1211. The shaft C1217 is formed to extend vertically from the vicinity of the lower end of the base portion C1211 to the vicinity of the upper end thereof. The shaft C1217 guides the slider C1133 and, by extension, the movable production accessory C1100 up and down by being inserted through (the through hole of) the left slider C1133.

A carriage C1218 shown in FIGS. 280, 281, 283 and 284 is for moving upward the movable production accessory C1100. As shown in FIG. 284, the carriage C1218 is formed so as to sandwich the belt C1214.
Fixed at 1214. A shaft C1217 is inserted inside the carriage C1218. The carriage C1218 thus formed has a belt C1214 which is driven by the upper pulley C.
By rotating between 1212 and the lower pulley C1213, it can move up and down along the shaft C1217.

The right lifting mechanism C1220 shown in FIGS.
It constitutes the right part of the lifting mechanism for driving the 1100 up and down. Right lifting mechanism C1
220 mainly includes a base portion C1221, an upper pulley (not shown), and a lower pulley (not shown).
, belt C1224, transmission gear (not shown), elevation drive motor C1226, shaft C12
27 and carriage C1228. Note that the right elevating mechanism C1220 is configured substantially in the same (substantially symmetrical) manner as the left elevating mechanism C1210, so the configuration thereof will be briefly described below.

A belt C1224 is wound around an upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley (not shown), and the belt C1224 is rotated by the driving force of an elevation drive motor C1226.

The shaft C1227 guides the slider C1133 and thus the movable effect accessory C1100 up and down by being inserted inside the right slider C1133. Carriage C1
228, the shaft C1227 is passed through, and the carriage C1228 moves upward along the shaft C1227 as the belt C1224 rotates between an upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley (not shown).

The inclined guide portion C1230 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278 and 285 is a
is rotated around the rotation axis C1132 to guide it so as to be inclined. Inclined guide part C
1230 is provided on the right side of the lower part of the left lifting mechanism C1210. Inclined guide part C123
0 comprises a guide surface C1231 and a folded portion C1232.

The guide surface C1231 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 is a surface that guides the movable production accessory C1100. The guide surface C1231 is formed so as to be inclined forward and downward.

The folded portion C1232 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 is formed such that the front end of the guide surface C1231 is folded rearward and upward.

The holding mechanism C1300 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 280, 281 and 285 to 287 holds the movable performance accessory C1100 at a predetermined position. Specifically, the holding mechanism C1300 moves the movable production accessory C1100 to the position (Fig. 2
89), and a position below the standby position (intermediate position shown in FIG. 291) in the state of performance. The holding mechanism C1300 includes an upper left holding portion C131
0, an upper right holding portion C1320, a lower left holding portion C1330, and a lower right holding portion C1340.

The upper left holding part C1310 and upper right holding part C1320 shown in FIGS. 277 and 280 hold the movable production accessory C1100 at the standby position. The upper left holding portion C1310 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion C1211 of the left lifting mechanism C1210. The upper right holding portion C1320 is provided above the base portion C1221 of the right lifting mechanism C1220. Upper left holding portion C13
10 is provided above the upper right holding portion C1320.

The lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340 shown in FIGS. 277 and 280 hold the movable production accessory C1100 at an intermediate position. The lower left holding portion C1330 is provided below the base portion C1211 of the left lifting mechanism C1210 (below the upper left holding portion C1310). The upper right holding portion C1320 is provided below the base portion C1221 of the right lifting mechanism C1220 (below the upper right holding portion C1320). The lower left holding portion C1330 is the lower right holding portion C
It is provided above 1340 .

The upper left holding portion C1310, upper right holding portion C1320, lower left holding portion C1330, and lower right holding portion C1340 have substantially the same configuration. Therefore, below, the configuration of the lower left holding unit C1330 will be described, and the upper left holding unit C1310, the upper right holding unit C1320, and the lower right holding unit C1
Description of the configuration of 340 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 287, the lower left holding portion C1330 includes a claw portion C1331 and a solenoid C13.
32 and a solenoid holder C1333.

The claw portion C1331 shown in FIGS. 277, 285 and 287 is a portion on which the movable production accessory C1100 is placed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 285, the slider C1133 of the movable production accessory C1100 is placed on the claw portion C1331. As shown in FIG. 287, the claw portion C1331 includes a body portion C1331a, a rotating pin C1331b, and an engaging portion C1331c.

The body portion C1331a shown in FIG. 287 forms the main structure of the claw portion C1331. The body portion C1331a is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. More specifically, the body part C
1331a is mainly composed of a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending rearward from the lower end of the portion. A portion of the main body portion C1331a (the portion extending forward)
is provided so as to protrude rearward from the base portion C1211.

A rotation pin C1331b shown in FIG. 287 is a portion that serves as a rotation center of the claw portion C1331. The rotation pin C1331b is inserted through the upper portion of the main body portion C1331a with its axis directed to the left and right. Further, the rotating pin C1331b is inserted through a solenoid holder C1333, which will be described later.

The engaging portion C1331c shown in FIG. 287 is formed so as to extend rightward (left-right center side of the game board P1100) from an arm-shaped portion provided on the upper portion of the main body portion C1331a.
The engaging portion C1331c is provided in front of the rotating pin C1331b.

The claw portion C1331 formed in this manner is formed to be rotatable around the axis of the rotating pin C1331b.

A solenoid C1332 shown in FIG. 287 is a drive source for the claw portion C1331. The solenoid C1332 is provided on the front side of the base portion C1211. The solenoid C1332 attracts the plunger holder C1332a by being energized. This causes the plunger holder C1332a to move upward. Further, the plunger holder C1332a returns to its original position by the biasing force of the biasing means C1332b when the excitation of the solenoid C1332 is released. A recess C1332c is formed in the plunger holder C1332a.

The recess C1332c is formed such that the left surface of the plunger holder C1332a is recessed rightward. The concave portion C1332c is formed so that the engaging portion C1331c enters.

The solenoid holder C1333 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 to 287 supports the solenoid C1332 and covers the solenoid C1332. The solenoid holder C1333 is provided in front of the base portion C1211. Solenoid holder C1
333 is formed in a box shape with an open rear surface. A groove portion C1333a is formed in the solenoid holder C1333.

A groove portion C1333a shown in FIG. 286 is formed in a generally elongated hole shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction directed vertically. The groove portion C1333a is formed to penetrate the solenoid holder C1333 in the front-rear direction. The groove C1333a is provided at one position on the right side of the solenoid holder C1333 and at two positions on the left side of the solenoid holder C1333 so as to be vertically aligned. These three grooves C1333a are provided at positions corresponding to part of the pin C1211a.
1a is inserted. As a result, the moving direction of the lower left holding portion C1330 can be restricted in the vertical direction, and the movable range can be restricted.

In the lower left holding portion C1330 configured in this manner, as shown in FIG. 290, the solenoid C1332 is energized to move the plunger holder C1332a upward, thereby causing the engaging portion C1331c of the claw portion C1331 to move toward the lower surface of the recessed portion C1332c. engages (abuts) with. The concave portion C1332c of the plunger holder C1332a pushes up the engaging portion C1331c of the claw portion C1331, so that the claw portion C1331 rotates counterclockwise in left side view about the axis of the rotating pin C1331b. As a result, the claw portion C1331 (the portion that protrudes rearward from the base portion C1211) is retracted forward from the rear surface of the base portion C1211.

The impact absorbing means C1400 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 285 and 286 absorbs the impact received by the holding mechanism C1300 from the movable production accessory C1100.

The impact absorbing means C1400 are provided immediately below the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340, respectively. The impact absorbing means C1400 is provided on the base portion C1211 of the left lifting mechanism C1210 and the base portion C1221 of the right lifting mechanism C1220.
The impact absorbing means C1400 includes a receiving portion C1410, a supporting portion C1420, and an urging means C143.
0. The following description focuses on the impact absorbing means C1400 immediately below the lower left holding portion C1330.

The receiving portion C1410 shown in FIGS. 285, 286 and 288 supports the holding mechanism C1300 from below. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, the solenoid holder C1333 of the lower left holding portion C1330 is placed on the receiving portion C1410. The receiving portion C1410 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. More specifically, the receiver C1410
It is mainly composed of a substantially rectangular plate-like portion when viewed from the front and a portion extending forward from the upper end of the portion. The receiving portion C1410 includes a groove portion C1411 and a pin C1412.

The groove portion C1411 shown in FIGS. 286 and 288 is formed in a generally elongated hole shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The groove portion C1411 is formed so as to penetrate the receiving portion C1410 in the front-rear direction. Two groove portions C1411 are formed so as to be arranged side by side with an interval therebetween. The two grooves C1411 are provided at positions corresponding to part of the pin C1211a.
1211a is inserted. As a result, the moving direction of the receiving portion C1410 can be restricted in the vertical direction, and the movable range can be restricted.

A pin C1412 shown in FIG. 288 is formed in a cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed vertically. The pin C1412 is fixed substantially in the center of the receiving portion C1410 in the left-right direction and provided to extend downward from the receiving portion C1410.

The support portion C1420 shown in FIGS. 285, 286 and 288 is provided below the receiving portion C1410. The support portion C1420 is fixed to the base portion C1211.
A through hole C1421 is formed in the support portion C1420.

A through-hole C1421 shown in FIG. 288 is formed to penetrate vertically through the center of the support portion C1420. A pin C1412 is inserted through the through hole C1421. The through hole C1421 is formed to have a size (diameter) that allows the pin C1412 to slide.

The biasing means C1430 shown in FIGS. 285, 286 and 288 biases the receiving portion C1410 upward. The biasing means C1430 is, for example, a compression coil spring. The biasing means C1430 is provided between the receiving portion C1410 and the support portion C1420. biasing means C
1430 is provided so that the pin C1412 is inserted through its center. The urging means C1430 formed in this manner urges the receiving portion C1410 upward.

In the impact absorbing means C1400 configured in this manner, the biasing force of the biasing means C1430 pushes the impact absorbing means C1400 to the highest position within the movable range. As a result, the lower left holding portion C1330 is also pushed up to the highest position within the movable range.

Hereinafter, using W017 to W025, the operation of the movable production accessory C1100 when performing production will be described.

As shown in FIG. 289, the movable production accessory C1100 is positioned at the standby position before the production. In addition, when the movable production accessory C1100 is positioned at the standby position, it is positioned behind the logo accessory C1500 and cannot be visually recognized by the player (FIGS. W01 and W02).
reference). At this time, the movable effect accessory C1100 has an upper left holding portion C1310 and an upper right holding portion C
A slider C1133 is placed on the claw portion C1331 of the 1320 (the base portion C1211 and the portion protruding rearward from the base portion C1221) (see FIG. 285, etc.), thereby being held at the standby position (FIG. 277, etc.). reference). At this time, the harpoon role C1120 is the production surface (
The front surface of the harpoon accessory C1120 is held in a posture (hereinafter referred to as a “vertical posture”) facing forward.

When moving the movable production accessory C1100 from the standby position to the intermediate position, first, the solenoids C1332 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 are temporarily energized.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 290, the claw portions C1331 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 rotate and retract forward from the rear surfaces of the base portions C1211 and C1221, respectively. Then, the claw portions C1331 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 cannot support the slider C1133 of the movable production accessory C1100.

Then, the movable production accessory C1100 is free-falling to the intermediate position (FIGS. 291 and 292
). Then, the movable effect accessory C1100 is received by the claw portions C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 (see FIG. 293 and the like).

At this time, the lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340 move the movable effect accessory C110.
It receives a downward force from 0 (see Figures 285 and 286). Then, the lower left holding portion C1
330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 press the receiving portion C1410 downward. Receiving part C14
10 is guided by the groove C1411 and the pin C1211a against the biasing force of the biasing means C1430, and the base C together with the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340.
Move down along 1211 . The elastic force of the biasing means C1430 can absorb the shock received by the holding mechanism C1300 when the movable effect accessory C1100 moves to the intermediate position. The movable effect accessory C1100 includes a lower left holding portion C1330 and a lower right holding portion C1
It is held in an intermediate position by 340 (see Figures 291 to 293).

When moving the movable effect accessory C1100 from the intermediate position to the projecting position, the lower left holding part C1
330 and the solenoid C1332 of the lower right holding portion C1340 are temporarily energized. As a result, the claw portions C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 rotate and retract forward from the rear surfaces of the base portions C1211 and C1221, respectively. Then, the claw portions C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 cannot support the slider C1133 of the movable production accessory C1100.

Then, the movable production accessory C1100 falls freely, and the guided portion C1124a of the base portion C1124 of the movable production accessory C1100 comes into contact with the guide surface C1231 of the inclined guide portion C1230 from above (two points in FIG. 294 see dashed line). And the guided portion C1124a
is guided by the guide surface C1231, the harpoon accessory C1120 rotates forward and upward (counterclockwise in left side view) about the axis of the rotation axis C1132 with respect to the support C1130.

Further, the guided part C1124a moves forward and downward along the guide surface C1231, so that the movable production accessory C1100 inclines so that the lower part protrudes forward. Then, when the guided portion C1124a comes into contact with the folded portion C1232, the movable effect accessory C11
The forward and downward movement of the lower portion of 00 is restricted. In this way, the movable production accessory C1100 moves to the projecting position (see FIGS. 294 to 297). At this time, the harpoon accessory C1120 is
A posture in which the performance surface (the front surface of the harpoon accessory C1120) faces forward and upward (hereinafter referred to as “tilted posture”)
is held in

The excitation of the solenoid C1332 is temporary, and the excitation of the solenoid C1332 is released after the movable effect accessory C1100 falls from the claw portion C1331. Then, the plunger holder C1332a moves downward by the biasing force of the biasing means C1332b,
The front surface of the claw portion C1331 is pressed downward. As a result, the claw portion C1331 moves toward the rotation pin C1.
It rotates clockwise about the axis of 331b in a left side view and returns to the original position (the position shown in FIG. 287(a)).

In addition, the movable production accessory C1100 moves from the projecting position (see FIG. 295) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 291).
) or the standby position (see FIG. 289), the lift drive motor C1216 of the left lift mechanism C1210 is driven to rotate the belt C1214 and the carriage C121.
8 is raised (see Figure 281). At the same time, the lift drive motor C1226 of the right lift mechanism C1220 is driven to rotate the belt C1224 and lift the carriage C1228.

By doing so, the carriage C1218 and the carriage C1228 can move the movable effect accessory C
Push up the slider C1133 of 1100 (see FIG. 281). As a result, the movable effect accessory C1100 moves upward along the shafts C1217 and C1227. In this way, the movable production accessory C1100 can move from the projecting position to the intermediate position or the standby position. The same applies when the movable effect accessory C1100 moves from the intermediate position to the standby position.

In addition, when the movable effect accessory C1100 moves upward and reaches the intermediate position or the standby position, it is brought into contact with the claw portion C1331 from below. Then, when the movable production accessory C1100 moves further upward, the claw portion C1331 rotates, and the base portion C1211 and the base portion C
It retracts forward from the rear surface of 1221 . That is, the slider C of the movable production accessory C1100
1133 is not restricted in movement by claw portion C1331 when moving upward.

In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment configured as described above, the impact absorbing means C1400
However, it is formed to absorb the impact received by the holding mechanism C1300 when the movable performance accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) moves (freely falls) from the standby position to the intermediate position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the movable effect accessory C1100 and the holding mechanism C1300. Also, at this time, the movable effect accessory C1100 moves up and down due to the gravity (downward force) of the movable effect accessory C1100 and the biasing force (upward force) of the biasing means C1430 of the impact absorbing means C1400. It works like bouncing several times. Such an amusing action of the movable production accessory C1100 can enhance the interest of the player. Further, the receiving portion C1410 can be returned to its original position by the biasing force of the biasing means C1430.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 rotates the claw portion C133 by energizing the solenoid C1332.
1, the movable production accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) can be moved downward by free fall.

Also, the harpoon accessory C1120 moves from the standby position (see FIG. 289) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 291).
From the intermediate position to the extended position (see FIG. 295) it moves forward and downward. The harpoon accessory C1120 is in a vertical posture at the standby position and the intermediate position, and changes its posture to an inclined posture by rotating during the operation to the projecting position. In this way, the harpoon role C112
By changing the motion direction and posture of 0, the movement of the harpoon role C1120 can be varied, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the inclined guide portion C1230 is provided, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be reliably moved from the intermediate position to the projecting position.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the holding mechanism C1300 is the driving mechanism C120.
0, while the impact absorbing means C1400 is provided on the front side of the driving mechanism C1200. By arranging the holding mechanism C1300 and the impact absorbing means C1400 on opposite sides in this way, it is possible to secure the arrangement space for other members. In addition, the holding mechanism C1300 has a movable effect accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C11) at the standby position and the intermediate position.
20) are held at different heights on the left and right. By doing so, it is possible to ensure a space for arranging other members.

Next, using FIGS. 279 and 298 to 301, the second decorative lens C1121d
and the light emitting portion C1123a. Below, a plurality of light emitting units C1123a
Focus on the light emitting portion C1123a1, which is one of them.

FIG. 298 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the ornamental accessory board C1123 with the harpoon accessory C1120 in the vertical posture and the second decorative lens C1121d. As shown in FIGS. 279 and 298, the decorative decorative accessory board C1123 is arranged behind the second decorative lens C1121d. Then, as shown in FIG. 298, the second decorative lens C1121d is arranged at a position displaced downward with respect to the ornamental accessory board C1123. More specifically, the second decorative lens C1121d is positioned entirely below the light-emitting portion C1123a1 mounted on the accessory electrical board C1123. Therefore, the light emitting portion C1123a1 and the light emitting portion C1123
A first decorative body C1121a having lower transparency than the second decorative lens C1121d, rather than the transparent second decorative lens C1121d, is placed between the viewpoint of the player Z who has the same height as the viewpoint a1. intervening. As a result, the player Z cannot visually recognize the light-emitting portion C1123a1 through the second decorative lens C1121d.

FIG. 299 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the ornamental accessory board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d with the harpoon accessory C1120 in an inclined posture. As shown in FIG. 299, by tilting the harpoon accessory C1120 so that the lower part of the harpoon accessory C1120 protrudes forward, the distance between the vertical center of the light emitting part C1123a1 and the vertical center of the second decorative lens C1121d is increased. The distance in the height direction becomes closer. Between the light-emitting part C1123a1 and the viewpoint of the player Z, a transparent second decorative lens C1121d is interposed. As a result, player Z
, the light-emitting portion C1123a1 can be visually recognized through the second decorative lens C1121d.

In this way, by changing the attitude of the harpoon accessory C1120 from the vertical attitude to the tilted attitude, it is possible for the player Z to change the appearance of the light emitted from the light-emitting part C1123a1, which is easily visible through the second decorative lens C1121d. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the posture of the harpoon accessory C1120 is changed from the vertical posture (see FIG. 298) to the inclined posture (see FIG. 299), the number of the light-emitting portions C1123a at the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d increases. As a result, the light-emitting portion C11 that can be easily visually recognized through the second decorative lens C1121d
The light from 23a can be increased and the second decorative lens C1121d can be made brighter.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the front and back distance between the ornamental accessory board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d is set longer than in the examples shown in FIGS. Note that in FIG. 279 and the like, the first decorative lens C1121c is the second decorative lens C11.
21d, but in the modification shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the left and right positions of the first decorative lens C1121c are arranged to be substantially the same as the left and right positions of the second decorative lens C1121d. It is assumed that there is

As shown in FIG. 300, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, the light emitting part C112
3a1 is positioned at substantially the same height as the vertical center of the first decorative lens C1121c. Thereby, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting part C1123a1 through the first decorative lens C1121c.

As shown in FIG. 301, when the harpoon accessory C1120 assumes an inclined posture, the light emitting part C1123a1
is located at substantially the same height as the vertical center of the second decorative lens C1121d. Thereby, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting part C1123a1 through the second decorative lens C1121d.

In this way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, different transmissive members (first decorative lens C1121c
Alternatively, the light from the light emitting portion C1123a1 can be easily recognized visually through the second decorative lens C1121d).

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498
(see publication).

The above publication discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
Accessory decorative body C1121 (movable part) having second decorative lens C1121d (transmissive member)
, and a harpoon role C1120 (movable device) having a light emitting part C1123a (light emitting means) provided on the back side of the role object decoration C1121,
a support C1130 for supporting the harpoon accessory C1120;
An inclination driving part (an inclination guide part C1230 and a rotation axis C1132 )and,
with
The light emitting portion C1123a includes a light emitting portion C1123a1 (first light emitting means),
The harpoon accessory C1120 is
The distance in the height direction between the light-emitting portion C1123a1 and the second decorative lens C1121d is formed to decrease when the vertical posture is tilted to the tilted posture.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the player can change the appearance of the light from the light-emitting portion C1123a1, which is easily visually recognized, through the second decorative lens C1121d.

Further, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, the light emitting part C1123a1
It is difficult for the player to see the light from the second decorative lens C1121d,
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined posture, the light from the light emitting part C1123a1 can be easily recognized by the player through the second decorative lens C1121d.

With such a configuration, the second decorative lens C
It is possible to change whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion C1123a1 through 1121d can be visually recognized.

Further, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, the second decorative lens C11
21d is located below the light emitting portion C1123a1,
The lower part of the harpoon accessory C1120 protrudes forward and inclines to the inclined position, thereby shortening the distance in the height direction between the light emitting part C1123a1 and the second decorative lens C1121d.

With such a configuration, when the lower part of the harpoon accessory C1120 protrudes forward, the player can easily see the light from the light emitting part C1123a1 through the second decorative lens C1121d.

In addition, the permeable member is
A first decorative lens C1121c (first transparent member) and the first decorative lens C1121
A second decorative lens C1121d (second transparent member) provided below c,
The light emitting portion C1123a includes a light emitting portion C1123a1 (second light emitting means),
The light emitting unit C1123a1 is
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical posture, it is positioned at substantially the same height as the first decorative lens C1121c in a front view,
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined posture, it is positioned at substantially the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d in a front view.

With such a configuration, the light emitting section C is illuminated through different transmissive members in the vertical posture and the inclined posture.
The light from 1123a can be easily visually recognized.

Further, the second decorative lens C1121d is
It is provided between the pair of left and right first decorative lenses C1121c.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in an inclined posture, the light from the light emitting part C1123a can be easily recognized through the transparent member on the central side, which is easily recognized by the player.

In addition, it comprises a decorative decorative board C1123 (board) on which the light emitting part C1123a is mounted,
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined posture, compared to when it is in the vertical posture, the overlapping area between the decorative decorative accessory board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d increases in front view. be.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the tilted posture, compared to when it is in the vertical posture, the light from the light emitting part C1123a, which is easily visible through the second decorative lens C1121d, can be easily increased. can be done.

Further, a plurality of the light emitting units C1123a are provided,
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined position, the number of the light emitting parts C1123a at the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d is increased compared to when it is in the vertical position.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the tilted posture, compared to when it is in the vertical posture, the light from the light emitting part C1123a, which is easily visible through the second decorative lens C1121d, can be easily increased. can be done.

In addition, a left elevating mechanism C1210 and a right elevating mechanism C1220 (elevating mechanism) capable of elevating the harpoon accessory C1120 are provided,
The tilt drive unit
By rotating the harpoon accessory C1120 with respect to the left lifting mechanism C1210,
It is tilted from the vertical posture to the tilted posture.

With such a configuration, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be diversified.

Further, the left lifting mechanism C1210 and the right lifting mechanism C1220 are
The harpoon role C1120 can be moved up and down between a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize and an effect position (intermediate position and projecting position) that is easily visible for the player,
The tilt drive unit
The harpoon accessory C1120 can be tilted to the tilted posture when the harpoon accessory C1120 is at the performance position.

With such a configuration, the light-emitting portion C11 visible through the second decorative lens C1121d
It is possible to diversify the appearance of the light from 23a and the movement of the harpoon role C1120.

Further, the left lifting mechanism C1210 and the right lifting mechanism C1220 are
The harpoon accessory C1120 can be raised and lowered between an intermediate position (first position) that is the production position and a projecting position (second position) that is the production position and is different from the intermediate position. ,
The tilt drive unit
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the intermediate position, it is in the vertical posture, and when it is in the projecting position, it is tilted in the tilted posture.

With such a configuration, the light-emitting portion C11 visible through the second decorative lens C1121d
It is possible to diversify the appearance of the light from 23a and the movement of the harpoon role C1120.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498
(see publication).

The above publication discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A harpoon accessory C1120 operable between a standby position (first position) and an intermediate position (second position);
A holding mechanism C1300 that holds the harpoon accessory C1120 at the standby position and the intermediate position
(holding portion);
a shock absorbing means C1400 for absorbing the shock received by the holding mechanism C1300 when the harpoon accessory C1120 moves to the intermediate position;
is provided.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be changed by absorbing the impact.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 is
a claw portion C1331 movable between a supporting position supporting the harpoon accessory C1120 and a non-supporting position not supporting the harpoon accessory C1120;
a solenoid C1332 (driving means) for moving the claw portion C1331;
is provided.

With such a configuration, by moving the claw portion C1331 to the non-supporting position, the claw portion C13
The harpoon accessory C1120 held in 31 can be put into a state where it is easy to operate.

Further, the impact absorbing means C1400 is
a receiving portion C1410 formed to receive the holding mechanism C1300 (claw portion C1331) and to be vertically movable;
a biasing means C1430 that biases the receiving portion C1410 upward;
is provided.

With such a configuration, it is possible to return the receiving portion C1410 to its original position while absorbing the impact.

Further, a base portion C1211 (support portion) having a projecting pin C1211a (projection portion) and movably supporting the receiving portion C1410 is provided,
The receiving portion C1410 is
has a groove portion C1411 extending in the vertical direction,
The movement direction is regulated by inserting the pin C1211a into the groove C1411.

With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the movement of the receiving portion C1410.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 can operate in the same direction as the operating direction of the harpoon accessory C1120.

With such a configuration, impact can be effectively absorbed.

In addition, the harpoon accessory C1120 is
operable to a projecting position (third position) different from the standby position and the intermediate position;
Movement from the intermediate position to the projecting position is performed in a direction different from the movement direction from the standby position to the intermediate position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, by changing the motion direction of the harpoon role C1120, the movement of the harpoon role C1120 can be varied.

In addition, a driving mechanism C1200 (operating mechanism) for operating the harpoon accessory C1120 is provided,
The harpoon accessory C1120 is
operable to a projecting position different from the standby position and the intermediate position;
It is formed to be rotatable with respect to the driving mechanism C1200, and changes its posture by rotating during the movement from the intermediate position to the projecting position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, by changing the attitude of the harpoon role C1120, the movement of the harpoon role C1120 can be varied.

In addition, an inclined guide portion C1230 (guide portion) is provided to guide the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 from the intermediate position to the projecting position.

With such a configuration, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be reliably moved from the intermediate position to the projecting position.

In addition, a driving mechanism C1200 (operating mechanism) for operating the harpoon accessory C1120 is provided,
The holding mechanism C1300 is provided on the rear side of the driving mechanism C1200.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the harpoon role C1120 can be held in a state where the holding mechanism C1300 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Further, the impact absorbing means C1400 is provided on the front side of the driving mechanism C1200.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the drive mechanism C1200.

Further, the intermediate position is located at a height different from the standby position,
The impact absorbing means C1400 is
Left impact absorbing means C1400 (first absorbing portion) for absorbing impact on one side of the harpoon accessory C1120;
A right shock absorbing means C1400 (second absorbing portion) that absorbs shock on the other side of the harpoon accessory C1120 and is provided at a different height from the left shock absorbing means C1400;
is provided.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure the arrangement space for other members.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the accessory decoration C1121 is decorated with a harpoon-like decoration, but the decoration can be arbitrary.

Also, in the present embodiment, the movable effect accessory C1100 moves downward by free fall, but it may operate using the lift drive motor C1216 and the lift drive motor C1226 as drive sources.

Further, in the present embodiment, the impact absorbing means C1400 is provided immediately below the left lower holding portion C1330 and the right lower holding portion C1340, but either the left lower holding portion C1330 or the right lower holding portion C1340 is provided. may be provided immediately below the . It may also be provided immediately below the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320.

Also, in the present embodiment, the movable production accessory C1100 moves vertically, but the moving direction is not limited to this, and can be any direction (for example, left-right direction). The moving direction of the harpoon accessory C1120 can also be set to any direction (for example, the horizontal direction).

Below, the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Components identical or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same names or the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment has the first to fifth
It differs greatly from the pachinko game machine according to the embodiment. The upper accessory C2000 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 302 to 320. FIG.

The upper role item C2000 shown in FIGS. 302 to 304 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by acting at an appropriate timing. The upper accessory C2000 is
It is installed on the upper part of the game board P1100. More specifically, the upper accessory C2000 is the game board P
It is installed behind the predetermined accessory C2100 installed above 1100 . Upper Accessory C
2000 comprises a base member C2010, a first accessory C2020, a second accessory C2030 and a drive mechanism C2040, as shown in FIGS.

The base member C2010 is provided with a first accessory C2020 and the like, which will be described later.
The base member C2010 is formed in a frame shape. The base member C2010 is provided on the game board P1100 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 302). Base member C2010
is a frame C2011, a support member C2012, a guide portion C2013, a stopper C201
4 and spring C2015.

A pair of left and right frames C2011 are provided. The frame C2011 is formed in an elongated shape with its longitudinal direction oriented vertically.

The support member C2012 is a member that supports a motor C2041 and the like of the drive mechanism C2040, which will be described later. The support member C2012 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The support member C2012 is formed to extend over the left and right frames C2011. Support member C20
12 are fixed to the upper ends of a pair of left and right frames C2011.

The guide part C2013 is a member that guides the first accessory C2020, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, the guide portion C2013 includes a pair of left and right frames C
2011 respectively. The guide portion C2013 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the axial direction directed vertically. The upper end of the guide portion C2013 is attached to the upper end of the frame C2011. The lower end of the guide portion C2013 is attached to the lower end of the frame C2011.

The stopper C2014 is for restricting the downward movement of the first accessory C2020 within a predetermined range. The stopper C2014 is provided on each of the pair of left and right frames C2011. The stopper C2014 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The stopper C2014 is fixed to the lower portion of the frame C2011. Stopper C20
14 includes a lower insertion portion C2014a, an upper insertion portion C2014b and a contact portion C2014c.

The lower insertion portion C2014a is the guide portion C201 at the lower end portion of the stopper C2014.
3 is a portion to be inserted.

The upper insertion portion C2014b is positioned at the upper and lower intermediate portions of the stopper C2014, and the guide portion C2
013 is a portion to be inserted.

The contact portion C2014c is a portion that can contact a first accessory C2020, which will be described later. The contact portion C2014c is configured by a plate-shaped elastic member (rubber or the like). Contact portion C
2014c is mounted on the upper insertion portion C2014b.

The spring C2015 is for urging the first accessory C2020 upward. Spring C
2015 are provided in the left and right guide portions C2013, respectively. The spring C2015 is fitted onto the guide portion C2013. The lower end of the spring C2015 abuts on the lower insertion portion C2014a of the stopper C2014. The upper end of the spring C2015 contacts the first accessory C2020.

The first accessory C2020 gives a visual impression to the player by moving.
The first accessory C2020 is arranged in front of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. As shown in FIGS. 306 to 308, the first accessory C2020 comprises a first decorative member C2021, a first electrical board C2022, a first closing member C2023 and a second closing member C2024. . Although the details will be described later, the first accessory C2020 is provided so as to be vertically slidable by a driving mechanism C2040 described later. Figures 302 to 31
4 shows the state in which the first role item C2020 is slid most upward. Below, based on this state, the first accessory C2020, the second accessory C2030, and the drive mechanism C20
40 will be explained.

The first decorative member C2021 is a member capable of transmitting light. First decorative member C2021
is composed of a light-transmissive material (lens). As shown in FIGS. 309 and 310,
The first decorative member C2021 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. Also, the first decorative member C2021 is formed in a thin case shape (a shape in which the outer edge part extends slightly rearward) with an open rear part. The first decorative member C2021 is the base member C
2010 from the left end to the right end. The first decorative member C2021 includes a decorative portion C2021a, a vertical hole C2021b, an upper cutout portion C2021c, and a lower cutout portion C202.
1d (see FIG. 312).

The decorative portion C2021a is a portion of the first decorative member C2021 to which decoration (for example, decoration imitating a predetermined character, etc.) is applied. The decoration part C2021a is formed in the left-right middle part on the front surface of the first decoration member C2021. The decoration part C2021a is, for example,
A pattern is printed, and a sheet that allows light to pass through the printed portion (pattern) is fixed to the first decorative member C2021.

The vertical hole C2021b is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the vertical direction. The vertical hole C2021b is
It is formed so as to pass through the first decorative member C2021 in the front-rear direction. The vertical holes C2021b are formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion C2021a.

The upper notch C2021c is, as shown in FIGS. 310 to 312, the first decorative member C2.
021 with the upper end part cut away. The upper notch C2021c is the first decorative member C
2021 are formed. Note that FIG. 312 schematically shows the first accessory C2020.

The lower notch C2021d is obtained by notching the lower end of the first decorative member C2021. A plurality of lower cutouts C2021d are formed in the first decorative member C2021.

As shown in FIGS. 309 and 311, the first electrical board C2022 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The first electrical board C2022 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the first electrical board C2022. By causing the LED to emit light, light can be emitted forward of the first electrical board C2022. The first electrical board C2022 is accommodated in the first decorative member C2021 and fixed to the first decorative member C2021.

The first closing member C2023 is, as shown in FIGS. 308 and 309, the first decorative member C
It is a member that closes the left and right parts of 2021 from behind. The first closing member C2023 is
A pair of left and right is provided. The first closing member C2023 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The first closing member C2023 is fixed to the first decorative member C2021. The first closing member C2023 has a vertical hole C2023a and an insertion portion C2023b.

The vertical hole C2023a is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the vertical direction. The vertical hole C2023a is
It is formed so as to pass through the first closing member C2023 in the front-rear direction. The vertical hole C2023a is formed on one side in the left-right direction of the first closing member C2023 (the side close to the left-right central portion of the first decorative member C2021).

The insertion portion C2023b is connected to the guide portion C2013 of the base member C2010 (see FIG. 303).
It is a member that is inserted through. The insertion portion C2023b is formed on the other side in the left-right direction of the first closing member C2023 (the side closer to the left and right outer sides of the first decorative member C2021).

The second closing member C2024 is a member that closes the left-right middle portion of the first decorative member C2021 from behind. The second closing member C2024 is arranged between the left and right first closing members C2023. The second closing member C2024 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The second closing member C2024 is fixed to the first decorative member C2021. Second closing member C
2024 comprises a slit C2024a.

The slit C2024a is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the vertical direction. Slit C202
4a is formed to pass through the second closing member C2024 in the front-rear direction. Slit C20
A plurality of 24a are formed spaced apart from each other.

The second accessory C2030 gives a visual impression to the player by moving.
As shown in FIGS. 306 and 308, the second accessory C2030 is provided so as to sandwich the first accessory C2020 from the front and rear. The second accessory C2030 includes a second decorative member C2031,
A decoration supporting member C2032 and a second decorative substrate C2033 are provided.

The second decorative member C2031 is a member capable of transmitting light. Also, the second decorative member C2
031 is a member forming the front side of the second accessory C2030. Second decorative member C203
1 is composed of a light-transmissive material (lens), and is configured to be able to transmit light. The second decorative member C2031 is formed in a substantially plate shape. The second decorative member C2031 is formed so that its plate surface faces forward and backward and extends over the left and right vertical holes C2021b of the first decorative member C2021. The second decorative member C2031 is given a predetermined decoration (for example, a decoration imitating a predetermined character or the like). The second decorative member C2031 is arranged in front of the first accessory C2020. More specifically, in the state shown in FIGS. 306 and 308, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged so as to overlap (stack) the first accessory C2020 in front view. The second decorative member C2031 includes a projecting portion C2031a and a vertical hole inserting portion C2031b.
Equipped with

The protrusion C2031a is a portion that protrudes rearward. A plurality of projecting portions C2031a are formed with an interval left and right. The projecting portion C2031a is formed in the left-right middle portion of the lower end portion of the second decorative member C2031. The projecting portion C2031a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction.

The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is a portion that is inserted into the left and right vertical holes C2021b of the first accessory C2020. The vertical hole insertion portions C2031b are formed at the left end and right end of the second decorative member C2031, respectively. Two vertical hole insertion portions C2031b on the left and right are formed with an interval therebetween. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the second decorative member C2031.

The decoration support member C2032 is a member that supports the second decoration member C2031. again,
The decoration support member C2032 is a member that constitutes the rear side of the second accessory C2030. The decoration support member C2032 is formed in a substantially plate shape. The decoration support member C2032 has its plate surface facing forward and backward, and extends from the first closing member C2023 on the left side to the first closing member C2023 on the right side.
is formed so as to span The decoration support member C2032 is arranged behind the first accessory C2020. More specifically, the decoration support member C2032 is arranged so as to overlap the first accessory C2020 in front view in the state shown in FIGS. The decoration support member C2032 has a fixing portion C2032a, a vertical hole insertion portion C2032b and a horizontal hole C2032c.

The fixing portion C2032a is a portion to which the projecting portion C2031a of the second decorative member C2031 is fixed. A plurality of fixed portions C2032a are formed with a space left and right. Fixed part C20
32a is formed in the left-right middle part of the lower end of the second decorative member C2031. The fixed portion C2032a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. Fixed part C2032
a is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the decoration support member C2032. Fixed part C2
The projecting portion C2031a is inserted through and fixed to 032a. Thus, the decoration support member C2032 supports the second decoration member C2031.

The vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is a portion that is inserted through the vertical holes C2023a of the left and right first closing members C2023. The vertical hole insertion portions C2032b are formed on the left and right portions of the decoration support member C2032, respectively. Two vertical hole insertion portions C2032b on the left and right are formed with a space therebetween in the vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 306 and 314, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the decoration support member C2032.

The horizontal hole C2032c is an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the left-right direction. The lateral hole C2032c is
They are respectively formed above the left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2032b. The horizontal hole C2032c is formed so as to pass through the decoration support member C2032 in the front-rear direction.

The second electrical board C2033 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The second electrical board C2033 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the second electrical board C2033. By causing the LED to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light forward of the second electrical board C2033. The second electrical board C2033 is located in the middle of the front surface of the decoration support member C2032 (fixed part C2032
a) above). In this way, the second electrical board C2033 is the second decorative member C
It is fixed to the decoration support member C2032 instead of 2031. As a result, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are separated from each other so that the second decorative board C2033 is not interposed between the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031. They are arranged so that they are adjacent to each other in the front and rear.

The second accessory C2030 configured as described above includes vertical hole insertion portions C2031b and C2032
b is inserted through the vertical holes C2021b and C2023a of the first accessory C2020, and the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b contacts the vertical hole C2023a from below. In this way, the second accessory C2030 has the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b hooked to the vertical hole C2023a, and the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b can support the first accessory C2020. Also, the second role C
2030, the vertical hole insertion portions C2031b and C2032b are the vertical holes C2 of the first accessory C2020.
By moving along 021b and C2023a, it is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction relative to the first accessory C2020.

The drive mechanism C2040 is for operating (sliding) the first role product C2020 and the second role product C2030. As shown in FIGS. 305 and 313, drive mechanism C204
0 comprises a motor C2041 and an arm C2042.

The motor C2041 is for generating power (driving source). The motor C2041 is
It is fixed to the rear surface of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. The motor C2041 is
They are provided at the left end and right end of the support member C2012, respectively. The motor C2041 can rotate a drive shaft (not shown) whose axial direction is oriented in the front-rear direction.

The arm C2042 is for transmitting the power of the motor C2041 to the second accessory C2030. The arm C2042 is provided on the front surface of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. The arms C2042 are provided on the left and right parts of the support member C2012, respectively. The left and right arms C2042 are arranged near the left and right motors C2041 in a rear view. As shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, the arm C2042 has a gear portion C204.
2a and an extension C2042b.

The gear portion C2042a is formed in a substantially disk shape, and is formed so that teeth are provided on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The gear portion C2042a is connected to the support member C20 via the rotating shaft C2042c.
12 is rotatably supported (see FIG. 305). The gear portion C2042a is connected to the motor C204
It is provided so as to mesh with a motor gear (not shown) fixed to one drive shaft.

The extending portion C2042b is a portion extending radially outward from the gear portion C2042a. The extending portion C2042b is formed to extend upward from the gear portion C2042a. In this embodiment, the direction in which the extending portion C2042b extends from the gear portion C2042a may be referred to as the "orientation of the arm C2042". A pin C2042d is provided at the tip (upper end) of the extension C2042b. The pin C2042d is inserted through the horizontal hole C2032c of the decoration support member C2032 of the second accessory C2030. The pin C2042d has a horizontal hole C2
032c is slidably provided. Arm C2042 is connected to the second by pin C2042d.
support the role C2030. Also, the arm C2042 supports the first role C2020 via the second role C2030.

In the upper accessory C2000 configured as described above, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged in the foremost position (see FIG. 307). Further in front of the second decorative member C2031, a predetermined accessory C2100 is arranged so as to overlap when viewed from the front (see FIG. 302). In this way, the first decorative member C2021, the second decorative member C2031, etc. are the predetermined accessories C210.
It is hidden by 0 and is invisible to the player. Note that, in the present embodiment, "not visible" refers to a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Conditions that are difficult to see include, for example, a state in which all parts are invisible (completely invisible) and a condition in which only a few parts are visible (mostly invisible) and are included. Hereinafter, such a state in which the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are invisible is referred to as a "standby state".

As shown in FIG. 313, the arm C2042 faces upward in the standby state.
With such a configuration, torque (rotational force) does not act on the arm C2042 due to the weight of the first role C2020 and the second role C2030. The accessory C2030 can be supported in a stable state.

The operation of the upper role item C2000 configured as described above will be described below.

In the upper accessory C2000, the power of the motor C2041 of the drive mechanism C2040 causes the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 to slide up and down as shown in FIGS. executed. In the following, the operation of the upper role product C2000 will be described by taking as an example the case where the first role product C2020 and the second role product C2030 are slid downward from the standby state shown in FIG.

The first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 slide downward from the standby state to the first sliding state (FIGS. 315 and 316). ). In addition, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are brought into the second sliding state (FIGS. 318 and 319) by sliding only the second accessory C2030 downward from the first sliding state. You can transition to

First, the operation from the standby state to the first slide state will be described.

When the motor C2041 is driven in the standby state shown in FIG. 313, the motor C204
The gear portion C2042a of the arm C2042 that meshes with the motor gear 1 rotates. At this time, the left gear portion C2042a rotates counterclockwise in FIG. In addition, the gear portion C2042a on the right side rotates clockwise in FIG. Motor C2
The driving of 041 is controlled by the effect operation control circuit 89 .

As shown in FIGS. 313 and 317, along with the rotation of the left and right gear portions C2042a, the left and right extension portions C2042b are configured such that the tip portions (pins C2042d) of the left and right extension portions C2042d extend into the horizontal holes C of the decoration support member C2032.
While sliding on 2032c, it rotates about the rotation axis C2042c. Thus arm C2
042, as shown in FIGS. 316 and 317, transmits the power of the motor C2041 to the decorative support member C2032 formed with the horizontal hole C2032c to slide the second accessory C2030 downward. The first accessory C2020 slides downward against the biasing force of the spring C2015 due to its own weight when the second accessory C2030 slides downward. At this time, the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 moves downward along the guide portion C2013.
Thus, the first accessory C2020 slides downward integrally with the second accessory C2030 while being guided by the guide portion C2013.

In the motor C2041, the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 is the stopper C201.
4 (at a position where the arm C2042 faces substantially in the horizontal direction)
be stopped. The first role item C2020 and the second role item C2030 are arranged in a position lower than the predetermined role item C2100 (see FIG. 315) while overlapping each other in the front and rear direction. In this way, as shown in FIG. 315, the second decorative member C2031, which is the most forward of the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030, is in the first slide state visible to the player. becomes.

In the first sliding state, the first decorative board C2 in the first decorative member C2021
The light emitted from 022 passes through the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 in order, and is emitted to the front of the game board P1100. Thus, in the first sliding state, light from the first decorative board C2022 through the first decorative member C2021 causes
The decorative member C2031 can be made to emit light so that it can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are overlapped in the front and rear, and the first decorative member C2
021 is hidden, the second decorative member C2031 can be illuminated.

Next, the operation from the first slide state to the second slide state will be described.

The motor C2041 is driven from the first slide state to rotate the gear portion C2042a. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, the motor C2041 stops when the arm C2042 rotates downward. The second accessory C2030 slides downward as the arm C2042 rotates.

As described above, the first accessory C2020 is in the insertion portion C2023 in the first sliding state.
b contacts the contact portion C2014c of the stopper C2014 and cannot slide downward. Therefore, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b (see FIG. 314) of the decoration support member C2032 is moved to the vertical hole C2023 of the first closing member C2023 as the arm C2042 is driven.
Slide down along a. Also, the vertical hole insertion portion C203 of the second decorative member C2031
1b (see FIG. 308) slides downward along the vertical hole C2021b of the first decorative member C2021 of the first accessory C2020 as the arm C2042 is driven. thus the second
The second role C2030 slides downward relative to the first role C2020, and the second role C2030 is placed at a position lower than the first slide state. In this way, the first
slide state to the second slide state.

As shown in FIGS. 318 and 319, in the second sliding state, the second decorative member C
2031 is arranged at a position that hardly overlaps with the first decorative member C2021. Thus, the first decorative member C2021 hidden in the first slide state becomes exposed (visible to the player) in the second slide state.

In the second slide state, the light from the first decorative board C2022 passes through the first decorative member C2021 and is emitted to the front of the game board P1100. According to this, in the second sliding state, the light from the first electrical board C2022 moves the first decorative member C2021.
can be illuminated so as to be visible to the player.

Further, as described above, in the first sliding state, the second decorative member C2031 is caused to emit light by the light from the first electrical board C2022. On the other hand, in the second sliding state, the first decorative member C2021, not the second decorative member C2031, can be illuminated by the light from the first electrical board C2022. In this configuration, by switching between the first slide state and the second slide state, it is possible to change the member that emits light from the first decorative board C2022 (see FIGS. 315 and 318). . In this way, it is possible to make the lighting mode of the first decorative board C2022 different and improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the second slide state, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged at a position (central part of the game board P1100) visible to the player, as shown in FIG. Also, the second
The decorative member C2031 is arranged in front of the second electrical board C2033. Thus, in the second slide state, not only the first decorative member C2021 but also the second decorative member C2031 can emit light so as to be visible to the player. According to the configuration, the second
, the two members (the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2
031) can be made to emit light at the same time, and the amusement of the game can be effectively enhanced.

Note that the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are the first accessory C20
20 and the second accessory C2030 slide upward, the transition is made from the second slide state to the first slide state and then to the standby state in order. The spring C2015 can assist the upward sliding action of the second role C2030 by urging the first role C2020 upward.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the first electrical board C2022 is accommodated in the first decorative member C2021. The first accessory C2020 is the first electrical board C2
022 emits light through the slit C2024 of the second closing member C2024.
can be discharged from a. However, the slit C2024a may be closed by another member depending on the state of the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031. For example, in this embodiment, in the standby state shown in FIG. 305, the base member C2
There is a possibility that the slit C2024a is blocked by the support member C2012 of 010 or the like. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper cutout portion C2021c and the lower cutout portion C2021d are formed in the first decorative member C2021, and even when the slit C2024a is closed, the heat generated in the first decorative substrate C2022 is discharged. It has an easy-to-use configuration.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the upper notch C2021c allows air to flow into and out of the first decorative member C2021 at the upper portion of the first decorative member C2021. there is In addition, the lower notch C2021d allows the first decorative member C2
In the lower part of 021, the air can be circulated to the inside and outside of the first decorative member C2021. According to this configuration, when the temperature of the first decorative member C2021 rises, the first
The heat in the decorative member C2021 can be discharged from the upper notch C2021c, and air can be introduced from the outside through the lower notch C2021d (causing a chimney effect). As a result, even when the slit C2024a is closed, the first decorative member C2021
The internal heat can be efficiently discharged, and the temperature rise in the first decorative member C2021 can be suppressed. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the first electrical board C2022.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498
(see publication).

The above publication discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
a translucent first movable body (first decorative member C2021);
a translucent second movable body (second decorative member C2031) provided in front of the first movable body (first decorative member C2021);
a first light emitting means (first decorative substrate C2022) provided behind the first movable body (first decorative member C2021);
with
The first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are connected to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) via the first movable body (first decorative member C2021). A first state (first slide state) in which the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) emits light so as to be visible from the front by light from one light emitting means (first decorative board C2022). , the first movable body (first
The second state (second slide state) in which the decorative member C2021) emits light so as to be visible from the front is operable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the first state (first slide state) move forward and backward relative to each other. They are positioned so as to overlap.

Such a configuration allows the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) to emit light while the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) is hidden behind.

In addition, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the second state (second slide state) move forward and backward relative to each other. They are positioned so as not to overlap.

With such a configuration, in the second state (second slide state), the light-emitting first movable body (first decorative member C2021) can be easily visible.

Also, the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) is slidably attached to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021).

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change between the first state (first slide state) and the second state (second slide state).

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are in the first state (first slide state), i. The movable body (second decorative member C2031) moves relative to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) to enter the second state (second sliding state). It is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change to the second state (second sliding state) by operating the first movable body (first decorative member C2021).

In addition, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are connected to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2021). 2
movable body (second decorative member C2031) can operate in a third state (standby state) in which it is invisible from the front.

With such a configuration, the first movable body (the first decorative member C2021) or the second movable body (the second decorative member C2031) can be visually recognized as necessary, thereby increasing the interest of the game machine. can be substantially improved.

In addition, the first movable body (first decorative member C202) in the third state (standby state)
1) and the second movable body (the second decorative member C2031) are brought into the second state (second slide state) by operating integrally with each other.

With such a configuration, the first movable body (the first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (the second decorative member C2031) are integrally moved to the second state (the second sliding state). )
and the third state (standby state) can be easily changed.

In addition, the first light emitting means (first decorative substrate C2022) is the first movable body (first
It operates integrally with the decorative member C2021).

With such a configuration, the first light emitting means (first decorative board C2022) and the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) are operated integrally, thereby operating these members. can be aggregated to simplify the configuration.

In addition, a drive source (motor C2041) that generates power,
Power from the drive source (motor C2041) is transferred to the second movable body (second decorative member C2).
031), a transmission means (arm C2042) for transmission to
with
Power from the drive source (motor C2041) is transmitted to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) via the second movable body (second decorative member C2031). .

With such a configuration, the power from the drive source (motor C2041) to the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can also be used to operate the first movable body (first decorative member C2021). can. Thereby, simplification of a structure can be achieved.

Further, it comprises second light emitting means (second decorative board C2033) for causing the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the second state (second slide state) to emit light. is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively enhance the amusement of the gaming machine.

In addition, the second light emitting means (second decorative board C2033) is provided behind the first light emitting means (first decorative board C2022), and the second movable body (second 2 and the decorative member C2031).

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) in the front-rear direction
and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can be shortened, and the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) It is possible to improve the sense of unity as a whole.

As shown in parentheses above,
The first decorative member C2021 is one form of the first movable part.
Also, the second decorative member C2031 is one form of the second movable body.
Also, the first decorative board C2022 is one form of the first light emitting means.
Also, the motor C2041 is one form of a drive source.
Also, the arm C2042 is one form of transmission means.
Also, the second decorative board C2033 is one form of the second light emitting means.

Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the first sliding state, the configuration for causing the second decorative member C2031 to emit light from the light from the first electrical board C2022 is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the second decorative member C2031 emits light while the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are overlapped in the front-rear direction.
Light can be emitted in various configurations. For example, light is emitted toward the second decorative member C2031 arranged at a position shifted in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction with respect to the first decorative member C2021, and the first decorative member C2021
The second decorative member C2031 may emit light without overlapping with the second decorative member C2021.

Further, in the second slide state, the configuration for causing the first decorative member C2021 to emit light from the light from the first electrical board C2022 is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. i.e.
In the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 emits light while the second decorative member C2031 is shifted below the first decorative member C2021. It is possible. For example, the second decorative member C2031 is replaced with the first decorative member C2021.
The first decorative member C2 from the state of being shifted upward or left and right with respect to
021 and the second decorative member C2031 are exchanged in the front and rear positions, the first decorative member C2
021 may be emitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second role C2030 can be slid with respect to the first role C2020. 1 accessory C2020 may be rotatable.

Further, in the present embodiment, by moving the second role object C2030 from the first slide state, the transition is made to the second slide state. Not limited to configuration. For example, the transition to the second slide state may be made by moving the first accessory C2020. Further, for example, by moving the first role item C2020 and the second role item C2030, respectively, the transition to the second slide state may be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 can be changed to a standby state in which the player cannot visually recognize them.
It may be configured such that it cannot be changed to the standby state (always visible to the player).

In addition, in the present embodiment, by integrally moving the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030, the standby state transitions to the first slide state. The configuration for transitioning to is not limited to such a configuration. For example, by moving the first role item C2020 and the second role item C2030 separately, the standby state may be transitioned to the first slide state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 and the first electrical board C2022 move together.
021, the first electrical board C2022 may be configured to be relatively movable.

Further, in this embodiment, the power of the motor C2041 is transmitted to the first accessory C2020 via the second accessory C2030, but the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2
The configuration for operating 030 is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the second character C2
030 and the first accessory C2020 may be configured to operate with power from different drive sources.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second electrical board C2033 is arranged behind the first electrical board C2022, but the configuration is not limited to this. It may be arranged in front of the substrate C2022.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first accessory C2020 is urged upward by the spring C2015, but the configuration is not limited to this. good too. With this configuration, it is possible to assist the downward sliding action of the first accessory C2020.

C2000 upper accessory C2021 first decorative member (first movable body)
C2022 First electrical board (first light emitting means)
C2031 second translucent member (second movable body)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a structural portion comprising a first portion, a second portion, and a third portion,
The first portion comprises a flow path for game balls supplied to the first portion,
The second portion has a flow path that guides the game ball to the first portion,
The third part comprises detection means capable of detecting winning of a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the first part,
The first portion comprises:
a first flow path;
a second flow path different from the first flow path;
a first distributing portion having a rolling surface on which game balls can roll, and capable of distributing game balls supplied to the first portion to the first flow path or the second flow path; ,
a first rolling obstacle portion capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first distribution portion;
A second distribution different from the first distribution unit that can be distributed to a third flow path connected to the first distribution unit or a fourth flow path different from the third flow path and
The first rolling obstacle portion includes a plurality of projecting portions formed to protrude above the rolling surface of the game ball rolling on the first distribution portion,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of projections are arranged so that a game ball can pass between the plurality of projections and move downstream beyond the outer periphery of the rolling surface.

Images